ARTES
LIBRARY
1837
VERITAS
SCIENTIA
OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
RIBUS UNUST
& FLURID
TLEBOR
SI-QUÆRIS PENINSULAM-AMŒNAM
CIRCUMSPICE
1
1
892.75
$ 68
t K 3 5
1895
PORTA
LINGUARUM ORIENTALIUM
INCHOAVIT
J. H. PETERMANN
CONTINUAVIT
HERM. L. STRACK.
ELEMENTA LINGUARUM
Hebraicae, Phoeniciae, Biblico-Aramaicae,
Samaritanae, Targumicae, Syriacae, Arabicae,
Aethiopicae, Assyriacae, Aegyptiacae, Copticae,
Armeniacae, Persicae, Turcicae, aliarum
studiis academicis accommodaverunt
J. H. Petermann, H. L. Strack, E. Nestle, A. Socin, F. Praetorius,
A. Merx, Aug. Mueller, Friedr. Delitzsch, C. Salemann,
Ad. Erman, V. Shukovski, Th. Noeldeke,
G. Steindorff, R. Bruennow, Dav. H. Mueller, G. Jacob, alii.
PARS IV.
ARABIC GRAMMAR
BY
A. SOCI N.
SECOND EDITION.
BERLIN,
REUTHER & REICHARD
LONDON
WILLIAMS & NORGATE
NEW YORK
B. WESTERMANN & Co.
14, HENRIETTA STREET
812, BROADWAY.
1895.

ARABIC GRAMMAR

PARADIGMS, LITERATURE, EXERCISES
AND
GLOSSARY
BY
DR. A. SOCIN
PROFESSOR ORDINARIUS IN THE UNIVERSITY OF LEIPZIG.
SECOND ENGLISH EDITION
TRANSLATED FROM THE THIRD GERMAN EDITION
BY THE
REV. ARCH. R. S. KENNEDY D. D.
PROFESSOR OF HEBREW ETC. IN THE UNIVERSITY OF EDINBURGH.

SIDER
VENTIS
FR
MANIBYS.
BERLIN,
REUTHER & REICHARD
LONDON
WILLIAMS & NORGATE
14, HENRIETTA STREET.
1895.
NEW YORK
B. WESTERMANN & Co.
812, broadwAY.
005
287
of w
All rights reserved,
including that of translation into other languages.
PREFACE
TO THE
SECOND ENGLISH EDITION.
The aim of the following pages is to furnish intend-
ing students of classical Arabic with the most import-
ant rules both of the Accidence and of the Syntax
in the briefest possible form. The present edition, the
second in English, is a translation of the third German
edition of 1894, to which, save for a few corrections
and additions, it in all respects corresponds. Its
German counterpart has been considerably altered
compared with the second edition because of the
publishers' intention to issue a separate chrestomathy
of Arabic prose. Professor R. Bruennow, a scholar
of approved ability, was entrusted with the prepara-
tion of this work which appeared in the year 1894.
The connected narratives which formerly composed
the chrestomathy of the grammar were, according to
arrangement, incorporated in Bruennow's work, and
consequently had to be dropped from the new edition
VI
PREFACE.
of the grammar. On the other hand the latter was
now extended, more particularly in the part dealing
with the syntax, with the result that it will now be
found, with few exceptions, to be sufficient for the
understanding of the new chrestomathy. At the same
time, the fact must again be emphasised that the
present work does not pretend to take the place of
any of the larger treatises; the English student who
wishes to advance beyond the elements of Arabic must
have recourse to the latest edition (the third) of
Wright's excellent grammar. For this reason the
author has deemed it his duty to adhere to his former
view and to decline, in a book intended for beginners,
to enter into the technical terminology of the Arab
grammarians—which may safely be left to the larger
grammars; still the Arabic specialist will easily dis-
cover that their views have been taken into account
even in the present elementary work. The best intro-
duction to this department of study will be found to
be the reading of the Ağrumiye, which Bruennow has
printed in his Chrestomathy.
In order to lighten the first lessons in grammar,
the exercises consisting of short sentences and anec-
dotes have been increased by the addition of a few
short stories, by means of which a sort of stepping
stone is provided to the prose chrestomathy.
PREFACE.
VII
The passages for translation into Arabic have been
retained unchanged along with the appropriate
glossary. Experience has shown that this part of the
chrestomathy has unquestionably been of service; and
although I am strongly of opinion that this class of
exercises is of real value in such systematic instruction
as is necessary at first, I am in no wise blind to the
difficulties which the correction of such exercises entails
even on the teacher of Arabic. In order to meet such
difficulties, I have selected single sentences and anec-
dotes from Arabic authors, and have so arranged both
notes and glossary that the student, who in any case
will have to make diligent use of grammar and dic-
tionary, is so to say compelled to reproduce exactly
the Arabic original. From what has just been said,
it is clear that this part of the book, at least, presup-
poses a teacher, for I am convinced that the grammar
of Arabic as a whole, and the syntax in particular,
can only be mastered with extreme difficulty by self-
instruction. I would add, however, that translation.
from English should be taken at first in the smallest
possible doses, and even in this way only after the
student has read a part of the Arabic texts.
The synopsis of Arabic literature has also been
extended. Strictly speaking, this section is out of
place in an elementary work; still it may afford a
VIII
PREFACE.
stimulus to a beginner here and there, and supply an
occasional hint to those pursuing the study of Arabic
by themselves, or at a distance from the larger seats
of learning.
The present English edition is an entirely new
translation. This difficult and tedious work has been
undertaken by Professor Archd. R. S. KENNEDY of
Edinburgh University. To him and to his late assistant,
Mr. W. B. STEVENSON B. D., Vans Dunlop Scholar in
Semitic Languages of the same University, who has
rendered us great assistance in the reading of the
proofs, I cannot omit to express here my warmest
thanks for their co-operation.
A. SOCIN.
NOTE BY THE TRANSLATOR.
I have only to add to the foregoing, that my
responsibility as translator does not extend to the
English-Arabic exercises and the relative glossary.
A few verbal changes excepted-chiefly where the
"violence done to the Queen's English" (p. 57*) was
greater than seemed absolutely necessary-these
have been reprinted from the first edition. I have
also inserted an additional reference here and there,
and in the bibliographical section I am responsible
for one or two additional entries.
I wish also to express my personal indebtedness
to Mr.Stevenson, without whose generous co-operation,
owing to my absence in the East, the book would
not have been ready in time for this winter's work.
20th September 1895.
A. R. S. K.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
GRAMMAR.
I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONOLOGY (§§ 1—11).
§ 1. Consonants
§ 2. Long Vowels
§ 3. Short Vowels, Nunation, Gezma .
§ 4. Hamza
§ 5. Tešdīd
•
§ 6. Waşla
$ 7. Medda
§ 8. The Syllable.
§ 9. The Tone
§ 10. Pause
§ 11. The Arabic Cyphers and Contractions
II. ACCIDENCE (§§ 12—96).
Chap. I. The Pronoun (§§ 12—15).
•
§ 13. Demonstrative Pronouns
§ 12. Personal Pronouns
§ 14. Relative Pronouns
•
§ 15. Interrogative Pronouns
Chap. II. The Verb (§§ 16–54).
§ 16. Groundform
§ 17. Conspectus of the derived Stems
§ 18. I. Stem
§ 19. II. Stem
§ 20. III. Stem
§ 21. IV. Stem
•
Page
1
6
8
9
11
12
15
16
17
18
18
19
21
23
24
24
24
25
26
26
27
CONTENTS.
XI
Page
§ 22. V. Stem
§ 23. VI. Stem
§ 24. VII. Stem
§ 25. VIII. Stem
•
§ 26. IX. and XI. Stems
§ 27. X. Stem
•
§ 28. The Stems of the quadriliteral Verb
§ 29. The Passive
27
28
28
28
29
29
30
30
§ 30. The Tenses
30
§ 31. The Moods
§ 32. Imperative
§ 33. Inflexion for Person and Number
§§ 34-36. Veibs mediae geminatae
§§ 37-38. Verba hamzata
§ 39. Weak Verbs
§ 40. Verba primae et is.
9
§§ 41-44. Verba mediae
و
et s
§§ 45-48. Verba ultimae 9 et S.
§ 49. Doubly weak Verbs
§ 50. The Verb J
31
32
33
34
36
38
38
39
41
44
45
§ 51. Verbs of Praise and Blame
§ 52. Forms of Admiration
§ 53. The Verb with Pronominal Suffixes.
§ 54. Sign of the Accusative
46
46
46
47
Chap. III. The Noun (§§ 55—90).
a. Formation of Nouns.
§ 55. Primitive and derived Nouns .
§ 56. Summary of the simple Nouns
§ 57. Nouns with Preformatives
§ 58. Nouns with Afformatives
§ 59. Quadriliteral Nouns
§ 60. Participles
§ 61. Infinitives
§ 62. Verbal Adjectives
48
49
49
50
50
50
51
53
XII
CONTENTS.
§ 63. Intensive Forms
§ 64. Nomina loci, instrumenti, speciei
§ 65. Nomina relativa
66. Nomina deminutiva
•
Page
54
55
56
57
57
58
58
59
and S
60
§ 67. Nouns from Stems mediae geminatae
§ 68. Nouns from Stems with Hamza
§ 69. Nouns from Stems primae 9
§ 70. Nouns from Stems med. 9 and S
§ 71. Nouns from Stems ultimae
و
b. Gender of Nouns.
§ 72. Masculine and Feminine Gender
§§ 73-74. Formation of the Feminine
62
32
63
c. Inflexion of Nouns.
§ 75. Number and Case
65
66
67
68
68
69
70
71
72
73
73
74
75
76
•
78
80
§ 76. Formation of the Dual and Plural
§ 77. Case-endings of Singular. Triptote and Diptote Nouns
§ 78. Diptotes
•
§ 79. Inflection of the Determined Noun
§ 80. Shortening of Dual and Plural in the Construct State
§ 81. Inflection of Nouns in in and an from ult. 9 and S
§ 82. The Noun with the Pronominal Suffixes
§ 83. Vowel Changes in the Pluralis Sanus
§ 84. Proper Names compounded with
$ 85. Vocative .
§ 86. Collective Nouns
§ 87. Broken Plurals
§ 88. List of the principal varieties of the Broken Plural
§ 89. Broken Plurals from Quadriliteral Nouns
§ 90. Nouns of irregular Formation
Chap. IV. The Numerals (§§ 91–93).
91. The Cardinal Numbers
83
§ 92. The Connection of the numeral with the thing numbered
§ 93. Ordinal Numbers and Fractions
85
86
CONTENTS.
XIII
Chap. V. Particles (§§ 94-96).
§ 94. Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions.
§ 95. Inseparable Particles
§ 96. Prepositions and Particles with Suffixes.
III. SYNTAX (§§ 97-160).
Chap. I. Tenses and Moods (§§ 97-104).
Page
88
88
89
§ 97. Perfect and Imperfect
§ 98. Use of the Perfect
§ 99. Use of the Imperfect
§ 100. Subjunctive
§ 101. Modus apocopatus
§ 102. Modus energicus
§ 103. Passive .
§ 104. Participles
D
Chap. II. Government of the Verb (§§ 105–117).
§ 105. The Verb and its Compliment .
§ 106. Accusative.
§ 107. Accusative after verbs of coming &c.
§ 108. Verbs with two Accusatives
§ 109. The Absolute Object
§ 110. The Accusative as Predicate
90
91
92
94
95
95
96
96
97
97
97
97
98
99
100
of Concomitance
101
101
§ 114* Accusative in Exclamations
102
§§ 114-116. The Verb with Prepositions
103
§ 117. in Dates
104
§ 111. Accusative with Y
§ 112. Accusative with
و
§ 113. Accusative of nearer Definition
Chap. III. Government of the Noun (§§ 118–134).
118. The Noun with the Article (Determination)
§ 119. Apposition .
§§ 120-122. Qualifying Adjuncts
§§ 123-130. The Genitive Relation
•
105
106
107
109
XIV
CONTENTS.
§ 133. The Nomen Regens undetermined
§ 134. Improper Annexation
Chap. IV. The Simple Sentence (§§ 135–151).
§ 135. Distinction bet. Nominal and Verbal Sentences
§ 136. The Verb in the Verbal Sentence
§§ 137-138. Indefinite Subject
§ 139. The Predicate in the Nominal Sentence .
§§ 140-146. Connection bet. Subject and Predicate
§ 147. The Particles 'inna and 'anna
§ 148. Subordinate Sentences
Page
§ 131. The Construction of the Infinitive
112
§ 132. The Participle and its Object
113
114-
114
§ 149. More than one Predicate
§ 150. Negative Sentences
§ 151. The Particle of Exception
115
115
117
118
119
122
123
125
125
126
•
Chap. V. Compound Sentences (§§ 152-161).
§ 152. Co-ordinate Sentences
127
§§ 153-156. The Relative Clause
128
§ 157. The Circumstantial Clause
131
§ 158. The Temporal Clause
132
$159. The Conditional Clause with the Perfect
133
§ 160. The Conditional Clause with the Apoc. Impf.
§ 161. The Particle in the Apodosis.
134
134
APPENDIX.
Computation of Time (Names of the Days of the Week, the
Months &c.)
•
LITERATURE.
A. Bibliography
B. Introduction and general
C. Chrestomathies
D. Grammars
•
136
139
144
144
145
CONTENTS.
XV
Page
E Lexicography
147
F. Koran, Islam, Life of Muhammed, Bible &c.
150
G. Jurisprudence
153
H. Philosophy
154
I. Natural Sciences and Medicine
156
K. History, Biographies
157
L. Cosmography, Geography, Ethnography, Travels
163
M. Poetry
166
N. Belles Lettres, Ethics, Romances
169
IX. Verba hamzata
VIII. Verbum mediae geminatae, derived Stems
PARADIGMS.
I. Suffixes and Prefixes for the Conjugation of the Verb
II. Strong triliteral Verb Act. I.
•
III. Strong triliteral Verb Pass. 1.
IV. Quadriliteral Verb, derived Stems
V. Strong triliteral Verb, derived Stems
VI. Verbum mediae geminatae Act. I.
VII. Verbum mediae geminatae Pass. I.
3*
*
6*
7*
8*
10*
11*
12*
X. Verbum primae radicalis et S
13*
XVIII. Verbum tertiae radicalis 9 vel
XI. Verbum mediae radicalis
XII. Verbum mediae radicalis S Act. I.
•
XIII. Verbum mediae radicalis 9 vel S Pass.
XIV. Verbum med. radicalis 9 et S, derived Stems
XV. Verbum tertiae radicalis 9 (éé) Act. I.
XVI. Verbum tertiae radicalis (á) Act. I.
XVII. Verbum tertiae radicalis 9 vel
S
•
14*
و
Act. I.
15*
16*
17*
18*
19*
•
20*
() Act. I.
21*
XXII. Nouns in "in" and "an".
XXI. Nomen generis feminini .
XX. Nomen generis masculini
XIX. Verbum tertiae radicalis 9 vel S, derived Stems
Pass. I.
24*
22*
25*
26*
XXIII. The Noun with Pronominal Suffixes
27*
28*
XVI
CONTENTS.
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
I. Exercises on the Grammar
A. For practice in Reading
B. Exercises on the Accidence.
C. Exercises on the Syntax .
Page
II. Connected Extracts
III. For Translation into Arabic
30*
32*
35*
48*
57*
GLOSSARIES.
A. English-Arabic
79*
B. Arabic-English
104*
PART I.
GRAMMAR
AND
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.2
1
GRAMMAR.
I. THE ARABIC CHARACTERS. PHONOLOGY
(§§ 1—11).
a.
The Consonants. The Arabs at first used the Syriac 1.
characters and the Syriac alphabet, in which the order
of the characters is the same as in Hebrew. A relic
of this earlier order is still preserved, in the employ-
ment-afterwards seldom resorted to-of the letters
of the alphabet as cyphers (cf. pages 4-5). At an
early period, however, the Arabs distinguished by
means of diacritical points a number of sounds which
were not so distinguished in the older alphabet.
By a process of curtailment, moreover, a number of
characters became so like each other that they had
to be distinguished by similar diacritical signs. The
next step was to group together in the alphabet the
characters which in this way had come to resemble
each other. Hence the Arabic alphabet now consists
of twenty-eight consonantal signs, the usual order and
1*
Page Missing
in Original
Volume




Page Missing
in Original
Volume




4
TABLE OF CHARACTERS.

Names
}
& 트
​* Alif' الف | 1
2
Ba
3
Tā
Tha تا 4
LO
5
()
جيم
Jim
6 Hhā
7 : Kha
خا
JIS Dāl
Dhal ڈال 9
10 2 Rā
$
Zai زى 11
12
سين
S
13
شين
Sin
Šīn
Form
C C C
*<
ˇ
b
X
st
7.
Not joined.
Joined only to
preceding cons.
Join to precedg.
and follg. cons.
Joined only to
following cons.
Value
Pronunciation
Transcription.
Numerical
Value.
Hebrew.
cf. §§ 2 and 4 1
English hard th as
in thing
b
t
400
t
ادہ
500
א
LA
ב | 2
.ៗ
orig. g hard;
later
نا
ج
g in Italian giorno; g
31
English j
strong h with fric- h
V
tion of larynx as if
Է
N NO
wheezing
h 600
A
ch in Scotch loch
d 4
d
d 700
ـذ
ذ
soft th, as in this
r
200
r
Z as in zeal; soft s z
as in rose
7 T
سه س
sh ش ش ش
33
س
ش
S
AN
hard S
60
S<
Š
300
* The termination s i. e. un (see § 3b) is neglected in the translitera-
tion, as in the modern Arabic pronunciation.
!
TABLE OF CHARACTERS.
5
Names
Form
Not joined.
Joined only to
preceding cons.
Join to precedg.
and follg. cons.
Joined only to
following
cons
Pronunciation
Value
Transcription.
Numerical
Value.
Hebrew.
emphatic s
emphatic d(tongue
S
90
pressed against the d 800
gum)
emphatic t
t
9
•
Z
900
صاص
ص /
Sad صَان 14
Dad ضاد | 15 ض غر ض ض
bb
3 I d
༥)
emphatic z ظ ظ ظ ظ
produced by a tight-
по
غ
Ta طاء 16
Za ظاء 17
18
G
Jus Ain
علين
O
Ghain غين
20
21
S
Fa
↳ Kāf 4·
Kaf کاف | 22
23
- Làm
Lām
24
25
میم
نون
Mim
Nun
26 alo Hã
2715 Waw
Ya یا 28
ening of the vio-
of
1 b
70
lently compressed
glottis
ـقـق
k ك كك
& 6: 6. M.
I d
ـل ل
ė
guttural r
·g 1000
ė
f
f
80
33
deep emphatic k
k 100 P
k
1
+
m
m
Эх
G
勺
​f
*
ㄨ​:
い
​n
n
a
h
h
W
W
6
2 y
y
10
כ | 20
ל 30
מ 40
כ | 50
ה | 5
י
ថ
6
2. THE VOWELS, HOW INDICATED.
b.
C.
2.
a.
forms of which are exhibited on pp. 4-5. These
signs are written and read from right to left. Some
are joined, to the letters preceding or following, others
are not, as indicated in the table referred to.
When 8 (No. 26), at the end of a word, indicates
the feminine termination (§ 73), two dots are placed
over it to show that it must be pronounced as t (Nr.
3); thus: 8.
خ ح ج
Very frequently, especially at the beginning of
words, certain letters, instead of being written along-
side of each other, are placed one above the other
this is particularly the case with the letters
(Nos. 5—7), e. g. for a (Nos. 2 and 6), ≥ (Nos.
5 and 6) for, (Nos. 18 and 5) for &c.
Instead of J (Nos. 23 and 1) the Arabs write or Y
(the Lam in the latter form beginning at the left
of Alif).
عد
The vowels, how indicated. In the earliest times
the Arabs indicated only the long vowels a, i, ū, and
the diphthongs au, ai (whose second element they
regarded as a consonant); this was done by employing
the sign (No. 1) for ā,, (No. 27) for ū and (with a)
(No. 28) fór i and (with a) ai. In cases where
and indicate the sounds au and ai, which we pronounce
as diphthongs, Sukūn (see § 3 c) is ordinarily placed
au,
ی
2. THE VOWEL SIGNS.
7
over these letters, to denote that they have no vowel
of their own. Examples: Jāla, sīra,
.nauman نوم
sūķun, & baïun, s
بسير
سبوق
In the oldest writing, the long a was not uniformly b.
represented by I, but was occasionally left unrepre-
sented. This omission has continued to be observed
in a series of very common words; in such cases,
however, an upright stroke is usually placed over the
consonant that is to be pronounced with the long ā,
هاذا) هذا
الله
J
رحمن,
e. g. lió (for fōto) hāḍā, ļ 'ilāhun)(God), ~,
raḥmānu. Frequently, however, in our printed editions,
we find this long a represented by a simple —, thus:
.hada هذا
α
In a few words a after an a does not indicate c.
9
the pronounciation au but a long a, originally no doubt
an obscure a; in this case, too, the upright stroke is
حياة حيوة
the usual sign, e. g. (alongside of ) ḥayātun
life (but with Suffixes: x hayatuhu his life).
At the end of many words.
ی
is likewise employed d.
in c)
to represent a long a; in such cases (like the
,
it does not receive the Sukun (§ 3 c), e. g. (or
1
رمی
رمی
ramă (he has thrown); in the middle of a word,
on the other hand, takes the place of this; thus
with a suffix so, ramāhu he has thrown it.
8
3. THE SHORT VOWELS.
e.
3.
a.
NOTE a. In a few rare cases, in the middle of a word, we
find a denoted by ¿____, as in the foreign word taurātun Torah.
NOTE b. Should be preceded by a 2, I is written for the
former in order to prevent two coming together; e. g. Lis
dunyă world für (§ 74 a).
Occasionally an ↑ is added to a final u or au, but
it is entirely left out of account in the pronunciation;
e. g. Iï katabū, I, ramau (§§ 33 and 53).
The short vowels were originally, as a rule, left
unrepresented¹; afterwards the following signs were
employed to represent the short vowels, and (in con-
junction with the signs discussed in § 2) the long
vowels as well:
G
فتح
1 Fatha² (also Fath) — for a (in
x ≤
certain cases to be pronounced like e in men, also
like German ä in Männer), e. g. ĺķatala, ÍŠ ķāla.

2)
gaḍiba,
G
3)
Kesra (also
.yabu يبيع
49
Kesr)
غَضِبَ .for i, e. g.
b.
Damma (also Damm) for u, e. g.
yaktubu; yafūtu.
When these signs for the short vowels are written
1 Many books, particularly those printed in the East, are
printed without these vowel signs.
2 The terminations, are here represented in the trans-
literation by a, as in modern Arabic.
4. HAMZA.
9
twice at the end of a word, they are to be pronounced
with a final n (called by the Arabs Tanwin,
S
تَنْوِينْ
g.
by us frequently Nunation, from the letter nūn), e.
šamsin, № rağulun. The Nunation an receives
شمس
as an additional indication the letter, but the pro-
Somālan.
nunciation remains unaffected, e. g. malan. This
is omitted only when the Nunation accompanies the
feminine termination s (see above § 1b), e. g.
markūbatan, or in cases where the word already has
a final f, or in its place a
riban, ¿Ã's hudan (§ 2d).
مَرْكُوبَةً
quiescing in a, e. g.
5,
The same holds good in
most cases after Hamza (§ 4). The vowel of the Nu-
nation is always short.
When a consonant has no vowel of its own, this c.
is indicated by the sign
Sukun [Rest]) e. g.
جزمة
Ğezma (also called
safartu,
ma-
šaita (cf. § 2). On the omission of this sign see § 5.
A consonant which is thus pronounced without a
vowel following is said to be "resting".
Hamza. In order to distinguish the cases in which 4.
I was employed to denote a (§ 2), from those in which a
it had (as originally in Hebrew) its proper force as
a consonant, the Arabs gave it the additional sign
b.
C.
10
4. HAMZA.
ع
Hamza (in form a modified
(in form a modified 'Ain). accord-
ingly denotes the closure of the larynx by which the
breath, engaged in voice production, is turned on or
off, according as the Hamza precedes or follows a
vowel. It is best heard in English before the second
of such pairs of words as "sea eagle", "mine eyes".
Its effect may also be noted by comparing the two
following pronunciations of Kuran, viz: Ku-ran and
Kur-'an (the latter with Hamza). In the translitera-
tion we indicate by except at the beginning of a
word where no indication is required. The sign is
placed under the I, when followed by an i-sound.
805
2
G
Examples 'amrun, №ļ 'ïbilun,
امر
إبل,
sa'ala,
july
&
&
'ibilun, 'umamun;
pol'umamun;
سَال
ra-sun; ik-ra. In the last two exam-
ra-sun;151:
ples Hamza closes the syllable.
Before or after an i- or u-sound, the signs, and
are generally employed instead of as the bearers of
the Hamza, in which case
ی
__
dots: e. g. bausa,
بوس
Bğita, Cab
جمت
ی
- &,
ği'ta, Cão şa’iba, &,
اری
is written without the two
وعة
yu'taru, yu'āṭaru;
yubārî'u.
After a long vowel, and in most cases after Sukūn,
Hamza as a rule has no bearer, but is written on or
above the line, thus: L'irḍā'un, (or
بره
89
15)
bar'un. After a vowelless consonant in the middle of
5. TEŠDID.
G
11
a word, Hamza with its vowel is placed over the
connecting stroke (except, of course, when no such
connection is possible, as after, in mamlï'atun),
thus: & hați'atun; in the same way ✪ šai’an;
On the other hand, in cases like L'imḍā'an no
Alif is written at the end, cf. § 3 b.
GE
EO-
ㅇ
​Tešdid. That a consonant is to be sounded twice 5.
is indicated by the sign of doubling ", named
653
تَشْدِيلٌ
Tesdīd or Šedd (from the initial of this word
W
the sign ~ has been derived), e. g.
j
sabba, s
taraḥḥulun. This doubling of a consonant is either due
as in the examples just given to the essential
nature of the form, nominal or verbal (as for example
the verbal forms corresponding to the Hebrew Piel
§ 19), or is the result of assimilation.
a.
When one consonant is assimilated to another, the b.
assimilation is further graphically represented by the
removal of the Sukun from the assimilated consonant.
This applies to the 7 of the article JI, when the latter
precedes one of the following consonants:, ☺, d,
¿, j,
vò,
je je uw, con vos vė, b, b, J, y (that is, dentals,
sibilants and r, l,n). Examples:
attāğiru,
3
atṭalğu, j………↓ĺ aššamsu, (the sun), but alķamaru
(the moon). From the fact that the two last examples
12
6. WASLA.
are stereotyped those consonants that may be assimi-
lated are technically called solar letters, those that
do not admit of assimilation, lunar letters.
او
NOTE a. The word &'ilāhun, God, when joined to the article
drops the first syllable and becomes &UJ (§ 2b) allāhu.
ندو
NOTE b. The words min, an, l'an (and
followed by a few words beginning with m or
! 'in), when
are usually
combined with them into one word, the final n being at the
las
same time assimilated to the following consonant, e. g. s mimmā
from
6. X
مِنْ
ما
WE
生
​min mă, Y'allā from an lā.
Waṣla. A word beginning with two consonants
a. receives in Arabic either a full helping-vowel prece-
ded by Hamza in accordance with § 4a (e. g.
Plato), or merely a vowel which is heard only when
the word is standing alone, but which must be given
up when the word in question comes to stand after
another word in the sentence. Thus in the latter
وہ
090
case we find uktul instead of stul. The I
which is prefixed in this and similar cases is, however,
still written although the helping vowel accompanying
it is given up, and it then receives over it the sign
S
bintulwazīri.
žo, waşla~e. 8. „‚ÏÎ Qiş bintulwaziri.
الْوَزِيرِ
بِنتُ
The two
words thus united together are also to be pronounced
as if they formed a single word. Such an Alif Waṣlatum
or Waşla-bearing Alif is called a connective Alif in
X
6. WASLA.
13
contradistinction to a disjunctive Alif, that is, an Aliſ
hamzatum or Hamza-bearing Alif (cf. § 4).
NOTE. The sign is a modification of; waşla or şila deno-
tes "close connection".
When a connective Alif has to be employed at b.
the beginning of a sentence, a full vowel must be
pronounced, but, as written, only the proper vowel
sign may accompany the Alif, never a Hamza. Thus
we have Jarrasulu,
pronounce kalaḥruğ.
الخرج
uḥruğ but
قَالَ أَخْرُجْ
In the last example the division of the syllables c.
is now ka-lah-rug. If the vowel preceding a connec-
tive Alif is long, it must now be pronounced as a
short vowel, since it stands in a shut syllable (see
§ 8). Thus, properly fi-lfulki, has now the
following syllables fil-ful-ki; so too xĨ, riḍa-llāhi
(§ 2 d) — ri-ḍal-lā-hi, 55, (§2e) da-ba-ḥul-'iwazza.
If the word before a connective Alif ends in a d.
consonant which has no vowel of its own, the conso-
nant receives a helping-vowel. The most natural
i, e. g.
- darabati ضَرَبَتِ الْعَبْدَ vowel in such a case is in eg
اِسْتِقْبَال ضَرَبَتْ)
l'abda (for 5); so istikbalun with the ar-
ticle J: Jalistikbālu, in syllables thus: a-lis-
tik-ba-lu. In certain cases original final vowels that
e.
14
6. WASLA.
have been dropped reappear before the connec-
tive Alif, e. g.hu-mul-kā-fi-rū-na. The
first word is otherwise uniformly hum (§ 12 a). —
The Nunation (§ 3b) is also treated as if it ended in
a consonant; the favourite vowel in this case is i, e. g.
990
990
pronounced as if written frağu-
lunismuhu, in syllables: ra-ğu-lu-nis-mu-hu.
NOTE. Before a connective alif the preposition "away
from" becomes, the preposition, "from" becomes but
before the article .
مین
The same rule applies to a word ending in a so-
called diphthong (cf. §2); the consonant (, or )
forming the second part of the diphthong must receive
a helping vowel before a connective Alif, which vowel
is u or i according as the consonant in question is
or Thus we have a
muş-ṭa-fa-wul-lā-hi
و
ی
-rig-la-yil-ba-ka-ra رجلي الْبَقَرَةِ مُصْطَفَ اللَّهِ in place of
-وا
ti fors. (So, too, with the termination —–
§ 2e).
NOTE. The particles "or" and "would that!" take i as
helping vowel.
f. The connective Alif is altogether omitted in the
following cases:
7. MEDDA.
15
1) In the article I, when it receives as prefixes
the particles ↓ li or Í la; e. g. ŠÁů, lil-ḥak-ki for
ÿ≤ÏÎ, Å‚Ŭ lal-mağ-du for XÏý.
W
ابن
2) In son, in apposition to the proper name
of the son and followed in the genitive by the name.
-mus-li-mub-nul مُسلم بن الوليد .of the father; e. g
wa-li-di Muslim, the son of al-Walid. At the beginn-
ing of a line, however, even in this case we must write
ابن
3
G
3) In the word ismun, name, after the prepo-
S
sition bi in the oft recurring formula x
mil-lā-hi, in the name of God.
بسم
bis-
a.
Medda. Inasmuch as the Arabic orthography 7.
cannot tolerate two Alifs side by side, in such a case
only a single Alif is written, over which is placed a
A Medda or Medd
(a sign derived from A). At
the beginning of a word or syllable the Medda carries
with it the force of a Hamza; the vowel sign Fath is then
I
also dropped, e. g. ¿‹Ã³ä-ki-lun for ķur-ā-
트
​ة آكل
آمن
قرآن اكل
nun for; so 'a-ma-na for, since the
Hamza of the second Alif disappears as explained
§ 38 a.
16
8. THE SYLLABLE.
b.
8.
NOTE.
I
ra'ã may be taken as an example of the rule just
given. With suffixes it ought to appear, according to § 2d, as
JZ/
*,, which, however, is written 81, in syllables ra-'ā-hū.
-
Since a after a long a is written on the line
(§ 4c) without receiving an Alif as bearer, the pre-
ceding the Hamza in such cases likewise receives.
Medda, as a rule, although the latter has no effect on
the pronunciation of the word, e. g. ≤ ğā-'a (for
Ïó̟), \‚³½īéš ta-fā-'a-lũ; and the same where
,2
트
​و
or G
appears as the bearer of Hamza 8. a-ḥib-ba-u-
hu, išīs ķā-i-lun.
NOTE. Arabic orthography has also an objection to two Waws
appearing side by side, if the first has a Damma (even though
the first may be only the bearer of a Hamza, as expained in § 4 c).
Thus
G
رووس
S
ru'ūsun is often written).
The Syllable. An open syllable ends in a vowel
short or long; a shut syllable ends in a consonant.
Every syllable begins with a single consonant, not
with two or more (cf. § 6). A short syllable consists
of a consonant with a short vowel, as in the second
syllable of ma-tă (with two open syllables); a
long syllable consists either 1) of a consonant with a
long vowel, like the open syllable mă in the above
example, or 2) of a consonant, a short vowel and a con-
sonant (shut syllable) e. g. both the syllables of
9. THE TONE.
17
موت
شرا
kat-lun (so too mau-tun § 2a) šar-ran,
or 3) of a shut syllable with a long vowel. This last
variety, however, is only found (exclusive of pausal
effects § 10) when the following consonant has been
$
doubled (§ 5) and is preceded by a long ā, as in 5
S
دويبة
dāb-ba-tun (rarely after ai as in xgo du-waib-ba-tun
which is derived according to § 66 from dabbatun).
Such a syllable may be described as doubly long.
يَقُلْ
Other syllables of this sort are shortened as tëş yakul
9
from yakul; ramat from ramāt.
يَقُولُ
رمت
رَمَاتٌ
NOTE. A word consisting of but one short syllable, if it stands
alone, either receives an addition at the end (see § 49 ab), or is
joined to the following word. The latter method is adopted in a
series of particles (see § 94), which notwithstanding the connec-
tion are still regarded as more or less independent words. The
principal stress, however, rests on the words with which the par-
ticles are connected.
The Accent or Tone. The accent in Arabic is thrown 9.
backwards towards the beginning of the word till it
meets a long syllable, or if there is no such syllable,
till it reaches the first syllable of the word. A simple
long syllable at the end of a word, however, does not
receive the accent. Examples of words with a final
short syllable: daraba, Kilistánkara; with
Gló
a final long syllable:
mámlakatun,
Sorin, Arabic Grammar 2
tamamtumā, 35. fárdun,
ḍárabū, 8№ lidatun.
2
}
10.
18
10. PAUSE. 11. NUMERICAL SIGNS. ABBREVIATIONS,
Exceptions: A syllable with a connective Alif (§ 6),
as in (see § 6a), cannot receive the accent; the
pronunciation is therefore uķtúl. In the same way
monosyllabic inseparable particles, like 5 and 3 (cf.
§ 94), prefixed to words, do not affect the accentuation
of the latter; e. g. famáša.
In pause final short vowels are dropped. Also
the Nunation un and in; the Nunation an is changed
to a, the feminine termination &to (with the h
8
ɩ nāzilūn for ¿Î½ĺš nāzilūna;
نَازِلُونَ sounded): thus
11.
rağul for
rağulun;
فَاطِمَة Fatimah for فاطمة ;marhaban
marḥabā for i
Numerical Signs and Abbreviations. The usual Arabic.
cyphers are the following:
2
I, P, N, F, 0, 4, V, A, 9
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9.
The tens, hundreds &c., are written to the left of
the units &c. as 14 19, A
1190
1895.
The following are a few of the most frequently
occurring abbreviations:
+ = πusi xix = 'alaihi-ssalāmu Peace be upon him!
عم
sallallahu alaihi صَلَّى اللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّمَ = صلعم
wasallama God bless him and give him peace (said of
Mohammed).
12. THE PRONOUN.
19
II. ETYMOLOGY (§§ 12-96).
Chapter I. The Pronoun. (§§ 12—15.)
a.
The personal pronouns are either independent or 12
suffixed. The independent or separate personal pro-
nouns have the following forms:
Sing.
Plur.
Dual
أَنَا
نحن
أَنْتُمَا
انتم)
انتن
انت .masc
انت fem
I. Pers.
II. Pers.
هُمْ هُمُ)
運
​هُمَا
masc.
III. Pers.
fem.
NOTE 1. The second syllable of the pronoun of the first pers.
singular, although written with I, is short. The forms in pa-
rentheses (2nd and 3rd pers. plural) are used particularly before
Waşla (§ 6d); these final vowels are originally long.
NOTE 2. When joined to ½ and → (see § 95) the pronouns of
the 3rd pers. sing. may lose their first vowel e. g. 5, p.
The suffixed personal pronouns, which joined to a b.
noun indicate the genitive, joined to a verb, the ac-
cusative, are the following:
2*
1
20
I. Pers.
II. Pers.
12. THE Pronoun.
Iwith nouns
with verbs
masc.
fem.
Sing.
Plur.
Dual
نَا
ني
كم
J
كِ
6 M
كُمَا
C.
d.
III. Pers.
masc.
fem.
هَا
هُمَا
Before a connective Alif (§ 6 d) the suffix pron. of
the 1. pers. singular may receive as helping-vowel the
a which belonged to it originally; thus we may write
الْكِتَابَ or أَعْطَانِي الْكِتَابَ After a, i and أَعْطَانِي الْكِتَابَ or
ai the nominal suffix of the 1. pers. sing. has the form
W
ya. Occasionally (in the Kur'an particularly) the
suffix of the 1. pers. sing. is indicated by a simple i,
of which the sign is Kesr as my lord! In
the same way the corresponding verbal suffix may
be only ni.
U
After an immediately preceding i or ai the suffixes
8,,,substitute the vowel i for u, thus
W
instead مَالِهِ هِنَّ هِمْ هِمَا , assuming the forms
; e. g.
of. Before the connective Alif
becomes. The suffixes
generally
and
resume
13. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
21
their original forms and before a connective
Alif.
For further information regarding the affixing of
these pronominal forms see § 82 and the table of
paradigms No. XXIII.
The reflexive pronoun, when carrying a certain e.
amount of emphasis with it, is generally expressed
by the words nafsun soul, to which the proper
suffixes are appended. In many cases, however, the
personal pronoun suffices to express the reflexive.
The demonstrative pronouns are the following (with 13.
their inflexion compare § 76 a).
The simple pronoun (rare)
Masc.
Fem.
a.
ૐ
This
Sing.
Nom.
Dual
Gen. Acc.
Plur.
تا زند تی دل ذِي ذَا
تَانِ
تیر
ذَان
ذَيْنِ
(alat) أولاء ala) or) أولى
This simple pronoun combines:
(1) with the demonstrative particle Lé, generally
written defectively (or less correctly § 26). The
é
result is the usual demonstrative pronoun to indicate
that which is near at hand (this, these):
b.
22
13. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
Sing.
Dual
{ Nom.
Gen. Acc.
Masc.
Fem.
(هُذِى) هُذِهِ
هذا
هنان
هُذَانِ
هُدَيْنِ
هتين
C.
Plur.
هؤلاء
The simple demonstrative combines (2) with a
suffix of the second person. Only in the older Arabic,
particularly that of the Kur'an, however, does the
suffix vary according to the number of persons ad-
dressed (e. g. plur. ¿s, dual), elsewhere it
ó,
appears uniformly as J. There is also a form with
J before J. The result is two forms of the demon-
strative pronoun to indicate that which is more remote
(that, those):
That's the as
Masc.
Fem.
d.
تِلْكَ (تِيكَ) نَاكَ ذَلِكَ ذَالِكَ) ذَلِكَ ذَاكَ
Sing.
Dual
f Nom.
ذَانّكَ ذَانِكَ
ذَيْنِكَ ذَيْنِكَ .Gen. Acc
تَانِكَ تَانِكَ
تَيْتِكَ رَتَيْنِكَ
Plur.
أولايك rarely ,(أولاك) أولايك
Among the demonstratives we must also place the
article Jí (see § 56). When the noun, in the circumstances
14. THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
23
detailed in § 6 f 1, begins with a J, this letter has a
Tešdid placed over it and the J of the article is drop-
;لاللَّيْلَةِ for لِلَّيْلَة ped. Thus we get
xʊy (§ 5 note).
so too x for
The relative pronouns are the following:
11.
who, which, that,—originally a compound a.
demonstrative with the article as one of its elements
(hence the connective Alif)-declined as follows:
+ ذى
Sing.
Nom.
Dual
Gen. Acc.
Masc.
Fem.
الَّذِي
الَّتِي
اللتان
اللذان
اللَّتَيْن
اللدَيْنِ
Plur.
اللَّوَانِي اللَّاتِي الَّذِينَ
.
(indeclinable) one who, such (a one) as, he b.
who, those who.
SI
(indeclinable) that which, something which.
Among the relative pronouns may also be included c.
, fem. & he who, she who. This word is declinable
in the sing., but the masc. often takes the place of
the fem. It also combines with the prons. in b above
to form every one who, whosoever; and
whatsoever.
15.
24
15. THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 16. 17. THE VERB.
The interrogative pronouns are:
who مَن
what? Frequently strengthened by the addition
of the demonstrative 13: 13 L what then?
955
, fem. what sort of? which?
NOTE.
after prepositions is shortened to
م
e. g. why?
With this interrogative is also connected the interrogative
particle
how much?
16.
17.
Chapter II. The Verb. (§§ 16–54.)
The great majority of Arabic verbs have three
radical letters; only a small minority have four radi-
cals. The ground-form of verbs, according to which
they are arranged in grammar and dictionary, is the
third person singular of the perfect. The verb és
(to do) is used as a model paradigm.
NOTE. Since all Arabic dictionaries give the verbal and no-
minal derivatives under their respective root-forms, it is necessary,
in order to find the three radicals with ease, to note carefully what
consonants are employed in the formation of verbs and nouns as
prefixes and affixes to, and as infixes in, the stem.
From this ground-form or root, which is named
by grammarians the first stem, other stems are deri-
ved by a series of uniform changes, represented by
18. THE FIRST STEM.
25
modifications of the verbs, but usually referred
to by their respective numbers in the series. Thus
we speak of "the eighth stem", (indicated in the dic-
tionary simply by VIII) not as in Hebrew and Syriac
of the Piel, the Afel &c. The following stems, the
order of which must be carefully noted, are those
most frequently met with:
I
فَعَلَ I
فعل II فَعْلَ
IV Jest
v Jevé
III Áélé
VI Áéléš
استفعل X
VII Lees!
انْفَعَلَ
اِفْتَعَلَ VIII اِنْعَال XI
اِفعَل IX
17010
-0-0
عل
NOTE a. Of these No. IX and especially No. XI are of less
frequent occurrence; still more rare are XII J, XIII,
XIV J, XV. Which of these derived stems are formed
from any given verb, and to what extent the meaning of the ground-
form is modified by them, will be found in the dictionary under
each verb.
3/20
NOTE b. In many cases the verb is used to express the idea
that some one wishes to do something or has something done;
thus & “he killed him" may also signify "he wished to kill him”,
and is → “he cut off his head (prop. neck)" may mean “he
had (curavit) his head cut off."
The ground-form I, in the majority of verbs, takes 18.
the form jas, e. g. Jäs to kill; there is also—mostly
with intransitive verbs-a form J (cf. 733), e. g.
to حزن
to be sad, Á to do (transitive), and also a
19.
20.
26
19, 20. THE II. AND III. STEMS.
form Jes (cf. jp), confined to intransitive verbs, as
to be beautiful. Sometimes both the transitive
حَسُنَ
فَعُلَ or فَعِلَ and فَعَلَ ,and intransitive forms
Kés, are
found side by side in the same verb. One and the
same verb, again, may have both the forms J and
فَعُلَ
as
The II. stem as (corresponding to the Hebrew
Piel) usually denotes a greater intensity of the action
expressed by the simple verb. This intensification
may affect the subject, object or qualifying adjunct,
to kill many people, to massacre (intensi-
fication of the object). In the majority of verbs,
however, the II. stem is causative as to know,
cause to know, to teach. It is also declarative-
as in to lie, to take one for, declare one
to be, a liar and denominative, as in to collect
عَلَّمَ
. ( جيش) an army
The III. stem als expresses an attempt or effort
to perform the action of the simple verb on some per-
son, to influence some person or thing. Thus
kill, but
to try to kill, to fight with;
to
to
كاتب
write, to correspond with (with accusative of
!
21, 22. THE IV. AND V. STEMS.
27
the person corresponded with). This stem also means
to exercise some abstract quality on a person or thing,
e. g. ¿Í to be soft, gentle, to exercise gentleness
on some one, to treat one kindly.
UI
The IV. stem (the Hebrew Hiphîl) has a 21.
to be in good condi-
causative signification, as
أصْلَحَ
I
صَلَحَ
tion,
to bring into good condition. Very
frequently we find, with this stem, denominative verbs
which appear to us as intransitive, but to the Arab
as possessing an implicit transitive force, and which
express the idea of action in a certain definite direction,
as
أَحْسَنَ
As to do good. Frequently, too, verbs of this
stem convey the idea of going to a place, of entering
upon a certain period or condition; e. g.
I
to go
towards the West, to enter upon the period of
the morning, to be something in the morning,
أَشْرَفَ
قَامَ أَقَامَ
트
​to reach the top, to be high; (from rise up,
stand) to halt, to stay.
The V. stem (Hebrew Hithpael), a sort of22.
middle voice is formed from the II. stem and has both a
reflexive and a reciprocal meaning, e. g. to make
one's self great, ples to let one's self be taught, to
learn. Sometimes a verb in the V. stem conveys the
28
23, 24, 25. THE VI., VII. AND VIII. STEMS.
23.
24.
25.
14.
تَنَمَّاً
idea of giving one's self out as something, e. g. Li
to give one's self out for, to conduct one's self as, a
prophet.
The VI. stem jelés, derived from the III. stem, is
the reflexive form of the latter, and has a reflexive or
reciprocal signification, as to show one's self bold;
Ásles to fight one another (usually in the plural).
Another signification is seen, for example, in lés, VI
form of to be high, which means to exalt one's
self and then simply: to be exalted.
The VII. stem z (the Hebrew Niph'al with
the connective Alif acc. to § 6a), derived in most cases
from the I. stem, is a middle or reflexive form of the
latter. Its signification may also be described as
quasi-passive, e. g. to break, to break or
be broken in pieces.
گستر
The VIII. stem J, (with connective Alif § 6a)
is likewise a middle and reflexive form, for the most
part of the I. stem, as !, to oppose one's self,
object to; sometimes also with reciprocal signification
as, to dispute, contend with each other.
NOTE. In the case of verbs whose first radical is, ė, b
orb, the of the VIII. stem is changed to the emphatic b, and
26, 27. THE IX. AND X. STEMS.
29
is even assimilated to the first radical, when that letter is a dental
from اظلم for اظلم or اظلم ; صبغ from اصبغ as
instead
of
ظلم
;is sometimes assimilated also to a preceding, e. g.
**
or from properly; after, and; is changed
ثبت اب
ادترك for ادرك زاد from ازتاد for ازداد into the soft, e g
The IX. stem (as also the XI. stem Ilēšt, 26.
both with connective Alif) is used of verbs which
denote the possession of inherent qualities such as
colours or bodily defects, e. g. from the stem:
to be or become yellow; from the stem
اصفر
to be one-eyed; from the stem
اعور : عور
:اِحْمَار : حمر
to be red.
The X. stem, (with connective Alif) is 27.
105
primarily a reflexive of the IV. (otherwise a
reflexive, formed on the analogy of the VIII. stem, from
a stem with a prefixed s), as from the stem,
IV. to grieve: X. to grieve (one's
اوحش
self). Very frequently the X. stem denotes also to
wish or to beg something for one's self, e. g. from
اغفر
to pardon, X.: to ask for pardon; or to think
that something is so, as to be necessary, IV:
استوجب
وجـ
to make necessary, X: to consider
something as necessary for one's self.
28.
30 28. THE QUADRILIT. STEMS. 29. THE PASSIVE. 30. THE TENSES.
The quadriliteral stems are denoted, for the verbal
and nominal forms, by the paradigm Ús (that is
by the addition of a fourth radical to Jes), and con-
sist for the most part of two stems, of which the first
may be said to correspond to the second stem of the
triliteral verb (for is in reality
second és to the fifth, e. g.
cast down, fall down.
كَبَ
), and the
to overturn,
NOTE. The stems III
and IV
(the last corre-
2_0
sponding to the IX. stem of the triliterals) are rare e. g. b, to
طمان be quiet, from a stem
29.
30.
In addition to the active, the Arabic verb has a
passive voice. This passive is formed in the perfect
in such a way that in place of the a-vowels of the
active we have the order u-i-a (i with the second, a
with the third radical); thus the act. of stem I. is
Jé, the pass: J. The additional formative syllables
of the derived stems also receive the vowel u, e. g.
pass. V. Á, VIII (with connective Alif).
909
The Arabic verb has two principal tenses, a perfect
a. which, generally speaking, denotes a completed action,
and an imperfect which in general denotes an uncom-
pleted action.
31. THE MOODS.
31
The imperfect is formed by adding the prefix ya b.
for the active of the I., V., VI., VII., VIII., IX. and
X. stems, and the prefix yu for the active of the
II., III. und IV. stems, and for the passive of all the
stems without exception.
In the case of verbs of which is the type, the c.
second radical, in the impf. act. of stem I., may receive
one or other of the vowels u, i, a. Which of the three
must be used for a particular verb will be found
indicated in the dictionary under that verb (e. g. Aïï
impf. u) and should be taken careful note of. Those
verbs, on the other hand, of which Jes (with i-vowel)
is the type, together with all passives point their second
يُفْعَلُ .pass ;يَفْعَلُ .radical with a only, thus impf. act. I
Those verbs, finally, of which is (with u-vowel) is the
type, take u with the second radical for the imperfect.
As regards the active imperfect of the derived stems,
the second radical takes i throughout, with the excep-
tion of stems V. and VI. where it takes a; thus impf.
II. Le but V. Leét.
In the imperfect various Moods are distinguished, 31.
namely the ordinary mood which we call the indicative,
the dependent mood or subjunctive, and a modus apo-
copatus (sometimes called the jussive). These are
32
32. THE IMPERATIVE.
distinguished as follows: in the indicative the last
(يَفْعَلُ
يَفْعَلَ
radical, when final, always takes u, as impf. I
III. el; in the subjunctive always a, as Tees,
while in the apocopatus the third radical is vowelless.
In addition to the above there is a double modus
energicus, which is formed by appending the syllables
anna or an (in some forms only n) to the impf. as
يَفْعَلَن or يَفْعَلَنَّ
32.
NOTE. As the modus energicus is of comparatively rare
occurrence, it is given in the tables of paradigms only in the case
of the ordinary strong verb. From the examples there given it
may easily be formed for the other verbs.
The imperative agrees with the apocopated imper-
fect as regards vocalisation and termination, except
that the prefixes ya or yu are wanting. In the imper.
of the I. stem a helping vowel (therefore with connec-
tive Alif § 6a) is prefixed in all cases where the first
consonant is without a vowel of its own. This vowel
disappears, however, in pronunciation as soon as the
word ceases to stand alone, e. g. Lėšl but ¿âî Ílé.
أخرج
قَالَ أَخْرُ
The same applies to stems VII.-X. The imperative
has the same energetic bye-forms as the imperfect.
NOTE. In the imper. of stem I the prosthetic vowel is u when
the second radical has u, as, but i when it is pointed with
0-0
افعل
a or i, as j³, l.
ردود
33. NUMBER, PREFIXES AND AFFIXES.
33
NOTE b. In the imper. of the IV. stem the prosthetic Ỉ, which
is characteristic of the stem, is retained, although it disappears
after the prefixed? of the impf. Hence impf. jais (for ja³),
U UZ
افعل .but imper
020
يُفعِلُ
In the perfect, imperfect and imperative, there 33.
are, in addition to the singular and plural, dual forms
for the second and third persons. Verbs are inflected
by the addition of modified and abbreviated forms
of the personal pronouns, and of the dual and plural
terminations of nouns, to the ground-forms and
Je (for the terminations ăni and ūna of the impf.
indic. vid. §.76 a). The terminations just named, along
with the ending ina of the 2. pers. fem. sing.,
drop the syllables ni and na in the subjunctive, the
apocopated imperfect and the imperative. The f, which
appears in the paradigm after the final, in the
perf. and in these shortened forms of the impf. and
imper., has no phonetic value (cf. § 2e).
As to the prefixes of the impf., it is to be noted
that in place of the prefix of the 3. pers. masc., we
have as the prefix of the 2. pers. sing. and plur.,
and of the 3 pers. fem. of the sing., to indicate the
1. pers. sing., and ; the 1. pers. plur.
The affixes employed in the inflexion of the verb are given
in paradigm I.
Socin, Arabic Grammar².
3
34
34. VERBS MEDIAE GEMINATAE.
34.
NOTE a. In the V. and VI. forms of verbs whose first letter
is a dental or a sibilant, the formative prefix occasionally drops
its vowel and is assimilated to the first radical of the verb, in
which case the perf. and imper. have a helping vowel (§ 6) prefixed
لديد
e. g. wrap one's self up, impf. J.
NOTE b. In the impf. of these two stems, the prefix ♬ may
be treated in such a way that instead of the two syllables 53
Jw
only ♬ remains, e. g. from J3 2. pers. msc. impf. V. Jää³ for Jää53.
NOTE C. In the impf. VII. and VIII. stems the tone remains
on the same syllable on which it falls in the perf., contrary to
the rule laid down in § 9; thus yankátilu, yaķtátilu.
jää jaži
For the conjugation of the strong verb with three radicals
see paradigms II, III and V, for that of the quadriliteral verbs
see paradigm IV. In the paradigms the participles and infinitives
are also given, although the discussion of these forms has been
deferred to §§ 60 and 61.
Among the ordinary strong verbs must also be
reckoned the so-called verbs mediae geminatae, i. e.
verbs whose second and third radicals are identical.
A contraction of these last two radicals takes
place in all those cases in which
a. 1) the first, second and third radicals have each
a short vowel; in this case the vowel of the second
radical is always dropped, e. g. (to flee) contracted
from (which statement is not to be understood
فرر
فرر
as implying that a form once really existed in
Arabic) 3. p. perf. pass. I. from; 3. p. impf.
1-1/
3
VII.
from ينفر ينقرر from
35, 36. VERBS MEDIAE GEMINATAE.
35
2) When the first two radicals have each a short, b.
and the third a long, vowel, e. g. 3. p. dual masc.
;فَرَرا from فَا .perf
15;
3) Generally also when the first radical has a long c
ā, e. g. 3. s. m. perf. of the III. stems contracted from
ls (which is also found), passive.
When the first radical is vowelless and the second 35.
has a short vowel, then contraction takes place and
the vowel of the second radical passes over to the
first. Thus 3. pers. impf. act. for; pass.
;
يُفْرَرُ. from
3-9
يفر
When the third radical is vowelless, there is no 36.
contraction in the body of the word: e. g. 2. pers. sing.
يَفْرِرْنَ
113
masc. perf. act.; 3. pers. plur. fem. impf. act.
But when the third radical stands at the end
of a verbal form with no vowel following, as in various
forms of the apocopated impf. and the 2. pers. sing.
masc. of the imper., we find the full forms,
only in the dialects. As a rule contraction takes place
and an additional vowel is assumed at the end in
order to preserve the doubling of the radical; thus
we have,, from 3, imper. 5.
3*
36
37. HAMZATE VERBS.
37.
NOTE. In the case of verbs of the forms and the
فَعل فَعِلَ
vowel of the second radical appears only in the uncontracted form
e. g. Jo to loathe, 1. pers. perf. ll; hence the vowel a of the
B
impf. J..
For the conjugation of verbs mediae geminatae see paradigms
Nos. VI-VIII; model verb to flee.
-
Those verbs that have a Hamza as first, second.
or third radical are for the most part regular, as
&
&
make an impression, impf.; to read, impf.
to
.
يقرا
ی or
In certain cases we find, according to § 4b,
(without points) as bearers of the Hamza, or may
stand without a bearer, thus 3. s. m. perf. act.
to be sad, to be brave; 3. s. m. impf. passive of
يوث
اثر
بوس
1:3; 3. sing. masc. perf. act. 5 to err, fem.
; 3. s. m. impf. act. of J to ask: J. Oc-
casionally an takes the place of two Alifs, according
•I
H
38.
I
to § 7; e. g. 3. s. m. perf. III. of:
.
of (bind up a wound &c.)
C
اثر
for; VI.
While in all these cases the may easily be distin-
guished as the third radical of the verb, there are a
few forms in which the verba hamzata are more diffi-
cult to distinguish, inasmuch as the sometimes
entirely disappears; from this point of view these
verbs ought rather to be reckoned among the weak
+
38. HAMZATE VERBS.
37
verbs (§ 39 ff.). The most important of such cases
are the following:
1) After I, I, I (also after a connective Alif ĺ, I, I a.
Í,
at the beginning of a sentence) & gives up its power
as a consonant (cf. § 7); hence, in place of 'a', 'v', 'ï'
simply 'ā, 'ū, 'ī, e. g. 3. s. m. perf. IV. of 1:1 for
& E
E
اثر
ހހ
in place of اور is اثر
3; 3. s. m. perf. pass. IV. of is
ثر
1. So also imper. I. As for.
yaş!
أَخَذَ
2) In the imper. of the I. form the verbs b.
ji
트
​take, eat, order, drop the
وكل
مر
; in the same way, from J
tive is either for jú &c.
altogether:,
to ask, the impera-
NOTE. Should 5 or come to stand as inseparable particles
(§ 87) before one of the imperatives under a, the prosthetic Alif
is dropped and the radical Hamza reappears, receiving, as its
bearer, an Alif on account of the preceding Fath, as in. The
same holds good in the case of two separate words: thus
n
3. s. m. perf. pass. VIII of connected with a preceding word
دوا
الذي أرتين
becomes elladi-'tumina.
3) In the VI. form the of verbs primae.
sometimes changed to as
(for all).
C
is c.
تَامَرَ in place of تَوَامَرَ دو
E
4) In the VIII. form the of the verb is d
39.
40.
α.
b.
38 39. THE WEAK VERBS. 40. VERBS PRIMAE AND
,
ی
W
assimilated to the following 3, the result being 3, as
instead of an original, impf. Åsis, but
I
from, to order,s!.
ی
For the conjugation of the verba hamzata see paradigm IX.
The Weak Verbs.
The weak verbal stems are those having a or
a as first, second or third radical; under inflection
these semivowels in some cases resolve themselves into
full vowels, in others they are treated as consonants.
The Verbs primae and differ from the strong
verbs in the following points:
و
ی
1) In the impf. and imper. of the I stem a number
of verbs primae surrender their first radical and
,
take the vowel with their second (cf. ), as
to bring forth, impf. 5, imper. .
وَلَدَ
2) Under the influence of a guttural a few verbs.
take a in place of i with their second radical, drop-
ping the
يَضَعُ .impf
however, like the others, as
; so
وَقَعَ
to fall,
وَضَعَ
to lay,
to give and others
C.
(see the dictionaries).
3) In verbs primae is changed to ù, e. g.
,
the impf. IV of to be awake, properly, be-
يُوقِظُ comes
41, 42. VERBS MEDIAE
39
,
AND S
4) In the VIII. stem the first radical of verbs d.
primae and is assimilated to the following,
و
ی
e. g. from Á, to promise, As for As, (cf. § 38 d).
NOTE. A few verbs of the form j also give up the first
radical in the imperf. as 5 to inherit, impf. (cf. § 18).
وَرِثَ
For the conjugation of the verbs primae
and
-see para ی
digm X where will be found the principal forms of the verbs
Jo to arrive, ¿, to leave, to be dirty, J, to be anxious,
وصل
ودع
w to be sleepy,
to be easy.
Verbs mediae
and
9
S.
In the II., 1II., V., VI. 41.
and IX. stems, and are treated as consonants,
ی
and the inflexion is the same as that of the strong
verb; thus 3. s. m. perf. II of Js (to say) med.
J., 3. s. m. perf. III of (to travel) med. L.
In the other stems these verbs are inflected according
to the following rules:
X.
سَايَرَى
Long a takes the place of the middle radical: 42.
in the perf. active of the I., IV., VII., VIII. and a.
JɩE,
트
​اسْتَقَالَ إِقْبَالَ اِنْقَالَ قَالَ قَالَ stems, as .
in the impf. passive of the same stems, as
وَيُسْتَقَالُ يُقْتَالُ يُنْقَالُ
ل يُقَالُ ويُقَالُ
;يَقْتَالُ يَنْقَالُ ٥٠
in the impf. active of VII. and VIII., ass, Jlës; c.
in the impf. active of the I. stem of verbs of the d.
form Jąś e. g. šlá to fear, impf.
.
40
AND S•
43, 44. VERBS MEDIAE ,
43.
a.
b.
Long takes the place of the middle radical:
in the perf. passive of the I., IV., VII., VIII. and
X. stems as
;يَسْتَقِيلُ
واسْتُقِيلَ وأقتيلَ أنْقِيلَ أَقِيلَ قِيلَ
و
دی يسير as
و
in the impf. active of IV. und X., as, ñms;
C. in the impf. active of verbs med.
The corresponding form of verbs med. on the other
hand, takes long u, as
يَقُولُ.
NOTE. The nature of the phonetic changes just detailed will
be more readily understood from the standpoint of the strong
verb if it be noted that
pass
44.
into a; y
into ī;
into u. It is not
meant by this that the corresponding strong forms were ever
really found, in these verbs, at any period of the language.
The whole of the long vowels mentioned in
§§ 42-43 are shortened (§ 8) in a shut syllable, e. g.:
s. m.
I
and أَقَلْتَ : سَارَ: and قَالَ perf, act. IV. of . . .2
يسر
اسرت
3. sing. masc. apoc. impf. pass. I, (with
the tone on the last syllable as if contravening § 9).
2. pers. masc. sing. imper. I. of Bls (§ 42 d):
és (but plur. lélá);
2. pers. masc. sing. perf. pass. Ås;
3. pers. sing. masc. apoc. impf. act. IV. Åës;
2. pers. sing. masc. imper. I:,.
يقل
45, 46. VERBS ULTIMAE ,
AND S.
41
,
In the perf. active of I, verbs med., take й where
we should expect ă, (cf. pp) as, while verbs
med. LS take i, as ; i is also found in verbs of
for a theoretical خَافَ from خِفْت as فَعِلَ the form
(خَوف
Norɛ a. Instead of the apocop. impf. &c. from 5, to be,
we sometimes find the still shorter form L.
,
strong forms ی
NOTE b. From a few verbs med. and
are found in stems I., IV., VIII., X.; e. g. IV.
to find correct, a denominative form from
compel; X.
correct.
For the conjugation of these verbs see paradigms XI-XIV.
Verbs ultimae . and Verbs ultimae
,
.
pass into 45.
ultimae in all the derived stems, and in the perf.
ی
and impf. passive of the I stem; thus from
غزو
we
have 3 s. m. perf. II. The same applies to the
active of stem I of the form ; thus becomes
(to have pleasure in).
رَضِوَ
C.
If the second radical has a, this vowel is changed 46.
in every case into a long final a. In order to distinguish
the stems ult. from those ult.. this final is in the
former case indicated by, in the latter by (this
ی
"
a
↑
applies only to the 3. s. m. perf. act. I). Thus to
رمی
غَزَا
throw, carry on a war; but II.,
é
غیرم
&c. Similarly
42
.ی
46. VERBS ULTIMAE , AND
in the imperfects (cf. § 45), e. g. indic. and subj. pass. II
,
b.
ور
يرمى
,
(in place of a theoretical
and); impf.
and يرمى
يترمى
act. I of; impf. act. V.
NOTE. With the same reservation as under § 43 c note, we
would call attention to the fact that the combinations
ي
-
all pass into long ā.
ی
In all the cases mentioned in the preceding sub-
section, a diphthong (§ 2 a) appears before the in-
flectional additions that begin with a consonant. Thus:
وتَ : غَزَا from ; رَمَيْتَ sing. masc. perf. act. I .2 ; غَزَ
غريت رميت
d.
&c.
II
In the case also of the inflectional additions ū,
ūna, ina (and its shortened form 7), the a of the second
radical, (after the elision of the third radical) unites
with their initial vowel to form a diphthong. Thus:
3. pers. masc. plur. perf. act. I.,, do. impf.
pass. II.
M O
V.
.subj يرمون ٧٠ يَرْضَونَ . do .act زير موا.
زيةرمون
يترمى
2. pers. fem. sing. of the last, subj.
Before the dual terminations à and ani the last
radical of this class of verbs is treated as a strong
letter, e. g. 3. pers. perf. act. I.,; impf. pass.
&c. By the addition of the termination at,
II.
يُرَمِّيَانِ
47. VERBS ULTIMAE AND
,
5.
43
the 3. pers. fem. sing. of the perfect must originally
have ended in ät; this ending, however, has now become
at in accordance with § 8, as;. According
to the analogy of the above is also formed the 3. pers.
غَزَنَا,
fem. of the dual; thus we find,
should expect lil, (šlić).
In the impf. active of stem I, verbs ult.
ی
(where we
و
of the 17.
form take an u, those ult. an i, the third
ĺé
radical quiescing in these vowels. The ending u of the
يرمى يغزو
imperf. is lost, e. g.,,. The imperfects active
of the derived forms (with the exception of V and VI)
are formed on the model of the last mentioned forms,
W
as II and so on.
يغزى يرمى
NOTE. With the same reservation as under § 43 c note, it
may be pointed out that passes into ù, ✔― into ī.
into,
a.
Affixes beginning with a consonant are appended b.
in every case to the i or the u just mentioned, as 3. pers.
زُونَ يَرْمِينَ
fem. plur. impf. I.; similarly in the
perf., e. g. 2. sing. masc. perf. pass. ; do. from
سَرُوتَ I فَعَلَ from ;رَضِيتَ . فَعِلَ
If the second radical has i or u, the third radical c.
is dropped and the terminations ū, ūna, īna added to
the second, e. g. 3. plur. masc. perf. pass. (not
I
44
48. VERBS ULTIMAD AND
,
ی
49. DOUBLY WEAK VERBS.
90.
act.
,,
يغزون يرمون plur. masc. impf.
t .3
;
,
.pers. fem. sing. impf .2 ; (يَعْزُرُونَ يَرْمِنُونَ (not
تَغْرِينَ تَرْمِينَ
d.
48.
Before the dual endings a and ani, as also before
the terminations a of the 3. sing. masc. perf., at of
the 3. sing. fem. perf., ata of the 3. fem. dual perf.,
and a of the subjunctive, the third radical is treated
as a strong letter, if the second has i or u. Exx: 3. pers.
masc. perf. act.; do. pass.),; 3. pers.
3. ;
fem. L; 3. pers. subj. act. I; 3. pers.
رضِيَا pers. masc. dual . سَوَتْ رَضِيَتْ fem. perf.
يغزَوانِ يَرْمِيَانِ .dual impf
In the apocopated impf. and in the imper. every
final ā, ī and u is shortened, as 3. pers. sing. masc.
2.
أغْزُ اِرْمِ اِرْضَ imper. . .
يغز يوم يَرْضَ .apoc. impf
49.
a.
For the conjugation of these verbs see paradigms XV-XIX
where various forms are given of the verbs to carry on war,
to throw, to be content, to carry out, accomplish.
Of verbs doubly weak the following are the
principal varieties:
Verbs primæ, and ultimæ
as وی
to take care وَقَى
of; impf. according to §§ 40 and 47, apoc..
50. THE VERB.
45
The imper. is properly, for which, however, when
the word stands alone, i. e. in pause, we write x.
رَأَى
The verbs to see, which in the impf. elides b.
the Hamza, throwing back its vowel a to the first
radical. Thus yarā for yar'ā; 3. pers. pl.
روان
; imper. (acc. to a 8), fem. . The IV. form
>
ری
برای یری
for أرى .pert. pass ;يرى for يرى .impf, رأي for
زیری
in the sense of 'to show' is similarly inflected:
si,
S and so on.
ارَى
اری
يَحيَا
The verb to live, properly; impf. (cf. c.
حى
§ 2d note) like a verb ult. or like a verb mediae
ی
اِسْتَحْيَا or اسْتَحْيى perf. X أَحْيَا geminatae; perf. IV
.(be ashamed) استحى also contracted
The verb
'there is not' (compounded of the 50.
negative and an obsolete Arabic noun corresponding
to the Hebrew ) is inflected as follows:
Plural
Dual
لَيْسُوا
لَمْسَا
لَيْسَ
Sing.
3. masc.
لَسْنَ
لَيْسَنَا
لَيْسَتْ .fem .3
لَسْتُمْ
لَسْتَ .masc
لَسْتُمَا
2
لَسْتُنَّ
لَسْت
لَسْنَا
لَسْتُ
2.
2. fem.
1. com.
51.
52.
53.
Cl.
46 51. VERBS OF PRAISE AND BLAME. 52. ADMIRATIVES. 53. THE SUFFIXES.
The verbs of praise and blame, to be good
&
and to be bad, which are rarely conjugated, are
بمس
written as above.
The Arab grammarians adduce as special forms
the so-called admirative forms, that is, forms expressive
of admiration. These are strictly the 3. s. m. perf.
and 2. pers. imper. of the IV. stem, but have assumed.
properly what مَا أَفْضَلَ زَيْدًا a special signification; so
افضل برید
بِزِيدِ
has made Zaid excellent', and
0I
prop. make
Zaid excellent' both mean: how excellent is Zaid!
,
The verbs media and may in these forms take
the inflection of the strong stems (§ 44 note b) as
-01
!how easy this is مَا أَهْوَنَ هذا
The addition of the pronominal suffixes (§ 11b)
alters the form of the verb only to a slight extent.
The 2. pers. fem, sing. perf. with a suffix receives
ضَرَبتِيني a long final vowel as
b. The , standing after ữ (§ 2e), is dropped as
C.
d.
قَتَلُوا قَتَلُوهُ
9-
from with the suff. of the 3. pers. sing. masc.
The ending of the 2. pers. pl. perf. becomes +3
(cf. § 12a, note 1), as
suff. of the 1. pers. sing.
with the قَتَلْتُمْ from قَتَلْتُمُونِي
Before the suffixes to the 1. pers. sing. and plur.,
54. THE PRONOUN AS OBJECT.
47
نی
and, the final na of the 2. fem. sing. and 3.
and 2. masc. plur. impf. is sometimes dropped (so that
these forms become identical with those of the sub-
junctive and apocopated moods). Ex.:
of the more common
alongside
thou (fem.) strikest
يَضْرِبُونَنَا
تَضْرِبِينَنِي
alongside of the more common يَضْرِبُونَا
me;
they strike us.
a.
When the object of an active verb consists of a 54.
personal pronoun, and this object is, for the sake of
emphasis, made to precede the verb, then instead of
the ordinary suffixes appended to the verb the sign
of the accusative (s, n) is employed with the
suffixes of the noun (with the suff. of 1. pers. sing.
; إِيَّايَ
نَعْبُدُ
e. g. Mas
↓
to thee we pray.
The Arabic verb may have two suffixes appended b.
at the same time, in which case the pronoun of the
1. person precedes those of the 2. and 3. persons,
and the pronoun of the 2. person that of the third,
ว
as xule he gave it me; frequently, however,
in
place of the second suffix-more particularly when both
pronouns are of the third person we find the above
he married
زَوْجَهُ إِيَّاهَا as إِيَّا mentioned periphrasis with
him to her.
55.
48
55. THE NOUN.
Chapter III. The Noun. (§§ 55—90).
a. The Formation of Nouns.
Nouns in the wider sense comprise 1) substantives,
2) adjectives, 3) numerals (§§ 91-93), and 4) pronouns
(§§ 12-14). The noun, in the narrower sense, is
limited to substantives and adjectives.
G&
Primitive substantives is the name given to such
substantives as cannot be derived from a verb. Accord-
ing to the usual arrangement of Arabic dictionaries,
it is true, the primitive noun , head (un affix) for
example, is found under the verb, but this verb
is in all its significations denominative. On the other
hand, it may fairly be maintained that a noun like
goes back to a hypothetical triliteral root, +1+ www.
In contrast to these primitive nouns, we find a
large number of nouns which are derived either from
verbs or from other nouns, that is, which are either
deverbals or denominatives. All the forms of the noun
are indicated by paradigms from the root as (cf.
§ 15 ff.); thus we say of as of the deverbal in-
S&
راس
90-
སྣÊ
راس
finitive killing, that it has the form.
NOTE. The numerous foreign words which have found
their way into Arabic, adapted from Persian and Aramaic, and
indirectly from Greek and Latin, have also, to some extent, been
reduced to Arabic nominal forms.
56, 57. THE FORMATION OF THE NOUN.
49
دم
a.
A number of nouns do not show the full complement 56.
of (three) consonants (see §§ 16 and 90), as $5 blood;
with the feminine termination (§ 73): xf a slave-girl;
to this group belong also nouns with a prefixed vowel
30
(connective Alif) as name, which accordingly must
be sought for in the dictionary under www.
Extremely common are the nominal forms with b.
S
909
G
one short vowel, like es, les, Le, e. g. Lo, foot,
according to the forms. There are also nominal
forms with two short vowels:
S
G
ི,
S
$
S
Jes, des, des, Jeż,
S
كبر فَعُل
Lés, les, e. g. da, a man, NF. ; old age
NF. Jes.
Next in order we may put nominal forms with a c.
long vowel either with the first radical els or with
J,
S
فعِيل فَعُولُ فَعُولُ فَعَالفِعَالُ فَعَال the second
فَاعُول with both.
or
Nominal forms with doubling of the second radical d.
are such as
;žš
chick-pea NF.; (§ 63 a);
$
فعيل
NOTE. By their mode of formation these nouns have been
raised to the rank of quadriliterals like those in §§ 57-58.
The preformatives employed in the formation of 57.
Socin, Arabic Grammar 2
4
58.
59.
50 58. FORMATION OF NOUNS. 59. QUADRILIT. NOUNS. 60. Par™IPLES.
nouns are the following (whose vowels vary according
to circumstances): a) cf. §§ 60 and 64. b) 3 cf. § 61.
G
c) asi fugitive NF. J
(cf. §§ 62c; 63b), e. g. É,
the stem ds.
to flee. d) †
2
from
story NF. U
بده و
from
The afformatives or formative additions used in
the formation of nouns are: a) and ¿— (see
§ 74). b)(for substantives) or
form adjectives) e. g. le palpitation of the heart
NF.
often to) ان
from فَعْلَانُ .drunk NF سَكْرانُ : خَفَقَ from فَعَلَان ..
ه سَكِرَ
مَلَكُوث
. c), (not originally Arabic) as
kingdom NF., which takes the masc. gend.
in Arabic.
The quadriliteral nouns are denoted by the para-
G
?
صُندوق : فَعْلَل .scorpion NF عقرب as (28 ) فعلل digm نَّ عَفْ
فعلا .a species of beetle F خُنْفُسَا
60.
box NF. J; military camp NF.;
From among the rich growth of nominal forms in
Arabic a few deverbals and denominatives may be
singled out for special attention. Such, of the former
class, are the participles and infinitives, whose forms
will be found among the paradigms of the verb.
}
51
61. THE INFINITIVE.
The participles - the active is generally named a.
nomen agentis, the passive nomen patientis. take
the form als for the active of the I stem, and for
G
the passive the form J. In all the derived stems
the participle is formed by prefixing the syllable
in the active the second radical takes i, in the
passive a (see below). As a rule, however, the active
and passive participles of the derived stems take the
vowels of the active and passive imperfs. with the
exception of stems V and VI.
In addition to the participles there is a class of b.
so-called verbal adjectives, which are in part treated
as participles; they might be called quasi-participles,
as beautiful, from.
G
The Arabic participles do not in themselves convey c.
any suggestion of time; hence sls, for example, may
mean 'one who has killed' as well as 'one who is killing',
J 'one who ought to be killed' i. e. interficiendus
Jë
as well as interfectus.
The Infinitive (nomen verbi) assumes various forms 61.
in the I stem, and is therefore specially noted in the a
dictionaries under each verb. One of the most common
S
S
فَعلَ killing. The infinitives of قتل as فَعْل forms is
$*
52
61. THE INFINITIVE.
b.
C.
verbs (§ 28), as a rule, take the form is, e. g. from
C
are فَعَال and نُعول .the being angry غَضَبْ غَضِبَ
جُلُوس
also common forms from intransitive verbs, as
a sitting, from; health, from. In-
finitives are also found with the prefix ma, as
or
G
ـل
S
دُخُول
(for the same verb has frequently more than
one form of the infinitive, sometimes with different
meanings) from Ásó to enter.
G
The infinitive of the II. stem has the form s
or xlzés (cf. § 576); the inf. of the III. stem the form
or elé (which last is identical with the fem.
فعّال
مُفَاعَلَة
of the passive participle). The infinitives of IV., VII.,
VIII., IX. and X. are formed by the insertion of a
long a before the last radical; before this ā every
short ǎ of the perf. becomes i, as in the IV. stem jl!.
G
e
The infinitives of V. and VI. take u after the second
radical, as V. és.
S
The Arabic infinitives do not contain the idea of
time and may be used both in an active and in a
passive sense. Thus denotes the circumstance
that some one has killed or has been killed, the idea
of killing or of being killed.
1
62. VERBAL ADJECTIVES.
Synopsis of participles and infinitives
Partcp. Act. Partcp. Pass.
Infin.
cf. § 61 a
مَفْعُولٌ
تفعيل تَفْعِلَةٌ مُفَعّل
مُفعِل
فِعَالُ مُفَاعَلَةٌ مُفَاعَلٌ
مُفَاعِل
افعال
مُفْعَل
مُفْعل
تفعل
متفعل
متفعِل
تَفَاعُل
مُتَفَاعَلٌ مُتَفَاعِل
انفعال
مُنْفَعَل
منفعِل
افتعال
مفتعِل
مفتعَل
إِفْعِلَال
مفعل
I.
فَاعِل
S
II.
III.
IV.
G
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
اِسْتِفْعَالُ
مُسْتَفْعَلْ مُسْتَفْعِل ..
X.
مُفَعْلل
فَعْلَلَةٌ فَعْلَالٌ مُفَعْلَل
Quadr. I.
C
II.
مُتَفَعْلَدُ
مُتَفَعْلِلٌ
تَفَعلُلْ
53
As regards Verbal Adjectives (cf. § 60 c), the follow- 62.
ing forms may be specially noted:
The forms, which occurs in both an active a.
C
and a passive sense; as killed,
a witness,
54
63. THE INTENSIVE FORMS.
G
as one who disputes with another (in the sense
خصيم
of part. act. of III).
b.
فعول
e. g.
to lying.
(often an intensive form) given
C.
63.
as
Aš, a form denoting colours and physical defects,
with) أعور : lame أَعْرَجُ : yellow أَصْفَر
9 as a strong
letter) one-eyed. For the formation of the feminine,
see § 74b.
Arabic has the means of expressing a heightened
or intensive form of the root idea. Of such intensive
forms the following are examples:
G
a.
b.
and other verbal فاعِل intensive form of فَعال
adjectives, as
(habitually) given to lying. As
a denominative this form is in frequent use to denote
trades or professions (nomina opificum) as
509
jus bread.
خبز from
خد
خَبَّازْ
baker
Very frequently there is derived from adjectives
E
the form in the sense of an elative (generally
so named because including both comparative and
superlative), as
beautiful, elative: more b.,
3-05
أحسن
,smaller اصغر : small, young, elative صغير .most b
younger; smallest, youngest. The elatives, when stand-
ing in the predicate, do not admit of inflection for
64. NOMINA LOCI, INSTRUMENTI, SPECIEI.
55
they are the هُمْ أَفْضَلُ النَّاسِ
gender and number, as
most excellent of men. When used in a comparative
sense, they are mostly undetermined (§ 76 bc), and are
followed by the preposition in the sense of our
“than” (properly 'at a distance from', 'measured from').
Used as superlatives, on the other hand, they are
generally determined. For the feminine formation
see § 74b.
50-
NOTE. No special elative is formed from the words good
2
and bad, which are used as elatives in the form just given.
As a matter of fact, the positive of other adjectives as well must
كبيرُ النَّاس
sometimes be rendered by our superlative; thus signifies
the (absolutely) greatest of men.
To the class of deverbal nouns belong further: 64.
Nouns of place and time formed with the prefix a.
oma, as the place where one writes, the school;
also with the fem. termination as a buryingplace.
G
مقبرة
NOTE. Nouns of place and time from the derived stems take
the form of the pass. participle, as (from the IV. stem of
to go out, of which IV. caus.) the place to which or the time
at which something is brought out; lão (from V. stem) the
place where the ritual washing is performed.
Nomina instrumenti, formed with the prefix mi, b.
G
مخلب
فتح
as
from
milk-pail, from to milk;
Liiv
key,
で
​to open.
56
65. NOMINA LOCI, INSTRUMENTI, SPECIEI.
C.
65.
the كتبَة as ,فِعْلَة Nomina speciei of the form
le,
manner of writing, one's "calligraphy".
To the class of denominatives belong especially
the nouns of relation and the diminutives.
499
a.
By means of the termination
to the Hebrew, fem. and
T
—
(corresponding
) there is derived
from nouns a group of other nouns which, following
the example of the Arabic grammarians, we call nomina
(adjectiva) relativa, i. e. nouns of relation. Thus
502
S &
693
0I
ارضى
belonging to the earth (,), earthly; belonging
to
(i. e. Syria), a Syrian. The feminine termination
is dropped when this ending is added, as
(مَكَّةُ
493
W
from) مکی
an inhabitant of Mecca; occasionally we meet
with certain changes in the vowels of a word, e. g.
ទ
مَدَنِي
قُرَشِى
an inhabitant of Medina, from
a Koreishite, one of the tribe.
Medina ;
9சு &
b. By the addition of the feminine ending to nouns
of relation there are formed feminines, as oli a
Syrian woman, but more frequently abstract nouns; as
divinity from 3
divine, (from God);
ติ
إِلاهية
heathenish, (from جَاهِلی heathenism from جَاهِلِيَّة
.(ignorant جاهل
66. NOM. RELATIVA ET DEMINUTIVA. 67.NOUNS FROM STEMS MED. GEM. 57
NOTE. It is usual to indicate the nomina relativa also by
23
23
9FF
جاهلية فعلى is a form أَرض thus we say that ;فَعَل paradigms from
فاعلية a form
لدو
9019
Diminutives from triliteral nouns take the form 66.
5079
Aues, as duc a little slave, servulus, from
From quadriliteral nouns the form isies, as
S
slave.
عُقير
diminutive صُوَيْحِب (so عَقْرَب a little scorpion, from
ŷ
from companion). From quadriliteral nouns
with a long vowel between the third and fourth radi-
صُنَيْدِيقُ as فُعَيْلِيل cals the corresponding form is
صُندُوق
diminutive from a box. Diminutives are not
unfrequently derived also from proper names, as
xσΰ ÃÃò ‘ubaidullāhi alongside of xÃÎ
(Abdallah).
£‘abdullāhi
The formation of nouns from stems mediae gemi- 67.
natae and from those with a hamza or the semi-vowels
presents many irregularities, for a general idea of
which we must refer to the inflection of the corre-
sponding verbal stems. In addition to what is there
given the following particulars deserve attention.
For the formation of deverbal nouns from stems
mediae geminatae (see § 34 ff.) the following points
may be noted:
The second and third radicals are of course con- a.
58
68, 69. NOUNS FROM STEMS WITH HAMZA AND PRIM.
b.
C.
tracted when the second is without a vowel of its
own, as
فَر
307
from.
}
If the first radical has a, and the second i or a,
contraction takes place in the participles and infini-
tives, e. g. part. act. VII of contracted from
S
$709
وہ
صنفر
:
منفر
F
éis;
; pass. also from. There is no con-
traction, however, with nouns of the forms, as Sus
inf. to be hairy.
According to the rule given in § 35 b, from
res.
قادر فَار
ހހގެ
مُفِرَّ : مُفْرِرٌ from : مَفَر we get ;
مفرد
d. The act. participle of I is from cf. § 8.
e.
68.
69.
a.
>>
Contraction does not take place when a long
vowel stands between the last two radicals e. g.,
$
990
مَفْرُورٍ فَرِير
The orthographical rules which apply to the in-
flection of the verba hamzata (§§ 37 ff.) hold good
for the formation of nouns, e. g. J
SE,
سوال ; for
E
of
9&,
سوا
something asked
a question, from to ask; the part. act. I'
1, to make an impression, is
G
S
for; NF.
.c& أثر from مِفْعَلَةٌ nomen instrumenti
مِنتَرَة
The primae, stems, which according to § 40 lose
their first radical in the impf., lose it also, as a rule,
70. NOUNS FROM STEMS MED. 59
,
AND
ی
in the nomen verbi; as compensation the latter receives
the feminine termination (§ 73), as from A
G
وَعَدَ
to pro-
mise nomen verbi šās; from 0 to allow: &£5.
w after the voweli (-) coalesces with the latter b.
to form 7, as inf. IV of fall: last for 1; w
وَقَعَ
مِيلَادٌ إِيقاع
وَلَدَ from مِوْلَا for مِفْعَال.time of one's birth NF
2.
C.
passes into u (§ 40 c), e. g. part. IV of sc.
to be awake: h for hew.
In the infs. of the IV. and X stems from stems 70.
med. and the middle radical disappears; the a.
feminine termination is added as compensation, e. g.
;
ی
اقوال for إقالة
In the act. part. of stem I the w of verbs med. b.
becomes y and (yi) is changed into 'i (3); as
9
for 5, for (for Medda see § 7).
سَابِرٌ سَائِر
قَائِل
Mis; c.
A characteristic formation from these stems is ; c.
S W
thus from the stem o med. we get a master,
lord; from the stem med.
,
ری
سيد
Sub good.
Nouns formed on the model of As contain diph- d.
So- So-
thongs (§ 2a), as J, A.
سير قول
The place of the second radical (see § 42) is taken e.
by a long a in the act. participles of stems VII. and
60
71. NOUNS FROM STEMS ULTIMAE AND S.
f.
VIII. and in the pass. part. of stems IV., VII., VIII.
G
and X.; e. g. part. pass. IV. l, part. act. or pass.
VII.
S
G 109
(from a hypothetical active pass.
منقوم
i). Also in numerous nominal forms, as (from
G
a hypothetical) house, from jó med.
دَارَ
مَفْعَل
,; NF. Jéés
from Jls is flex, from a hypothetical J.
The place of the second radical (see § 43) is taken by
a long i in nouns of the type of
G
s and xl from med.
لَانَ لين
موتة
from ¿ý med.
S
ی
to be gentle;
مينة
,; in the
,
and se. 8.
(§ 64 c) for
form
g.
6910
G
mode of death from med.
309
from med., e. g. for
e. g. vow for white
بيض
(plur.); ex in the forms from med.
G
med., e. g.,
walk for; in the part. act. of the IV. and X. stems
from verbs mediae and, e. 8. p,
g.
و
مُقِيمٌ
S
mimo; in
مستسير
بَاعَ from مبيع
g.
71.
a.
the part. pass. I from med., e. g.
to sell (mediae ) for
$90
مبيوع
S
AAN
The place of the second radical is taken by long.
S
ū in nouns of the type of from med.
C
ذور as دو
light from; u may also arise by contraction from
wu in the pass. part. of the I stem of verbs med.
دو
as
مَقرُول for مَقُول
In the case of nouns derived from verbs ultimae
71. NOUNS FROM STEMS ULTIMAE AND
>
61
S.
9
ی
and those forms in which the second radical is
vowelless are treated like forms from strong stems,
as
107
رمى عزو
inf.
If the second radical has ă, there results (cf. § 46 a) b.
at the end of words a long a (from hypothetical awu,
ayu) which is written or (acc. as last rad.
s—
is or s), e. g. Lalf the stick, for;
;
the pasture, from to feed, for a hypothetical
رعي
الْمَرْعَى
for lative of gener أَفْعَلُ .NF أَتَى الْمَرْعَى أَسْخَى
سخي
=
I
43
ous, liberal (§ 63b). The same applies to all the pass.
participles of the derived stems. With the nunation,
these forms appear ass,,(ptc. pass. IV)
in which the original long final vowel, now standing in
a syllable closed by the n of the nunation, must be pro-
nounced short (§ 8): 'aşan, mar'an, murman. Long a
appears before the feminine termination (cf. § 70 e) as,
G
G
وَفَيّة death for وَفَاةٌ : غَدَوَةً morning for غَدَاة
الامام
ā
If the second radical has short i, from iyu arises c.
a long i (cf. § 47 a), e. g. part. act. I in place
of a hypothetical; and so in the act. participles
of the derived forms. If the nunation is added, the
ی
result is pl, rāmin &c., in which the is dropped
even in the written form of the word. uyu is changed
62
ری
72. NOUNS FROM STEMS ULTIMAE AND
,
d.
to iyu, and consequently with the nunation it likewise
W
W
becomes in; e. g. inf. V. for; for
$ 4
اردو
الترمي
ترم: الترمى
3. In the act. part. of stem I from verbs ult. ,
ترمى
iwun is changed to iyun, and consequently with the
nunation further to in, e. g.
; الْغَازِي الْغَازِرُ for اَلْغَازِى
d
with the nunation ¿é. Before ǎ and ā (cf. § 47d), on
از
the other hand, the third radical retains its conso-
nantal value; thus the inf. of stem II, according to
the form most in use with verbs med. and viz.
S
و
ی
تَغْزِيَةٌ تَرْمِيَةٌ : is (861) تَفْعِلَةٌ :
C.
f.
After a, yu and wu become 'u; yun, and wun be-
g.
السّرَاءِ . .come un, in each case with the hamza, e
سرو
zī
for with the nunation inf. I of
سرا
to be
noble; for, with the nunation of inf.
السَّرَارُ
إِرْمَاى
IV for
If the second radical has a long u, the forms from
verbs ultimae are formed regularly; thus the pass.
و
5,0
part. I ofis (for) maġzūwun. From
verbs ultimae on the other hand, uyun is changed
مغزو
دی
43
ن
و
to iyun, e. 8. (from ) marmīyun, so from
G
فَعُول. .NF. مُضُوى for مُضِي .go away inf مَضَى
If the second radical has a long i, the forms from
72., 73. THE GENDER OF nouns.
63
verbs ultimae
ی
are formed regularly, e. g. NF. Je
↑
from 1,5 saint (for) waliyun. From verbs
ultimae on the other hand, iwun is changed into
,,
iyun, as aliyun high from.
على
b. The Gender of Nouns.
Arabic has two genders, a masculine and a femin- 72.
ine. A number of words are sometimes masculine
sometimes feminine, in other words are of the common
gender. Words which denote female beings, collectives,
countries, cities, winds, parts of the body occurring
in pairs, and others, are in themselves feminine with-
out requiring the feminine termination. The gender
of such words is in each case noted in the dictionaries.
As an outward and visible sign of the feminine 73.
we find most frequently the ending — atun (or 8.
S
atu § 79), e. g. žúsɩ (NF.), fem. of
G
killing ;
a.
.fem. of masc رَاضِيَةً مَلِكُ queen, from (فَعِلَةٌ .NF) مَلِكَةٌ
فتى
S
velj (§ 71 c) content, šli (NF.
) maid, from
(§§ 716 and 2d) youth. Many substantives are found
SE-
only with the feminine ending, as an orchard.
NOTE. As a rarity, the feminine ending is found, particu-
larly in the Ķur'ān, written with, e. g. U
↓
the grace of
God (for).
64
73. THE GENDER OF NOUNS.
b.
feminine ending, as
A number of masc. nouns are found with the
Caliph,
Talha (proper
A
name of a man, see p. 8, note 2). On the other hand,
there are nouns which, as being essentially feminine,
do not require the feminine termination, as
(referring to a woman).
C.
d.
e.
S
عَافِرٍ
barren
The feminine ending is occasionally appen-
ded to common or class nouns in order to indicate a
↑
single individual (nomen unitatis), as ó a gold
piece, from gold; &ol a dove, from
S
G
حمام
doves (collective). The termination is also used
for the formation of the so-called nomina vicis, i. e.
nouns that express the doing of an action once, as
9701
A a single sitting down, from to sit down.
The feminine termination, again, serves to form
$
substantives from adjectives, as a conduit-pipe,
water-channel, from the part. I ofw to water. Con-
nected probably with this is the feminine ending which
forms intensives, as a very learned person, from
S
G
the adjective § 63 a.
Collective nouns are also formed by means of the
feminine termination, e. g. from a courier, coll.
l
&ôj;, (§ 65α) Ṣūfi (mystic), coll.
a)
وَرَيَّاضَةٌ
صُوفية
.
74. TERMINATION OF THE FEMIN.
65
75. NUMBER AND CASE.
74.
Other feminine terminations are:
The termination
; it goes to form feminines a
of the types, e. g. fem. of, drunk,
سَكْرَى
سَكَرَى
(§ 58b); feminines of the nominal form (NF.) Á
from elatives (§ 63 b), e. g. fem. of smaller,
63b), gjes
,
أَصْغَرُ
دنيا the first, and substantives like أَوَّلُ from أولى
world (§ 2 note), which is properly a feminine to the
I
elative, that which is nearer at hand; also fem-
S
أَحَدٌ
E
inines of the NF., e. g. from one, fem.
subst. remembrance.
إحْدَى
!;
The ending; it goes to form, more especially, b.
ذِكْرَى
.e. g ,(620 8) أَفْعَلُ from فَعْلَاء .adjectives of the NF
fem. one-eyed, but also عَوْرَاء :fem. yellow صَفْراء
مَحْرَاء
substantives, as ✨
21
1=
desert.
c. Inflection of the Noun.
Arabic has three numbers: singular, dual and 75.
plural. Of the last, there are two different kinds;
the one, the ordinary plural, properly so called, also
known as the pluralis sanus or the outer plural, which
originally denoted rather a number of separate persons
and things; the other, the collective plural, also called
the inner or broken plural (see §§ 86 ff.), which denotes
Socin, Arabic Grammar.2
5
66
76. DUAL AND PLURAL.
76.
rather a continuous mass, in which the individual
member is not distinguished. At present we shall deal
only with the first-named. Arabic distinguishes three
cases: Nominative, Genitive, and Accusative.
The terminations of the dual and the pluralis
α. sanus are as follows:
Dual nominative
""
genitive and accusative
Plural mascul. nominative
y!
(cf. § 33)
(cf. -_-)
,— (cf. § 33)
""
"}
gen.-accus.
ينَ
☺— (cf. ••—)
femin. nominative
"
☺ (cf. ni)
""
"" gen.-accus.
b.
Before these terminations the flectional endings
of the sing. are dropped; the 8 of the feminine ending
is changed to before the dual termination, (as it is
before the pronominal suffixes appended to the sin-
G
gular), e. g. xl, dual .
جَارِيَتَانِ
By the addition of the terminations exhibited
above is formed the plural of many adjectives, in
particular, and also of a number of substantives. In
the formation of the plural we find substantives with
the feminine ending taking the sign of the masculine
G
plural (as year, plur. ); much more fre-
77. THE CASE INFLECTION OF THE SINGULAR.
67
quently, however, substantives without the sign of
the feminine in the singular are found forming their
plural by means of the feminine termination, e. g.
Il condition, plur. Ý, T heaven, plur. Slá
(with the original waw restored § 71 d), also written
سَمْوَانٌ
As regards the case inflection of the singular, it 77
is necessary to distinguish between the so-called no-
mina triptota or triptotes, i. e. nouns which are in-
flected for all three cases, and the so-called nomina
diptota or diptotes, i. e. nouns which cannot be thus
fully inflected. The latter never receive the nunation,
and unless they are determined by the article or by
a following genitive, they are inflected for only two
cases.
The following are the case-endings of the triptote a.
noun: Nom. sing. un, Gen. sing. in, Acc. sing.
↑
an. With the feminine termination
only is
written instead of |_ as 1, but did; so
and Las (cf. § 3 b).
فتی
The case-endings of the diptote noun are: Nom. b.
sing.u, Gen. and Accus. Sing. — a.
In the dictionary the triptotes are distinguished
from the diptotes by being always written with the
5*
68 78. NOM. TRIPTOTA ET DIPTOTA. 79. DETERM. AND UNDETERM. NOuns.
nunation, as
without it, as
78.
E
a man, while the latter are always
black.
رَجُلٌ
أسْوَدُ
Whole classes of nouns are always diptote. Such are
a. 1) all proper names that are either feminine or have
b.
M
as names of
زينبية the feminine terminations
women; &
as name of a man. To these must be
added the majority of such proper names as are of
foreign origin, e. g.
مود
Abraham, Joseph,
C
نوح
Moses (but monosyllables like Noah are
mostly triptote).
2) Many so-called broken plurals; cf. § 88 Nos. 18,
19, 20; § 89 Nos. 23 24, 25, 27, 29;
C.
3) adjectives of the form
d.
4) adjectives of the form
(§ 62c; § 63b);
(§ 586), which form
e.
79.
their fem. like, e. g.
غَضْبَان
angry, fem. a.
5) Feminines formed by the terminations
s—or
(§ 74). Cf. also the broken plurals referred to under
b, §§ 88,19 and 89,29.
The inflection of the singular of all nouns and
of the plural of feminines varies according as a noun
is determined or undetermined.
a. All proper names are in themselves determined
ahmadu احمد ;muhammadun Muhammed محمد as
80. SHORTENING OF THE DUAL AND PLURAL TERMINS.
69
Ahmed; such proper names are treated either as trip-
totes or as diptotes according as their form and the
custom of the language may determine; many of them
always take the article, as
اَلْحَارِثُ
Common or class nouns are determined:
فرس
اَلْفَ
1) by the article; as a horse, the horse. b.
2) by the addition of a following genitive, which c.
may be either a noun or a pronominal suffix, whereby
the nomen regens is put in the construct state; as
الجالية
,,
the horse of the man, his horse.
فرسة
The case-endings of a noun determined (1) by the
prefixing of the article, or (2) by a genitive following
and the same applies to proper names with the
article—are distinguished as follows from those of
the undetermined noun:
Singular nom. —, Gen.
Plural fem. nom. —, Gen.-Acc.
Acc..
i. e. the nunation is always dropped. These endings
are assumed not merely by all triptotes, but also by
the diptotes, when determined by the article or a
genitive following: e. g. Nom. l, Gen.-Acc. Saul;
Eo-
9-05
30
اَلْأَسْوَدَ Acc اَلْأَسْوَدِ .Gen اَلْأَسْوَدُ but Nom.
E
Before a following genitive (which acc. to § 79 c 80.
may be either a noun or a pronominal suffix) the
70 81. INFLEXION OF NOUNS FROM STEMS ULt. , AND
terminations of the dual and of the plural are
dropped, thus:
U
عَبْدَانِ عَبد Dual No. of :
نَ
lace the two
عَبْدَا الوَزِيرِ
slaves of the Vizier.
Dual Gen.-Acc., but I have
عمر
ضَرَبتُ عَبْدَيْ
beaten the two slaves of Omar (before a connective
Plural Nom. of
butcher, executioners,
.the executioners of the king تَابُو الْمَلِكِ but
رَأَيْتُ تَصَّابِي الْمَلِكِ but تَصَّابِي Plural Gen. Acc
I
81.
a.
b.
have seen the executioners of the king.
قَصَابٌ
For the inflection of the noun see paradigms XX and XXI,
where will be found the forms of the masculine triptote
executioner,the masculine diptote
و
an
another, the feminine triptote
el hour, and the feminine diptote & Mayya (name of a woman).
In the case of nouns derived from stems ultimae
and when the second radical has a short vowel
ی
the nunation, acc. to § 71bc, is taken by this vowel
of the second radical.
Nouns ending in an or à are unchangeable for
all three cases; those in in or ã, on the other hand,
take the an of the nunation, as well as the simple a
(§ 47 d) as
اَلرَّامِيَ رَامِيًا
82. THE ADDITION OF THE PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES.
71
Before the dual terminations (cf. § 46 d) the last c.
radical is treated as a strong letter, ass, liso,
رَامِيَان .
مَرْعَيَانِ عَصَوَانِ
In the plural the last radical is dropped before d.
the terminations ūna and ina, which, when joined to
an a of the second radical, produce diphthongs (§ 46c);
U w
Googoo, o; if the
ونگا
second radical ممون مرمی thus from
رَامِينَ رَامُونَ
has i, the terminations are added immediately to the
former (§ 47 c), as oly moly.
For the inflection of these nouns see paradigm No. XXII,
where will be found the forms of the triptote judge,
عَمَّا
triptote Las
ذِكْرَى
judge, the
triptote (ult.) chosen one (often as a proper name), the
(ult. 9) a stick, the diptote remembrance, and
the diptote world (vgl. § 74A).
For the forms of the pronominal suffixes see 82.
§ 12b-d.
as
ی
Before the pronom. suffix of the 1. pers. sing. the a.
short case-endings of the construct state are dropped,
5. The said suffix after a final à, è or ai be-
comes (ya), as with the nom. dual, with
: Gli (§ 2d; 81 a); with the gen.-acc. plur.;
with (§ 81a):l; with gen.-acc. duals.
فَتَايَ فَتَى
W
72
83. VOWEL CHANGES IN PLUR. SANUS.
NOTE. In the case of words which end in
2
the suffix
ఓ
may either be attached in the usual way, e. g. from “sonny",
بني
or appended to the shortened form
بنی from بنی .eg
b.
83.
and .
The final of the construct state of the plural
i
masc. is changed to before the appended
§ 71e), thus becomes
و
(cf.
las, and then with
the suffix of the 1. pers. sing. (no longer to be
distinguished from the genit. and accus. plural). The
same applies to the ending au from stems ult.
مُصْطَفو
ی
(see
parad. XXII), e. g. becomes, with the
suffixé (also identical with the genitive-accu-
sative form).
For the union of the noun with the suffixes see paradigm
XXIII. For the change before suff. of final 8 into see § 76 α.
In the pluralis sanus of substantives of a masc.
or fem. nominal form with one short vowel (that is,
॰ 909
G
G
of any of the following types A, 2, fes and xles,
G
5709
äle, äles) the second radical frequently receives a
complementary vowel which is either identical with
that of the first radical or is short ă. Thus
أرَضُونَ plur.
905
more rarely, and
G
305
رض
ह
earth,
lé, more
darkness,
plur.
alongside ظُلْمَة أَرضَات rarely
84. l. 85. VOCATIVE.
73
This is a favourite method in ظُلْمَاتٌ and ظُلَمَاتٌ of
G
the case of the plural of the form xls, as xieb
(§ 73c) a single thrust or blow; plur.
thrusts or blows.
G
G
several
Before a son, a proper name loses its nuna- 84.
tion in the case mentioned § 6f 2, and is itself
written without the prosthetic I, e. g.
مُسْلِمٌ بن
all sto
muslimu-bnu-lwalīdi Muslim, the son of al-Walid.
S
زيد
آبْنُ
بشر
zaiduni-bnu bischrin (§ 6 e) means, on
the other hand, Zaid is the son of Bishr (nominal
sentence).
After the particle of address, the simple noun 85.
follows in the nominative without the nunation, as
Sw-
!Oh man يَا رَجُلٌ ! .Oh M يَا مُحَمَّد Muhammed مُحَمَّد
(by which a definite person is hailed). But should
anything of the nature of a complement (a genitive,
for instance) be added to the noun in the vocative,
the name of the person addressed must be put in the
o Abdallah! (Oh يَا عَبْدَ اللّهِ : عَبْدُ اللَّهِ accusative as
servant of God!);
Oh Banu Kinda! i. e.
cf. § 80 and
90b is the constr. state of). If an Object follows,
the noun stands in the accus. with the nunation, as
members of the tribe of Kinda (here
74
86. COLLECTIVE NOuns.
!Oh thou that ridest the red mare يَا رَاكِبًا الحمراء
86.
The particle L (before which we may also have )
is always followed by a nominative with the article,
as
K
! Oh ye people يَا أَيُّهَا النَّاسُ
NOTE. After 1, which serves as the expression of pain and
sorrow, a long ã is appended to the noun; in pause 8, as
85 Oh mother!
There are, in Arabic, a mass of words which,
though singular in form, have a collective signification.
The following varieties may be singled out under
this head:
101
which قوم
a. Simple collectives (masc. gend.) such as
denotes not merely a people' collectively, but also
'people' as individuals;
عَسْكَرْ
an army and also the
individual soldiers thereof. From such words broken
plurals may be formed.
V. Names of the inhabitants of a country, as
C.
d.
the Jews, often coinciding with the name of the country
itself, as
called
453
the Hindus; a single Jew or Hindu is
43
.865 هِنْدِيٌّ يَهُودِي
Class names (masc. gend.) from which are formed
G
nomina unitatis (§ 73 c) as doves.
حمام
So-called quasi-plurals (masc. gend.), from which
no nomen unitatis is formed, as
a company of
87. THE BROKEN PLURALS.
75
C
horsemen (a single one 1); the domestics
S
pás
(one of which is ); a number of asses (one
ass
حَمِيرٌ خَادِم
عَبْدُ slaves (from عَبِيدٌ ; حِمَارٌ
The so-called broken plurals (plurales fracti in the 87.
language of the native grammarians-by German a
scholars by preference called 'inner plurals' because
due to changes in the body of the word) are also
strictly speaking nothing more than collectives. Hence
they are treated in Arabic as singular nouns of the
feminine gender and construed accordingly. Thus
مُتَفَرِقَة
is the broken أَبواب different gates, where أبواب متفرقة
$
plural of (on the model of J), and the par-
ticiple act. V. ofis put in the fem. sing.—These
broken plurals, further, take the same inflection as
the singulars, discussed in § 77 ff.
As a rule the broken plurals are given in the b.
dictionaries alongside of the singular of their respective
nouns; when this is not so, it is to be presumed that
the word either has no plural or takes a pluralis sanus.
Sometimes we find from one and the same word more
than one plural; in such a case, not unfrequently, a
word varies its plural as its meaning varies. Certain
of the broken plurals are, as a rule, confined to certain
specified singulars.
76
88. THE BROKEN PLURALS.
88.
From nouns regarded as containing three con-
sonants the following broken plurals may be formed:
,
فَعْلَاء .and its fem ( 62 ) أَنْعَلُ from فُعّل .
from red; (cf. § 70g)
(70) سود
وہ
↓
احمر
509
حمر
(§ 74b), as
from (/70 § .. بيض for بيض ;black اسود from
.white. أبيض
from various singulars, as فعل ..
from كُتب
قطعة قطع
2.
book كتاب
فعل
3. des from sing. åles, as hs from 3 piece.
ક
عُلب
4. mostly from sing., as from
رَفَعْلَة
as
تو
from people; occasionally from
↑
acc. to § 716) from place.
قرية
| brother.
مدم
;box علية
قُرى (for) قری
G
670
from إخوة as,فعلة ... اخ
,فَاعِل .esp. from sing فَعَلَة 6. .from كَامِل from كَمَلَةٌ as
سَادَة
فیل
G
perfect; but also from § 70c, as 5l (for
Sw-
.lord سَيّد from سَيَدَة
G
فعلة
S
7. & (rare) as 8555 from 3,5 monkey.
G
قِرَدَة
قرة
G
قضية for) قُضَاةٌ
as
ری
ult فاعِل from فَعَلَة ..
§ 716) from els judge.
↑
9. Je very common, from various singulars, as
G
arrow.
قدْح from قداح
88. THE BROKEN PLURALS.
77
10. very common. also from various singulars,
فُعُول
تگوی for) بکی band of soldiers جند from جُنُودُ
,
609
as
see § 71 e) and then (with change of u to i) from
weeping.
G
G
.11 جَر from حِجَارَةً rare) as) فِعَالَة .
stone.
12. ‚s (rare) as do, from uncle.
عم
عُمُومَةٌ
بَاهِل from بُهَلْ as فَاعِل from فُعّل 13. an un بَاهِل
branded she-camel.
.scribe كَاتِبٌ from كُتَّاب as فَاعِل from فعال 14.
from ار
트
​from various singulars, as أفعل 15. جُلٌ
رجل
from أَرْفَةُ from various singulars, as أَنْعِلَة 16.
foot.
l
S
La cake, či (§ 67 c) from beloved; &
حَبِي
رَغِيفٌ
.God إِلَا from آلِهَةٌ ;president إمام from
,very common, from various singulars افعال 17.
always without the أشياء ;rain مَطَر from أَمْطَار
C
قريب from أقرباء
as
as
nunation) from thing.
(فَعِيل esp. from أَنْعِلاء ..
.rich غَنِيٌّ from أَغْنِيَاء ;relative
جرحى
rare), as) على 19.
·
S
from wounded.
جريح
78
89. THE BROKEN PLURALS.
.poet شَاعِر from شُعَرَاء
20., as
S
21. Á,
S
as
(for cf. § 696) from ↳ neighbour.
جِيران ;youth فَنَّى from فِتْيَان فِعْلَان.
فُرْسَانَ : district بكل from بُلْدَان as فُعْلَان 22.
.black أسود negroes from سُودَان ;rider فارس from
Į
89.
L3
NOTE. Forms 5 and 15-17 are used, as a rule, only of a
number of objects not exceeding ten (hence called pluralia
paucitatis).
From nouns with more than three radical con-
sonants (cf. § 56 d ff.) are formed plurals in which the
first consonant takes a, the second a and the third i.
Such plurals are diptotes with the exception of all
those derived from stems ult. (or with an additional
ی
in the sing. § 74 a) which take the nunation in in
the nominative and genitive, but not in the accusative
which ends in
The forms of the singular of
Nos. 24 (cf. also
§ 66) and 25 are regarded
as quadriliterals. No. 29 ends in long a and is diptote.
The following are the principal varieties:
فَعَالِلُ 23. (يُعْلَلْ) (NF) جُنْدَب from جَنَادِبُ as
locust.
This form is also found from nouns that are
only in a special sense quadriliterals, inasmuch as
they are really triliterals with the addition of a
89. THE BROKEN PLURALS.
79
formative consonant; examples of this group are:
37,05
;fingertip أَفْعُلَةٌ (NF) أَنْمُلَةٌ from أَنَامِلُ as أَفَاعِل )
also from elatives used as substantives, such as
تَفَاعِلُ ) كَبِير elat of أَكْبَرُ the great ones from كابر
أَكَابِرُ
مَفَاعِلُ ( ;experience تَفْعَلَةٌ ) تَجْرِبَةٌ from تَجَارِبُ
as
as
مَعَايش dung-heap مَفْعَلَةٌ .NF) مَرْبَلَةٌ from مَرَابِلُ
;livelihood (مَفْعِلَةٌ .NF) مَعِيشَةً with not with g) from)
.idea (مَفْعَلْ (NF) مَعْنَى of مَعَانِي .acc) مَعَانٍ
24.
C
especially from els andel (used
as a substantive), as from thunder-clap;
(676) خَوَاصِصُ (fox خَواص ; rider فَارِسٌ from فَوَارِسُ
(acc.)!=)
from els person of distinction;
&
.a female slave جارية from
from such nominal forms with a long فَعَائِل 25.
vowel after the second radical
form or signification, as a) is
obsequies; b)
from
from bride.
S
as have a feminine
from sili funeral
عَرَائس
جِنَازَة
miracle; c)ôlýš
(N. F. Ás)
عروس
.decision فَعلَ . . . فَتَوَى from فَتَارٍ as فَعَال 26.
from quadriliteral nouns with a long فَعَالِيل 27.
عُنقود from عَنَاقِيدُ vowel before the.last consonant, as
80
90. IRREGULAR NOUNS.
(N. F. Î2) bunch of fruit; this form is also found
with nouns derived from triliteral stems, of which the
following are specimens: a)
트
​delší as ¿uola from
as
تَصَارِيفُ
أَفَاعِي
تَفَاعِيلُ ( story (أَفَعُولَةٌ (NF) أُحْدُوثَةٌ
مَفْعُول participle) مقدور from مَقَادِيرُ as مَفَاعِيلُ (ه
G
from 3 (infinitive as used as a noun) turn;
$90
used as a noun) fate; but also
S
(cf. No. 24) as
a
.spy فَعُول (NF) جاسوس from حَوَاسِيسُ
from quadriliteral nouns denoting فَعَالِلَةٌ 28
ابرة living beings, as (فعال (NF) جَبَّار from جَبَابِرَة
from تَلَامِدَة : bishop أسقف from أَسَاقِفَةٌ ;mighty man
.a native of Bagdad بَغدَادِ from بَغَادِدَةٌ ;pupil تِلْمِينْ
ន
هَدايَا ;desert مَحْرَاء from صحارى as فَعَالی 29
مَحَارَى
(for
§ 2d note b) from (NF. Les from
ult. ) present.
90. The following nouns (arranged in alphabetical
order) are more or less irregular in their mode of
inflection:
a.
اب
기
​father, brother and
father-in-law take
the following forms in the construct state and before
suffixes beginning with a consonant:
90. IRREGULAR NOUNS.
81
حَيى
حَمَا
E
أَخُو أَبو Nominative
أخي أبي
Genitive
وأخا أبا Accusative
it
The Dual ofisi. e. the two parents), the
plur. (§ 88 No. 17). The vocative singular with
is
يَا أَبَتِ يَا أَبَتِي عن أَب suff. of the 1. pers. sing. of
.with suffix of the 2. pers. masc ; أي : أَخ from يَا أَبَتَ
أخوك أبوك .sing
E
.son; plur. sanus has nom ابن . construct) بنون
بنين
أبنا
i), gen.-acc. (st. constr.); broken plur.
f
(§ 88,5. 21).
초
​• إِخْوَانَ إِخْوَةٌ .brother, see a; broken plur
d.
e.
اِمْرَا
اخ
أَخَوَاتُ .sister; plur أخت
man; gen.
acc.
اِمْرُو اِمْرَ also) امرو or امر
GE
نسا woman; plur. from another root امراة
f.
G
or نسوة .(888,9521) نسوان
أُمَّانْ or أُمَّهَاتُ .mother; plur .
g.
man, human being; plur., collective h.
نَا ..
Socin, Arabic Grammar.2
6
82
90. IRREGULAR NOUNS.
¿.
daughter, frequently also (with con-
G
nective Alif); plur. .
G
k.
1.
دَنَانِيرُ
dinar, gold-piece; broken plur. irregular,
(only in the st. constr.) possessor of . . . .;
gen. ¿ò, acc. ló; fem. ¿ló; dual nom. fó; plur. nom.
‚³ (gen.-acc. 5,3)
ذَوُو
أولي
fem. ¿ló; for the plural,
(ŭlī), gen.-acc. ↓, is used.
C
m.
n.
0.
P.
سنين
30-
عمرو
year; plur. nom. m (or i); gen.-acc.
amrun, 'Amr, proper name of a man. A
9
is added to the written form of this word in the nom.
عمر
and gen. (,) to distinguish it from umaru (a
diptote). Acc.; followed by it is written,
and pronounced amra-bna.
فم
C
ē
or mouth; st. constr. usually nom.
gen. ¿, acc. ; broken plur. (§ 88,17) 01.
(§ 89,23).
S
عمرو
فو
night; broken plur. (from the root) JLJ
q.
.(88,9.17 ) امواه or يَا .To water; broken plur
91. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.
83
& hand; broken plur. (§ 88,15) from
(cf. § 71c).
أَيْدُى أَيْد .hand; يَلْ
ایدی
ايام
Go
يوم
day; broken plur. i from (§ 88,17).
Chapter IV. The Numerals. (§§ 91-93.)
r.
S.
The cardinal numbers have the following forms: 91.
Masc.
Fem.
inflected وَاحِدَةٌ
إِحْدَى
(inflected as a dual) اثْنَتَان
gls!
ارو
G
وَاحِدٌ
S
احد
إِثْنَانِ
1
2
CN
(تَلتْ) ثَلَاثُ 3 inflected (تلثة) ثلاثة
>>
أربعة
I
اربع
خمس
خمسة
13
693 :)
ست
الله
5
3
""
1:35
❤
"}
سنة
سَبْعَةُ
6
7
107
سبع
ثَمَانِيَةٌ ( *27 .see p) ثَمَانِ
ว
G
تسعة
عَشَرَةٌ
← ∞
8
9
10
G
تسع
عشر
indeclinable إحدَى عَشْرَةَ أَحَدَ عَشَرَ
11
6*
84
91. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.
Masc.
Fem.
،،
اِثْنَا عَشَرَ 12 اثْنَى ء“ .gen-acc اِثْنَنَا عَشرةَ
اثنتىء
،،
indeclinable ثَلَاثَ عَشْرَةَ ثَلَاثَةَ عَشَرَ 13
3
,,
أَرْبَعَ عَشْرَةَ أَرْبَعَةَ عَشَرَ 14
15
خَمْسَ عَشْرَةَ خَمْسَةَ عَشَرَ 16
ستْ عَشْرَةَ سِنَّةَ عَشَرَ 16
سَبْعَ عَشْرَةَ سَبْعَةَ عَشَرَ 17
ثَمَانِيَ عَشْرَةَ ثَمَانِيَةَ عَشَرَ 18
تِسْعَ عَشْرَةَ تِسْعَةَ عَشَرَ
inflected, like all the tens, as a
pluralis sanus.
19
20
إِحْدَى وَعِشْرُونَ أَحَدٌ وَعِشْرُونَ 21
60 خَمْسُونَ 50 أَرْبَعُونَ 40 ثَلَاثُونَ
ستون 60
تِسْعُونَ 90 تَمَانُونَ 80
30
سَبْعُونَ 70
100 L (also written, and always so
pronounced, miatun, the I having no effect on the
pronunciation).
92. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.
85
E
مِائَةٍ 400 ثَلَاثُ مِائَةٍ 300 مِائَنَانِ 200 500 أَرْبَعُ
ثَمَانِي
800 سَبْعُ مِائَةٍ 700 سِتْ مِائَةٍ 600 خَمْسُ مِائَةٍ
9
تِسْعُ مِائَةٍ 900 مِائَةٍ
آلاف) ثَلَاثَةُ آلَافٍ 3000ألفان 2000ألف 1,1000
(17 .No 88 8 أَنْعَالُ is here a broken plural of the form
1000000 مِائَةُ أَلْفِ 100000 أَحَدَ عَشَرَ ألفا 11000 .c&
أَلْفُ أَلْفِ
The following are the leading points to be noted 92.
in joining the cardinals to the names of the objects
numbered:
-and two are adjec (واحد)
The numerals for one.
tives; the numbers from 3-10, on the other hand,
are substantives, and take the word indicating the
objects numbered in the genitive plural. They may
also, however, be placed in apposition after the noun.
Whatever their position relative to the substantive
may be even, in fact, when the latter is altogether
omitted, or when they stand as the predicate of a
sentence--the construction is such that nouns of the
masc. gender take the fem. forms of these numerals,
a.
.c& ثَلاثمائة Often written *
86
93. THE ORDINAL NUMBERS.
and vice versâ nouns of the fem. gender take the masc.
,three sons بَنُونَ ثَلَاثَةٌ) ثَلَاثَةُ بَنِينَ forms. Thus
four daughters. Also before (بَنَاتْ أَرْبَعُ أَرْبَعُ بَنَاتٍ
broken plurals of which the singular is masculine,
we find the fem. forms of these numerals (3-10), as
.men 3 ثَلَاثَةُ رِجَالٍ
b.
The numbers from 11 to 99 are followed by the
word indicating the objects numbered in the accusative
singular, as ³Ã³ 30 men.
ثَلَاثُونَ رَجُلًا
C. The numbers from 100 upwards take the thing
numbered in the genitive singular as
400 men.
أرْبَعُ مِائَةِ رَجُلٍ
d. In the compound numbers the nature of the
construction depends on the last numeral. The
particle is used to join the numbers together; the
units and the tens may stand either before the
hundreds, or after the thousands and hundreds. Thus
خَمْسٌ وَتِسْعُونَ وَثَمَانِي مِائَةٍ وَأَلْفُ the year 1895 is either
أَلْفُ وَتَمَانِى مِائَةٍ وَخَمْسٌ وَتِسْعُونَ سَنَةً or سَنَةٍ
93.
The ordinals have, for the most part, the form
a. of the act. part. of the I stem, as may be seen from
the following:
93. THE ORDINAL NUMBERS.
87
Masc.
Fem.
G
Fem.
Masc.
أولى first أول سَادِسَةٌ سَادِش 6.
أَوَّلُ
سابع .
سَابِعَةٌ سَائِع
ثَانِيَةٌ
تَانٍ
G
ثامنة
ثَامِنُ 8
ثَالِثَة
ثَالِثُ
تاسِعَةُ تَاسِعٌ
9.
رَابِعَة
اسع ...
رَابِعٌ
1.
2.
3.
4.
G
خَامِسَةٌ عَاشِر 10. عَاشِرَة عَاشِر
خَامِس ...
indeclinable حَادِيَةَ عَشْرَةَ حَادِيَ عَشَرَ 11.
تَانِيَ عَشَرَ 12. ثَانِيَةَ عَشْرَةَ
ثَالِثَ عَشَرَ 13. .and so on ثَالِثَةَ عَشْرَةَ
The ordinals of the numbers from 20 upwards
are expressed by the corresponding cardinals, as
thirty-third; when larger totals have ثَالِثَ وَثَلَاثُونَ
to be expressed, the cardinals are used even for the
lower numbers. In dates, as a rule, the cardinal
numbers are used exclusively, as
فِي سَنَةِ ثَلَاثَ عَشْرَةَ
in the 1313th year of ثَلَاثِ مِائَةٍ وَأَلْفِ مِنَ الْهِجْرَةِ
the Hegira (which began on the 24th of June 1895).
Go
Fractions are usually expressed by the form Л, 6.
.a third خُلت as
88
94, 95. PARTICLES.
94.
Chapter V. The Particles. (§§ 94-96).
The adverbs, prepositions and conjunctions cannot
here be given in detail. The prepositions, like many
adverbs, are still for the most part recognizable as
nouns of three radicals originally, which have preserved
the accusative ending without the nunation. Preposi-
tions therefore always govern the genitive case in
Arabic and may also stand in the genitive in depen-
dence on other prepositions. Thus above, with
الْجَبَلِ
a subst. up on the hill.
NOTE. A few adverbs end in u (which in this case has
absolutely nothing to do with the nominative termination) as
in the same sense; but as prepositions
afterwards; so
ވ
.after من بعد or بعد
95.
The following particles (in alphabetical order)
because written with a single letter are inseparably
joined to the following word, cf. § 8 note.
H
α.
-E
트
​↑ (1) interrogative particle, as Ax did he kill?
I
É
20
'b.
C.
is thy اسْمُكَ + for f أَسْمُكَ Before the connective Alif
بی
name . . . ?
preposition 'in'; with suffixes thus: 1.
in me, 2. masc. Ás, 3. masc. x (§ 12d) &c.
particle of asseveration, as xs by God.
س
96. PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS WITH SUFFIXES. 89
shortened from, a particle which gives d.
90
jë
to the impf. the sense of the future, as he
will kill.
, then, denotes a less close connection than
J (?) like, aş.
J
e.
f.
a corroborative particle before verbs, especially g.
in oaths, as
W
he will certainly kill; it also
stands before nouns, especially after the particle!
(§ 125 a note).
(?) preposition and conjunction; before suffixes h.
(except in 1. pers. sing. ) it becomes ĺ, as
to thee.
لَك
5 (1, 1) connective particle; as a particle of i
asseveration it takes the gen., as I by God.
وَاللَّهِ
As regards the addition of pronominal suffixes 96.
to the prepositions and conjunctions, the following
points may be noted in addition to what has been
said under § 82.
Before the suffixes of the 1. pers. sing., the final a.
vowel or vocalic auslaut is dropped as is the case
with the noun; thus 'after' with the suff. of the
1. pers. sing. , but ÍÁş &c.
بَعْدَى
بَعْدَكَ
90
97. DISTINCTION BETWEEN PERF. AND IMPF.
b.
In the prepositions upon, and I towards,
the final is sounded before suffixes (contrary to
ی
82d, e. g.
إِلَيْكَ عَلَيْكَ .with suff. of the 2. pers. masc
إِلَيْهِ عَلَيْهِ
(see 8 82a) إِلَى عَلَى
=
3.
1.
""
و,
وو
C.
d.
,,
The prepositions
and double the n be-
fore the suffix of the. 1. pers. sing., as
behold, truly, and that, become
أَنَّكَ and إِنَّكَ .with the suff. of the 2. pers. sing. masc
إنني اني or
أَنِّي or أَنَّنِي
إِنَّا
or
إِنَّنَا
or أَنَّنَا انا or
1.
""
""
1. plur.
وو
وو
وو
97.
III. NOTES ON SYNTAX. (§§ 97—160).
Chap. I. Moods and Tenses. (§§ 97-104).
The perfect expresses a completed action, the
completion of which falls in the past, present or future,
or is thought of as falling in one or other of these
98. THE PERFECT.
91
periods. The imperfect expresses an uncompleted
action, which may likewise fall in each of the same
three spheres of time.
α.
The perfect is, in the first place, the tense of 98.
narration (perfectum historicum), when an action com-
pleted in the past is spoken of, and may, as a rule,
be rendered by our past tense, as
107
زيد
트
​Zaid came.
By the perfect the idea is expressed that an action b.
or a state has continued from the beginning, and still
(the learned (always اِخْتَلَفُوا الْعُلَمَاء continues, as
disagree (gnomic aorist);
(from the beginning).
God, he is exalted
When the perfect expresses an action completed c.
in the present, it is to be rendered by our present,
I present you with this (the affair is أَعْطَيْتُكَ هذَا
as
at this moment concluded).
In a sentence containing an oath or a wish, the d.
perfect expresses an action which, in the mind of the
speaker, is completed in the future, as a
curse him; also with 'not', as
God
I may God
رحمة
الله
by God I do وَاللَّهِ لَا فَعَلْتُ ;have no pity on him
it not!
When the particle s stands before the perfect, e.
the latter may in most cases be rendered by our per-
92
99. THE IMPERFECT.
f.
fect (either the present or the past perfect), as Aï
ذَكَرْنَا
we have (just) mentioned, or we had mentioned.
The perf. with is may also be used in the sense given
under sub-section c.
When the verb (to be) stands before the per-
fect (with or without ), we must render as a rule
is),
لَمَّا وُلِدَ مُوسَی by our past perfect pluperfect,as
when Moses was كَانَ قَدْ أَمَرَ فِرْعَوْنُ بِقَتْلِ الْأَطْفَالِ
g.
h.
99.
born, Pharaoh had (just) commanded to kill the little
children.
NOTE. Instead of the above verbal sentence (§ 134),
may be followed by a compound nominal sentence (§ 138 d) as
فرعون قد أمر
كان
Our conditional is expressed in Arabic by the
perfect, that is, it is represented as something already
accomplished, as 55, I should wish,, ABS (X)
كُنْتُ دات
I should have wished.
For the perf. after 3 and in conditional sen-
tences see §§ 157, 158.
The imperfect indicative is to be rendered accord-
ing to circumstances by our present or our future,
sometimes also by our past progressive (imperfect).
a. If the future is to be expressed with greater pre-
cision than by the Arabic imperfect alone, the latter
99. THE IMPERFECT.
93
has prefixed to it the adverb
(end), which may be
shortened to and is then inseparably joined to the verb
w
سَنرِيهِمْ ;(know
(see § 95 d), as Tilö F ye will know (it);
سَوْفَ تَعْلَمُونَ
(496) we shall show you.
in
By the imperfect is expressed an action which b.
accompanies another action completed in the past,
or which is still in the future from the stand point.
they came to their جَاوا أَبَاهُمْ يَبْكُونَ of the latter, as
he أَتَى الْعَيْنَ يَشْرَبُ ; (1570 8 .father weeping (cf
came to the spring to drink.
The imperfect can also express the continuance c.
يَتَقَاتَلُونَ
of an action in the past; may also mean
'they were fighting for a considerable time', or 'they
fought repeatedly, with each other'. More frequently,
however, this continuous imperfect is expressed by
a combination of with the impf. (cf. § 98f. and
note); sometimes we can render such a combination
كَانَ يَأْخُذُ فِي كُلَّ يَوْمٍ by our was wont to or used to'as
he used to receive every day three ثَلَاثَةَ دَرَاهِم
drachmae.
If A stands before the imperfect, a certain in- d.
definiteness is the result, as
it will most قَدْ يَكُونُ
94
100. THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
likely be that . . .', an idea which is not unfrequently
found in the imperf. without s
NOTE a. The impf. also stands in direct subordination to
JLUE
other verbs, as I ceased not to drink (cf. § 110);
JVZ J
U2
مَا اقدر افعَل ; he began to speak with the people جعل يكلم الناس
100.
I cannot do such a thing.
NOTE b. Before several verbs (perfects or imperfects) joined
together with 5, it is sufficient to write once, and so with
and سوف قد سر
NOTE C.
(see note to § 98f) is frequently followed by a
Osman was كَانَ عُثْمَانُ يَزُور المقابر compound nominal sentence, as
wont to visit the graves (the cemetery).
The Subjunctive is found in certain kinds of depen-
dent clauses introduced by a conjunction, the action
of which is to be represented as one to be expected.
as the result of the action of the principal clause,
and hence as one that is only likely to occur in the
future. Hence this mood is frequently (not always)
used after the conjunctions that, (from
until,
I
ان)
that not,
Jin order that, (made up of V)
(and) that, and always after
w
트
​رلا
in order that . . not, in the sense of ‘except that',
'until', as
;he came in order to visit me جَاءَ لِيَزُورَنِي
he commanded him to write (that he أَمَرَهُ أَنْ يَكْتُبَ
101. THE MOD. APOCOPAT. OR JUSSIVE.
102. THE MOD. ENERGIC. 95
should write). In like manner the subj. is used after
() it will not be (the case) that, as
I shall not send him.
لَنْ أُرْسِلَهُ
The modus apocopatus (or jussive) is found:
101.
1) in positive commands, generally with the particle a.
Jprefixed, as let him write.
.let لِيَكْتُب
فَ
NOTE. When such a form is further preceded by
, and ♬
(which is sometimes the case, without any special stress resting
on these particles) generally loses its vowel, as
د دوی و.
is and in God let the believers (then, therefore) trust.
و
2) in negative commands with ý, as Aš ý say not, b.
thou shalt not say. The imperative can never take
a negative.
لَمْ يَضْرِبْ
3) always after, not as a prohibition but as ne- c.
gativing a completed action, as he did not
strike, (as the negation of); in like manner after
in the sense of ‘not yet.
4) in the protasis and apodosis of conditional sen- d.
tences, see § 158.
The modus energicus is usually found in assevera- 102.
tions, and particularly in connection with an oath
and the corroborative particle J, as
by وَاللَّهِ لَأَضْرِبَنَّهُ
God, I will certainly strike him; this mood is also
used with the prohibitive .
96
103. THE PASSIVE. 104. THE PARTICIPLE.
103.
104.
a.
b.
The Passive is employed in those cases in which
the agent, for some reason or other, must not be
So.
mentioned. Hence a sentence like s means
زيد
'Zaid has been killed (by some person unknown or
who may not be named)'. Our 'Zaid has been killed
by 'Amr', the Arabs express by the active construction.
The passive is frequently found in an impersonal sense
(see § 121a).
With regard to the employment of the participles
the following points are to be noted:
트
​The participle (especially as predicate of a nominal
sentence § 122 a) frequently expresses our "to be about
to”, as I foli I am about to come, on the
point of coming, to you.
The passive participle is also used impersonally
in Arabic; starting from the sentence xils Give he
fainted (literally: it was covered over him) we can
هی .he has fainted, fem هو مَغْشِي عَلَيْهِ also say
In such constructions the impersonal مَغْشِي عَلَيْهَا.
493
part. pass. may be inflected for all three cases and be
مَرَرْتُ بِرَجُلٍ مَعْشِي عَلَيْهِ determined by the article, as
905
رَأَيْتُ المَرأةَ الْمَغْشِي : I passed a man who had fainted
هَا
Les I saw the woman that had fainted.
105. VERB. COMPLEMENTS. 106-108. ACCUS. COMPLEMENT. 97
Chap. II. The Government of the Verb. (§§ 105-117).
In Arabic the verb may take as its complement 105.
either an accusative, or a preposition with its case.
The numerous combinations of the latter sort, in
which the preposition with its case is sometimes the
necessary complement of the action denoted by the
verb, sometimes merely accessory (such, for example,
as specifications of place and time) cannot here be
given in detail. See, however, §§ 114 ff.
The accusative is the case depending immediately 106.
on the verb. We distinguish here the cases in which,
the accusative stands a) as object, ẞ) as predicate,
and y) as limitation or more precise definition, generally
called by grammarians, the accusative "of nearer
definition".
a) Certain classes of verbs, as for example, verbs 107.
of coming and going, take as direct object the goal
he went into the house.
دَخَلَ الْبَيْتَ .. .to which the action is directed, e
دَخَلَ إِلَى البيت
دَخَلَ في البيت the direction of the action towards the goal
NOTE. On the other hand denotes primarily
he went into the house and stayed there.
The following take two accusatives: 1) The causa- 108.
tive forms of transitive verbs with one accusative in
the I. stem, as
he عَلَمَهُ القِراءة to know caus علم
Socin, Arabic Grammar.2
7
98
109. THE ABSOLUTE OBJECT.
taught him reading; 2) verbs that express the ideas.
of filling or giving, of making into, of considering or
recognising as, of naming, and many others: e. g.
God made the earth (into a جَعَلَ اللهُ الْأَرْضَ فِراشا
M
سمی
ابنه محمدا ;carpet
he named his son Muhammed.
When a verb of this class is put in the passive, the second
92000
w 9
his son was سُمّى ابنه مُحَمَّدًا accusative remains, as
named Muhammed;
a dirhem, from the active
he was presented with
with a dirhem (for suff. see § 107).
he presented him
NOTE a.
The two accusatives of such verbs as express the
idea of finding one to be, or considering one as something, stand
to each other, strictly speaking, in the relation of subject and
predicate (§ 189); thus a sentence like
may also
be translated 'I found that he was a gentle old man'. As second
وَجَدُوا بِضَاعَتَهُمْ object we may have a verb instead of a noun as
109.
they found their payment to be something which was
returned to them = they found that their payment was &c.
NOTE b. Verbs expressing not an intellectual but a physical
perception are also frequently found with two accusatives. The se-
cond, indeed, is generally regarded as an acc. of condition (§
1136), but sentences like, it must be admitted,
,it
may also be translated: I heard 'Amr weeping, i. e. I heard how
'Amr wept.
For the purpose of strengthening or of more
precisely defining the idea conveyed by it, every verb
110. THE ACCUSATIVE AS PREDICATE.
99
may take a so-called absolute object. This absolute (or
internal) object consists of an infinitive, a nomen speciei
(§ 64 c) or other noun. Usually this object is itself more
precisely defined either by some qualifying word or
phrase (§ 120) or by a genitive, as is lots 201
he educated him with a good education, i. e. well;
&
,
E
he struck him with a stroke ضَرَبَنِي ضَرْبًا أَوْجَعَنِي
which pained me (for the relative sentence, see § 155);
he walked in the way of his grand سَلَكَ سِيرَة جَدِهِ
father. More rarely the absolute object is found with-
out any qualification, as
with a stroke, as much as to say, he struck him a
he struck him ضَرَبَهُ ضَرْبًا
blow, and what a blow! he wrapped it in
ت و و --
صره
صُرَدًا
(so many) parcels; here the absolute object expresses
rather the result of the action.
NOTE. Sometimes the place of the infinitive is taken by the
سَارَ سَيْرًا طَوِيلاً he journeyed long, or ار طويلا mere qualification, as
he journeyed a long journey, or by some other form of nearer
ميدو
4905
God allowed him to فتح الله عليه بيت المقدس صلحا definition, as
capture Jerusalem peacefully =
.
B) The accusative stands as the predicate with verbs 110.
which express the idea of being or becoming some-
thing, and is especially common with the verb
(med.,). This verb signifies either 1) to be in the
جان
1
7*
100
111. THE ACCUSATIVE AS PREDICATE.
↓
sense of to exist, as there was (there lived)
كَانَ
وزير
a vizier, or 2) to be something (in particular); in
the latter sense it takes its predicate (to adopt
the nomenclature of the native grammarians) in
دو
his wife was كَانَتِ امْرَأَتُهُ حَامِلا the accusative, as
pregnant. The same construction is adopted by all
verbs of similar signification, such as
something late,
smol to be
اصْبَحَ to عَادَ,to be something early
be or become something a second time, ó to remain,
to last, Jĺ, to cease to be something,
to become
something, not to be something. The place of
the accusative in the predicate may be taken by a
preposition with its case (cf. § 114 ff.), as sy
زيد
كَانَ
كَانَتْ مُلُولُ الْفُرْس : Zaid was in the house في البيت
البَيْثِ
the kings of Persia belonged مِنْ أَعْظَمِ مُلُوكِ الْأَرْضِ
111.
to the most powerful sovereigns on earth. The con-
struction of and the others with a finite verb
(§§ 98f; 99 c) must also be understood in this way,
that is, the predicate in such cases consists of a verbal
sentence (§ 135), as
the people أَصْبَحَ النَّاسُ قَدْ تَعِمُوا
had already (prop. early) become weary.
The accusative, further, stands in the predicate
112. ACC. OF CONCOMITANCE. 113. ACC. OF NEARER DEFINITION. 101
after the negative ý, when the latter, as the Arabs
say, expresses a general negation. The accus. after ,
which is always undetermined, drops its nunation, as
there is (absolutely) no God but Allah.
The accusative is used after the conjunction to 112.
5
indicate concomitance, especially in verbal sentences
(§ 135), as
what hast thou and مَا صَنَعْتَ وَأَبَاكَ
I ceased not مَا زِلْتُ أَسِير والنيل ?thy father done
to go with (along) the Nile; also without a verb ló
lj, № what hast thou (to do) with Zaid?
7) The accusative of nearer definition is employed 113.
in the following cases:
1) To give details of place and time, as is a.
α.
يَمِينًا
نَظَرَ
سَارَ فَرْسَا ;he looked to right and to left of him وَشِمَالًا
they came late جَاوا عِشاء ;he journeyed a parasang
-he con اِسْتَمَرَّ عَلَى ذلِكَ مُدَّةَ حَيَاتِهِ ;in the evening
Ting
tinued faithful thereto during his life-time.
2) Very frequently the accusative, as a rule un- b.
determined, appears in verbal (rarely in nominal)
sentences as the accusative of state or condition,
as
he journeyed, taking the سَارَ مُتَوَجِهَا إِلَى الْمَدِينَةِ
I met Amr لَقِيتُ عَمْرًا بَاكِيًا ;direction of Medina
weeping.
C.
d.
102 113, 114*. ACC. OF NEARER DEFINITION AND EXCLAMATION.
NOTE a.
With the accusative of condition the student
must be careful to note to which of the nouns in the sentence it
applies; in the last sentence above, for example, it might refer
to the subject pronoun implicit in instead of to `Amr.
NOTE b. Two nouns in the accusative of condition are
often placed beside each other without a conjunction (asyndeton)
= 20
-God said to Satan): Go out of it (pa اخرج منها مدوما محقورا as
= 20
radise, fem.) as one cast off and despised (for logo see § 70 note).
NOTE c. In some rare cases an infinitive is used (in place
of a participle) to denote a qualifying circumstance;
was killed bound (i. e. while bound)
-
مصبورا
BU -
he
3) The accusative of specification(=accus. of respect),
also in most cases undetermined, expresses a more
5--09
precise reference, as mit (paradise) is
beautiful with reference to staying (there), i. e. as a dwell-
ingplace; this accus. is especially common with elatives
(§ 63b) of a more general signification, as
stronger with regard to the colour red redder.
4109
2 / 3
اشد حمرة
\
4) The accusative of nearer definition is also em-
ployed to indicate the motive or purpose of an action,
in which case, also, it is mostly undetermined, as
قُمْتُ إِكْرَامًا لَهُ ; they filed from cowardice هربوا بنا
جُبْنَا
114*
I stood up to do him honour.
The accusative may also stand in cases, parti-
cularly in exclamations, where a finite verb can be
supplied, as
welcome! Here we must أَهْلًا وَسَهْلًا
114, 115. THE VERB WITH PREPOSITIONS.
103
&
supply, and the meaning of the phrase comes
to be: thou art come to relatives and a smooth (i. e.
pleasant) place; slowly! to be taken as the
Á
absolute object of an imperative understood.
Of the numerous constructions of the verb with 114.
a preposition attention need only be called to the
following.
Many prepositions are still treated as nouns, in
accordance with their original signification (see § 94),
as
he distinguished between مَيَّزَ بَيْنَ الذُكُورِ وَالْأَنَاتِي
(prop. the distance, difference of) males and females.
Very frequently we find (cf. § 110) the partitive
g. plebi
he أَكَلَ مِنَ الطَّعَامِ .8 .used in this way as object, e
ate of the food.
A few verbs are construed, with but slight differ- 115.
ence of meaning, now with a direct object, now with
, as
Frequently
he knew it, he knew about it.
serves to introduce an object, to which
the action of the verb extends only indirectly, as
he sent the بَعَثَ بِالْكِتَابِ ;he sent aid بت يدا
writing (i. e. some one with the writing);
he sent the slave,, same meaning, but
104
116, 117. THE VERB WITH PREPOSITIONS.
with the understanding that the slave travels under
escort. Verbs of going construed with take the
ب
he brought Zaid أَنَى يا بالخبر sense of bringing, as
116.
117.
the news.-This
may also accompany an impera-
tive as a periphrasis of the first person of the dual
let (thou) us go, lí l
and plural, as
let (ye) us go.
The meaning of many verbs is often so altered
according to the preposition with which they are
construed that a sense quite the opposite of the
original, according to our idiom, is the result; thus
E is properly: he called (to God) in his favour,
i. e. he blessed him, xl he called (to God)
he اشتغل بالامر ;against him, i, e. he cursed him
occupied himself with the affair; but with (which
contains the idea of separation)
E
اِشْتَغَلَ عَنِ الا
he
was occupied so that he put the affair in question
aside, could not attend to it.
Of the various uses of the preposition J (see
§§ 130 ff.), we may call attention to its special use in
dates, particularly in specifying the days of the month,
as
لِأَوَّلِ لَيْلَةٍ مِنْ تَحْرِمٍ
in the first (literally: to the first)
night of (the month) Muharram.
UJ
لِسَبْع
118. DETERMINATION.
105
p)
)(90) ( لَيَالٍ or with the omission of مِن شعبان
.at the time of seven nights, which (cf سَبْعَ خَلَونَ
Jads
§ 155) had elapsed of Šabān, i. e. when seven nights
E
when still fourteen (nights) were left of
لِأَرْبَعَ عَشْرَةَ (لَيَالٍ ) بَقِيَتْ ;or days) of . had passed)
مِن رَمَضَانَ
Ramadan.
Chap. III. The Government of the Noun. (§§ 118-134).
A noun may take with it a) the article, ẞ) a permut- 118.
ative (noun in apposition), †) a qualifying (attribu-
tive) adjunct, ò) a genitive.
a) When a noun is preceded by the article, it is said
to be determined (§ 79b). This determination may be
stronger or weaker:
A very strong determination is found in certain a.
words which contain the idea of time, as xl this
hour
today. In these cases
the article has the force of a demonstrative.
this day اَلْيَوْمَ now =
By means of the article a single definite object is b.
indicated, which the speaker has in mind, or which
has been already mentioned: by is meant some
particular known man. Proper names furnished with
the article (see § 79 a) were originally appellatives
with the determination, as
اَلْحَسَنُ.
106
119. APPOSITION.
C.
119.
α.
The determination by the article often serves
merely to denote the species or class to which some-
he is like an ass.
thing belongs, as
هُوَ مِثْلُ الْحِمَارِ
This use of the article is named the generic.
From among the cases in which a noun follows
another noun in apposition, the following may be
singled out as worthy of note:
A substantive may have in apposition words
expressing a) size, b) resemblance, c) the parts and
d) the material of which a thing is made up. Thus
S
a) a dress an ell long (lit. a dress, an ell);
ذراع
رَجُلٌ مِثْلُ زيد )
b)
a man like (lit. the likeness of)
Zaid; c) led a rope made up of rotten pieces;
b.
-the iron finger-ring; when undeter الْخَاتَمُ الْحَديدُ )
صَنَمْ مِنْ ذَهَبٍ as مِنْ mined preferably with
$--
oso an idol
of gold. For the last, the genitive construction is
also found viz:o.
The word totality is construed either with the
noun following in the genitive, or stands in apposition,
with a suffix referring back to the noun, as
3
وبد
-all men. Note that being a substan النَّاسُ كُلُّهُمْ or
tive always remains unchanged as regards gender and
number).
120. QUALIFYING ADJUNCTS.
107
7) A substantive may be qualified 1) by an adjective, 120.
2) by a preposition with its case, or 3) by a relative
clause (§§ 155-6).
1) The qualifying word may be an adjective, as a.
إِمَامٌ عَادِل
an honest Imām; in this case if the
substantive is determined the adjective must also
receive the determination, as Jo, the honest
Imām.
اَلْإِمَامُ الْعَادِلُ
The adjective follows its substantive; to this rule b.
the demonstrative pronoun forms an apparent excep-
tion, in as much as it generally stands before (like the
article § 118), less frequently after, the substantive
which it qualifies. Thus we find
this slave,
الْغُلَامُ هَذَا alongside of
The adjective must agree with its substantive in c.
gender and number, as
.a pretty girl صَيَّةٌ جَمِيلَة
Among the exceptions is the word much, which
generally remains unchanged, like a noun in apposi-
الْ كَثِير tion, even after the plural, as
,, many men.
That the broken plurals take their adjectives in d.
the feminine has been already noted (see § 87 a); the
adjective, however, may also take a broken plural, as
G
,, noble men. The plur. sanus, moreover, is not
رجال كرام
108
121. PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE AS ADJUNCT.
unfrequently found especially if the adjective qualifies
words denoting living beings, as
the الْآبَاءِ الْمَاضُونَ
ancestors that were of old (part. of). In the same
circumstances the collectives (§ 86 a) may also take a
90-
plural adjective, as miserly people,
90-
قَوْم ظَالِمُونَ و با
these men; but هؤلاء النَّاسُ
violent people. The preceding pronoun often stands
then in the plural, as
with fem. plurals that do not denote living beings.
these هذِهِ الفَلَوَاتُ generally in the fem. singular, as
deserts; before broken plurals also in the fem. sing., as
.these slaves هذِهِ الْمَمَالِيك
2) From those cases in which a preposition with its
121. noun is dependent on a verb (§§ 114 ff.) or its equi-
a. valent, must be clearly distinguished those in which
they form the qualifying attribute of another noun,
as
I sat down beside a جَلَسْتُ عَلَى صَائِعَ بِالسُّوقِ
ذُرِّيتُكَ مِنْ بَعْدِكَ goldsmith (who was in the bazaar
و.
thy posterity (that will be) after thee.
Sometimes this attribute does not stand next to
b. the word qualified; so particularly with the relatives
Lo,
those of مَنْ دَخَلَ الشَّامَ مِنَ الْعَرَبِ and as مَن
اَنْكِحُوا مَا طَابَ ;the Arabs that advanced into Syria
122. ASYNDETON OF ATTRIBUTES. 123. THE GENITIVE. 109
marry of the women whatever seemeth لَكُمْ مِنَ النِّسَاء
good unto you.
Should several attributes qualify a single substan- 122.
tive, the connecting conjunction is usually omitted
(asyndeton), as the high and mighty
الله العلي العظيم
a wide gate of the بَاب واسع مِنْ أَبْوَابِ القريةِ ;God
غَمَامَةٌ ضَحْمَةٌ عَلَى رَأْسِهِ تُظِلُّهُ ;gates of the town
&
a thick cloud over his head which gave him shade.
8) One noun, when in dependence on another, is put 123.
in the genitive case-the function of which is to deter-
mine more exactly the application of the preceding
noun. As the result of the close connection subsisting
between the second noun and the first, the latter, now
said to be in the construct state (§ 79c) and therefore
without the article, is regarded as determined. There-
9 09
forewe is 'the (particular) spear of the
رمح
(particular) horseman', and so with the suffixes, as
رحه
his (particular) spear. When the dependent noun
(nomen rectum) is undetermined, the governing noun
(nomen regens) is only defined in a generic sense
(§ 118 c), or is specialized in a way resembling the
generic definition, as a daughter of a king
a king's daughter.
بِنْتُ مَلِكِ
124.
125.
126.
110 124.CONS.AND GEN. INSEP. 125. DETER.BY SUFF. 126.COMPOS. NOUNS.
NOTE. More rarely, in the latter case, the generic article
may be attached to the nomen rectum, as
σ m
barley bre ad
The genitive cannot be separated from the go-
verning word (nomen regens); adjectival and other
additions must therefore stand after the genitive, as
.the spacious house of the king بَيْتُ الْمَلِكِ الوَاسِعُ
When, according to our idiom, a genitive belongs to
two substantives, in Arabic it is made dependent on
the first of the two, and represented with the second
by a personal pronoun, as ¿šứ,
and blessings of God.
the mercy رَحْمَةُ اللهِ وَبَرَكَاتُهُ
Substantives conveying the idea of time sometimes
receive a specially strong determination by the addition
of suffixes (cf. § 118a), as he prayed his
night, i. e. the particular night in which he then was.
The close connection of two nouns thus standing
in the genit. relation makes sometimes possible their
fusion to one idea, although only the first component.
وَعَبْدِ اللَّهِ .gen عَبْدُ اللّه admits of inflection. Thus
الله
acc. xii) the servant of Allah, as a proper name,
conveys but a single idea. Further illustrations will be
found in the numerous examples of composite proper
names, of which one of the elements is one or other of the
GE
wordsson, father, daughter, mother.
بنت
127, SUBST. USE OF ADJJ. 128. EXPLICATIVE GENITIVE. 111
As the Arabs have no family names, properly so-called,
the name of a man or woman receives for distinction's
sake an addition by the help of the above words, as
E
observe the order. Very) أَبُو الْعَبَّاسِ مُحَمَّدُ بْنُ يَزِيدَ
frequently a name thus made up has become the
principal name, as that of the first Caliph gol,
أبو بكر
ز ابن قتيبة for example, or that of the savant
E
names
of tribes, too, likes is, are in the same way
simple notions (Einheitsbegriffe).
Not unfrequently an adjective which in our idiom 127.
would be made to qualify its substantive, is in Arabic
raised to the rank of a substantive, on which its proper
خُلقه
كريم
substantive is made to depend; thus the
noble(ness) of his character his noble character;
M
most men. The same construction is found
اهون عيشة with elatives also as they lived عَاشُوا أَهْوَنَ عِيشَة
the easiest life (cf. § 109).
A species of explicative genitive is found in cases 128.
where a general conception is more explicitly defined
by a following proper name, as
the land أَرْضُ الْيَمَنِ
ر دوں
هم
of Yemen. Under this head may be reckoned the
suffixes appended to numerals, as the three
of them.
129.
130.
131.
112 129. CLAUSE AS GEN. 130. PERIPH. OF GEN. 131. CONS. OF INFIN.
A few words containing the ideas of time and
place may have, instead of a genitive, a whole clause
depending on them, as
on the day on which
he was killed.
يوم
When a noun on which another noun is in the
proper sense (cf. § 134) dependent must remain absolu-
tely undetermined (see § 123), the usual genitive rela-
tion of nomen regens and nomen rectum is inadmissible,
and the connection of the two must be expressed by
a preposition, as
لَكُمْ
GE
a brother of yours, where أخ لكم
لَكُمْ
is attrib. adjunct to (see § 121a).
Infinitives may govern their object according to
the laws either of verbal or of nominal government.
In the first instance their subject is subordinated in the
genitive; accordingly means: the circumstance
that Zaid has killed. If no subject is named, the object
may likewise stand in the genitive, so that the same
901
expression may also mean: the circumstance
A
زيد
that Zaid has been killed, the fact of Zaid's being killed.
When both subject and object are present, the former
is treated as a subjective genitive; the latter remains
in the accusative or with the genitive is used as a
مُدَا وَمَتَهُ شُرب الخمر periphrasis for the accusative, as
الْخَمْرِ
132. PARTICIPLE WITH OBJECT.
113
the circumstance that he was constantly drinking
wine;
W
حبى
the circumstance that I am fond
of wine. J also stands after an undetermined infinitive
(e. g. in cases like § 113 d and others) as
لِزَيْدٍ
I stood up to do honour to Zaid.
قُمْتُ إِكْرَامًا
In the case of the participle, the object of the 132.
verb appears as the objective genitive, and when the
part. has the sense of the perfect it is determined by
ह
God is اللَّهُ خَالِقُ الْأَرْضِ the genitive following, as
he who has created the earth the creator of the
earth. With a present or future sense the governing
كُلَّ نَفْسٍ ذَائِقَةُ الْمَوْتِ participle is not determined, as
نه
every soul is one that will taste of death;X II
he is one that will meet with you. If the participle
is in itself determined, the object stands in the
accusative or is expressed periphrastically with J, as
he who strives after knowledge; the الطَّالِبُ لِلْعِلْمِ
same applies when the participle is strictly undeter-
mined, as xsl
one who wishes to take
طَالِبٌ تَأْرَ أَبِيهِ
1 مَا زِلْتُ يُحِبَّا لِلْإِسْلَامِ ;blood revenge for his father
have not ceased to love Islam.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.2
S
114
133. UNDETERM. STAT. CONSTR. 134. IMPROP. ANNEXATION.
133.
A special idiomatic use of certain generic words.
is their combination with a following genitive. They
are determined or undetermined according to the
context, e. g., he who has, possessor of (cf. § 907),
صَاحِب ;the possessor of wealth, a rich man ذُو مالٍ
companion, owner, so the man of sense;
E
people, people of the world-worldly people;
107
50-
learned; prop. change, then 'another than', as
one, some of the بَعْضُ الْعُلَمَاءِ . .portion, e بَعْضُ
غيره the king died and another مَاتَ الْمَلِكُ فَمَلَكَ بَعْدَهُ
134.
S
E
than he reigned after him; similarly one, as
one of them; finally son, in certain common
ابن حمام
.thirty years old ابْنُ ثَلَاثِينَ سَنَةً idioms, as
رَجُلٌ حَسَنُ الْوَجْهِ
A special kind of genitive relation is presented
by the so-called improper annexation, by which a
participle or a verbal adjective (see § 60 b) is more
strictly limited or defined by a following genitive, as
a man beautiful of countenance.
This construction is best rendered by a relative clause,
the subject of which will be the word that more clearly
defines the governing idea, in other words the genitive
of the Arabic will be the nominative of the English,
a man whose countenance is beautiful. In such a case
135, 136. THE VERBAL SENTENCE.
115
the governing word is not determined by the following
genitive; should the latter require to be determined,
it may receive the article (contrary to the rule in
§
the man of the beautiful الرَّجُلُ الْحَسَنُ الْوَجْهِ as (123)
countenance, i. e. whose countenance is beautiful.
Chapter IV. The Simple Sentence. (§§ 135-151).
Sentences in Arabic are of two kinds, verbal and 135.
nominal.
ضَرَبْتَ
The chief characteristic of a verbal sentence is the
fact that it always contains a finite verb; in fact, a
verb of this kind with its inherent (subject) pronoun
is in itself a complete verbal sentence, as
wo thou
hast struck. This type of sentence always expresses
the commencement of some activity, understood in the
widest sense. If a special exponent of the idea con-
veyed by the subject of the verb is added, it follows
the verb in the case appropriate to the subject, viz.
So
(has زيد
the nominative, as he has struck, Zaid (has)
Zaid has struck, whereby Zaid is singled out as
the agent.
In the verbal sentence, the finite verb does not 136.
always agree in gender and number with the following
8*
116
136. CONCORD IN THE VERBAL SENTENCE.
subject. The following are the chief points to be
noted in this connection:
α. The verb stands in the masculine singular before
sound or outer plurals, and generally before the masc.
forms of the dual.
b.
C.
d.
The verb stands in the feminine singular 1) before
a sing. fem. if it follows the verb immediately, 2) be-
fore sound plurals feminine, 3) before the fem. forms
of the dual, and 4) before broken plurals (cf. next
sub-section).
The verb stands in the masculine or feminine singular
1) before a sing. fem. not immediately following the
verb, 2) before collectives, 3) before broken plurals
denoting male persons; if these plurals do not imme-
diately follow the verb, the latter in most cases takes
the masc. singular form.
Once the subject is introduced, thé verbs following
جَاءَ رَيْلٌ وَالِ agree with it in gender and number, as
وَخَالِدٌ
JU, there came Zaid, Halid and 'Abdallah
and they said. After collectives also the verb, in such
مَضَتِ الْغِلْمَانُ يَتَّبَعُونَهُ a case, often takes the plural, as
the young people set out to follow him. So too after
10-
words like and others. Still it is always possible
قوه
for the verb to remain in the singular, as
وقريش
د
137. INDEFINITE SUBJECT.
117
and the Kuraishites تَحْبِسُ مَنْ قَدَرَتْ عَلَى حَبْسِهِ
(the tribe Kuraish) imprisoned whomsoever they
could imprison.
A subject unknown, or purposely left unnamed, 137.
is treated as follows (cf. French on dit, German man
sagt):
1) The verb is put in the 3. pers. sing. of the a.
passive (see § 103), as they journey to him.
يُسَارُ إِلَيْهِ
It is to be noted that this impersonal passive can
never stand without a complement (here x).
2) Or in the 3. pers. plur. of the active, as
they said.
ه قَالُوا.
b.
3) Or in the 2. pers. sing. (or plur.) of the active, c.
0F I
يتم ارايت
I
I
e. g. in the Kur'an or dost thou think?
do ye think? where it is not any particular persons
that are addressed, but people in general, as much
as to say 'could any one suppose that....?'š 01
might say (cf. Eng. 'as you might say').
one
4) There may be added to the verb a subject d.
(participle) formed from the same root, as is J or
قَصْرْ لَمْ رَأَوُا الرَّاؤُنَ مِثْلَهُ :some one said قَالَ الْقَائِلُ
a castle, the like of which had never been seen.
NOTE. The case of an undefined complement of a verbal
action being expressed by a substantive derived from the verb is
118
138. INDEFINITE SUBJ. 139. NOMINAL SENTENCE.
138.
139.
not unfrequently met elsewhere than in the above construction,
لائم
لَا يَخَافُونَ
e. g. Új aliquem (interfectum) interfecit, Y UŠLET Í
they did not fear the reproof of any reprover.
Occasionally, out of something that has been
mentioned, a story or the like, there arises an in-
definite subject corresponding to our "it", which is
usually expressed by the feminine of the verb; for
example, after a fable or the like,
it (i. e. this story) passed into a proverb.
u, and
The nominal sentence, in contrast to the verbal
sentence, expresses a state or condition of the subject.
This last as a rule stands at the head of the sentence
in the case appropriate to the subject, viz. the nomina-
tive; in most cases it is determined while the predicate
is undetermined. The predicate may consist of one
or other of the following:
a) a simple noun, as
زَيْدٌ عَالِمٌ
b) a preposition and its case, as
man is in the house;
Zaid is wise;
the الرَّجُلُ فِي الدَارِ
Abdallah is here.
.Abdallah عَبْدُ اللَّهِ هُهُنَا
c) an adverb, as lige x
d) a complete sentence, which may be either a) a
verbal sentence, or B) a nominal sentence; the whole
now becomes a compound sentence. Exx.: a)
So
زَيْلٌ مَرِضَ
Zaid (he) is ill; 8, Zaid, his father is
زَيْدٌ مَرِضَ
140, 141. NOMINAL SENTENCE.
119
୪
E
زيد
ill; B) mold Zaid, his father is aged (i. e.
ju
Zaid's father &c.). The sentence constituting the
predicate must contain a pronoun referring back to
the subject. The subj. thus placed at the head of
the sentence has been wrongly named the nominative
absolute.
NOTE. The difficulty we feel in distinguishing between
GU-
~and~; Zaid has struck, may be explained in this way.
In the first of these two expressions it is the act of striking that
is uppermost in the speaker's mind, and the enquiry as to the
subject or agent from whom the act proceeds is answered with
BU-
Zaid, on which the logical emphasis now rests. In, on
the other hand, we start with Zaid as a given subject or agent,
and the question as to what is to be predicated regarding this
subject or as to what this agent has done is answered by,
on which in its turn the logical centre of gravity, so to say,
comes to rest.
Between subject and predicate, when both are 140.
determined, there ought to stand the pronoun of the
3. person, but this rule is not always observed, as
God is the living One.-Sometimes,
also, this pron. merely serves to emphasize the
subject.
بد و
In negative and interrogative sentences the predi- 141.
cate stands before the subject, as where is
101
ye have no helper (in which مَا لَكُمْ مِنْ وَلي ?Zaid
من
case the subject receives the addition of
120
142. NOMINAL SENTENCE.
(= French du, &c.) as strengthening the negation). In
the same way a predicate consisting of a preposition
and its noun, or of an adverb, stands before the subject
when the latter is undetermined and is not more
precisely defined by any qualifying word or phrase,
SE
as 8
090
مِنْهُم مَن in the house is a woman في الدار امراة
زعم
among them are some who maintain.
NOTE. A predicate of this sort may even stand before a
determined subject, but in that case the logical emphasis is on the
90-
50-
the زيد عِندي Zaid is with me, while in عندی زید subject, as
142.
logical stress is on the predicate: Zaid is with me.
Verbal adjectives (§ 60 b), in virtue of the verbal
idea inherent in them, sometimes stand as predicate
before the noun in the place of a finite verb, as
Zaid his father struck Amr ضَارِبٌ أَبُوهُ عَمر
Zaid's
father &c. The predicate, thus placed in advance,
frequently agrees in gender and number with its subject
الْمُولْفَةَ قُلُوبُهُم
following, as whose hearts have been
inclined (to Islam), but in respect of case it agrees
with the word on which this kind of sentence is
generally dependent, as
رِيقُهُ ,with a mouth بِفَمٍ عَبِ رِيق
رَأَيْنَا دَوَابٌ مُخْتَلِفَةً أَلْوَانُهَا ;whose saliva is sweet
I
we
found animals, the species of which differed from each
other, of different sorts. A circumstantial accusative
143,144, 145. NOMINAL SENTENCE.
121
(§ 1136) may also, in this way, refer to a following
subject, although it is really dependent on the preced-
ing verbs, as
father rode.
Zaid came, while his جَاءَ زَيْد رَاكِبًا أبوه
트
​When the subject of a nominal sentence consists 143.
of a demonstrative pronoun, the latter agrees in gen-
der with the following predicate, as
is a female slave.
this هذِهِ جَارِيَةٌ
.141 ليس not (often also that of مَا The predicate of
§§ 50 and 110, and of
§ 110 when occurring with a
this is مَا هذَا بِمَ negative) is introduced by
بِمَلِكِ as
a
رب
no king.
In the relation of subject and predicate (cf. § 119a) 145.
may stand in Arabic:
الْعَمُودُ تَلْقُونَ ذِرَاعًا A thing and its dimensions, as
,
الْبَيْعُ
مِثْلُ
the pillar is thirty cubits (high).
A thing and that which it resembles, as
selling is the likeness of (is like) usury; and so
with J (§ 95f), which likewise may stand in any of
the three cases.
a.
b.
C.
، مُلُولُ الْفُرْسِ أَرْبَعُ طَبَقَات A thing and its parts, as
the kings of the Persians fall into four divisions.
122
146. NOM. SENT. 147. NOM. SENT. WITH 'inna, anna.
d.
بَعْضُ الْأَصَابِع حَدِيدٌ A thing and its material
G
وَبَعْضُهَا حَرْف
another of clay.
one part of the toes was of iron and
146. In certain cases a pronoun has to be supplied as
subject of a nominal sentence, as
said of him "he is
it is
Muhammed", i. e. he is called
Muhammed, prop. =
هُوَ مُحَمَّد
M
147.
The particles
(727) behold, and that (cf.
a.
لَكِنَّ لَكِنَّ 96d), the compound particles $
w =
E
w
never-
theless, as if, because, and other combinations,
and also
perhaps, would that, are all follow-
ed by a nominal sentence the subject of which stands
إِنَّ زَيْدًا كَريمٌ
in the accusative, as behold (truly) Z.
is generous. The predicate of the nominal sentence
ان
Im
following or, if it should consist of an adverb
or a preposition with its case (see §§ 139, 141), may
stand before the subject, which must still be in the
accusative, as Új lió ☺ verily (only in the rarest
هُنَا
رجلا
إِنَّ فِي الْقَلْعَةِ سجنا ; cases translatable) here is a man
in the citadel is a prison.
NOTE. Sometimes a qualifying phrase consisting of a preposi-
tion and its case appears, in addition, before the subject, as
إِلَيْكَ حَاجَةً
I have a request (to make) of thee.
148. NOMINAL SENT. WITH 'inna AND 'anna.
123
The corroborative particle Í (§ 95 g) is frequently b.
prefixed to the predicate after a preceding,
as
truly our father is in error; or إِنَّ أَبَانَا لَفِي ضَلَالٍ
K
ذلِكَ لَعِبْرَة -truly there إن في
even to the subject, as
in is an example.
1/0
After the particles above mentioned, the pronoun c.
of the 3. pers. sing. masc., as the so-called pronoun
of the fact, is sometimes used as the subject of a
nominal sentence; the predicate, in this case, consists
of a complete sentence (cf. § 1397), as ý ž
I of a truth (= the fact is), the evil-doers do
إِنه لَا
يُفْلِحُ
المون
-it is rela قِيلَ أَنَّهُ كَانَ لِحَمَّدِ أَرْبَعُ جَوَارٍ not prosper
ted that M. had four female slaves.
While introduces a new and independent sen- 148.
tence, one introduced by always forms part of
Im
إن
عَلَى كُلِّ شَيْءٍ another sentence, as أَلَمْ تَعْلَمْ أَنَّ اللَّهَ عَلَى كُلِّ شَيْ
a.
S
knowest thou not that God is mighty over all;
here the sentence beginning with is really the ob-
there has never been لَمْ يُشَلِ فِي أَنَّهُ أَعْمَى ject. In
any doubt that he is blind, the sentence with is
ان
it has بَلَغَنِي أَنَّهُ تَو virtually in the genitive in
تزوج
reached my ears that he is married, it represents the
subject.
124
148. SENTENCES WITH 'an und mă.
C.
b.
E
Verbal sentences introduced by also form in
this way an integral part of the principal sentence; a
distinction must be made, however, between two va-
rieties of this construction. If the sentence beginning
with asserts that something is now going on, or
that it has now ceased, the verb in the subordinate
I
E
عَجِبْتُ مِنْ أَن clause remains in the indicative, as
عَلَى آن or simply)
يخرج
and فَفَعَلُوا ذَلِكَ إِلَى أَنْ مَاتُوا the field against me
9900
I am surprised that he takes
they did this until they died; if, on the other hand,
something is conceived as falling in the future and
therefore still uncertain, the subjunctive (cf. § 100)
I
it falls to thee to do لَكَ أَن تَفْعَلَ كَذَا is required as
it is fit and proper يَنبَغِى أَن تَحْذَرَ مِنَ الْفَوَاحِشِ 50
that thou shouldst guard against shameful actions.
NOTE. Sometimes the preposition which indicates the relation
W
Z
h
Z
of the two parts of the sentence is omitted before and, as
ان
ذلك
AL
E
ذلك
لان
this was for the reason that, and it was so,
because &c.
In the cases discussed in the above sub-section
with the finite
an infinitive may take the place of
verb. Quite as frequently as in such cases, we
find
with the finite verb (of course always in the
149. SEVERAL PREDICATES. 150. NEGATIVE SENTENCES. 125
I am surprised عَجِبْتُ مِمَّا ضَربت يدا indicative, as زَيْدًا
The من ضَرْبِكَ زَيْدا - that thou hast struck aid مِنْ
use of this so-called infinitive-mă is very common;
مَا as) - made up of 5 and) كَمَا thus we have it in
107
Zaid ضُرِبَ زَيَّدْ كَمَا ضُرِبَ عَمرو : with a verbal sentence
was beaten as 'Amr was beaten.
When more than one predicate is required in a 149
nominal sentence, they generally follow each other
without a conjunction (cf. §§ 122, 113 b, note b), as
.I am attentive and well-informed إِنِّي حَفِيظٌ عَلِيمٌ
The same is the case with the predicates of the verb
(which frequently occurs as the substantive verb)
and the verbs akin thereto (see § 110), as
إِنَّ الْمَمْلَكَة
تَصِيرُ آخِرَ الْوَقْتِ مُخْتَلِطَةً مُخْتَلِفَةً بَعْضُها قَوِيٌّ وَبَعْضُهَا
the kingdom will in the latter days become ضَعِيف
mixed and a prey to dissension, and one of which
one part will be strong and another weak.
In negative verbal sentences we find L
he did not drink, or ما شرب
perfect, as
apocopated impf. (jussive, cf. § 101 c).
With the impf. indicative L is used, as
with the 150.
with the
ه مَا يَشْرَبُ
a.
126
151. EXCEPTIVE PARTICLE.
he does not drink, or Ý with the same tense
he does not, or he will not drink.
لَا يَشْرَبُ
Other uses of are (a) with the apoc. impf. (cf.
§ 101 b) and (b) with the perfect (cf. § 98 d). As negativ-
ing an act in the past Ý can only stand before the per-
لَا صَدَّقَ وَلَا fect when two perfects come together, as
151.
he neither believed nor prayed, or after sentences
with other negatives.
NOTE. A preceding negative, even in the same sentence, is
Ú,
he لم يجد القَرْيَةَ وَلَا صَاحِبَهُ frequently resumed by means of as
لَمْ يَجِدِ
did not find the village nor yet his friend again.
After the exceptive particle Y that which is ex-
cepted stands in the accusative when a positive sentence
-the people came, ex جَاءَ النَّاسُ إِلَّا زَيْدًا precedes, as
cept Zaid; when a negative sentence precedes that
which is excepted is less frequently in the accusative,
but rather, as a rule, in the same case as the word
to which the limitation or exception applies, as lo
Z.;
;the people came not, except Zaid جَاءَ الْقَوْمُ إِلَّا زيد
I passed no one except Zi مَا مَرَرْتُ بِأَحَدٍ إِلَّا زَيْدِ
I have struck no one, except مَا ضَرَبَتْ أَحَدًا إِلا عَمْرًا
Amr. Very frequently in such cases it is the exception
that brings us the necessary logical complement, as
152. CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES.
127
I have not passed (anyone) except مَا مَرَرْتُ إِلَّا بِزَيْدٍ
Zaid, i. e. I have passed only Zaid.
دو
NOTE. Also in the sentence (§ 111) there is no
God but Allah, the last word is in the nominative, because it is
the logical subject (there is no God, if not Allah; but Allah is).
there is neither لَا حَولَ وَلَا قُوَّةَ إِلَّا بِاللهِ الْعَلِي الْعَظِيمِ In the sentence
power nor strength except (in union) with Allah, the high and
22-90-
mighty One, the ideas of power and strength (8J) must
logically be supplied before the exception.
i
Chapter V. Compound Sentence. (§§ 152–161).
Co-ordinate sentences are as a rule joined together 152.
by a copulative particle. Thus a simple co-ordinated
sentence is usually introduced by 5 (§ 95i), as Íóó
JZ. entered and said. (§ 95 e), on the other
وَقَالَ
دَخَلَ
hand, is used when the connection of the two sen-
tences is less close, when, for example, the second event
follows the first only after a certain interval, as
مَرِضَى
جَاءَ زيد
Zaid was ill; soon after he died., according-
ly,is often used when the subject is changed, as
Zaid came; and so I said to him.
S
with
a following nominal sentence expresses the motive of
the action and is to be rendered by 'then', 'therefore'.
128
153, 154. RELATIVE CLAUSES.
NOTE a. In lively narrative prose the connective particles
are often dispensed with, particularly when the story is told in
dialogue form, the words of each speaker being then mostly intro-
duced by a simple ju.
NOTE b. As illustration of the omission of the connectives
(asyndeton) must not be quoted certain combinations of two verbs
(cf. § 99 note a), in which the second verb denotes rather the
end to which some more general activity is directed; such, for
example, is the imperfect with verbs denoting a beginning. In
other cases, a perfect may be made to depend on a perfect, an
imperfect on an imperfect, an imperative on an imperative, as
اخطبها ;they arose and fought with each other قاموا تَقاتلوا
153.
154.
arise and woo her.
NOTE C. Among the connective particles may also, in
a certain sense, be reckoned, when it does not introduce a
result expected in the future (§ 100), but denotes the actual
completion of an action, as in the sentence
journeyed until he alighted at Mecca he journeyed and at last
alighted &c. In such cases may also be followed by an imperf.
indicative or by with a nominal sentence.
he
Relative sentences or clauses are of two kinds,
those which do not accompany a noun and those
which do accompany and qualify a noun. As regards
the asyndetical connection of several qualifications,
the latter class is subject to the same treatment as
the qualifying adjuncts discussed in §§ 120-122.
Those relative sentences that do not depend on
or qualify a noun are introduced either by (see
§ 14a) he that, that which, whoso, &c., which is
155. RELATIVE CLAUSES.
129
declinable and always determined, or by the indeclin-
able pronouns (he that, one that, whosoever, those
من
that, such...as) and Lo (that which, a thing that, what).
The former is sometimes determined, sometimes unde-
I
الَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا بِآيَاتِنَا هُمْ أَصْحَابُ الْمَسْأَمَةِ : termined. Exx
(الَّذِينَ)
those that reject our revelations, they will be the people
of the left hand is here in the nom. as being
Shall I fall down before one whom thou hast formed
(:the devil said) أَأَسْجُدُ لِمَنْ خَلَقْتَ طِينا ;(the subject
يقُولُونَ بِأَفْوَاهِهِمْ ? is here in the genit من of clay
they speak with their mouth what مَا لَيْسَ بِقُلُوبِهِمْ
is not in their hearts (L is here accus.).
A relative clause is made to follow and qualify 155.
a substantive by means of only when the sub-
stantive in question (the antecedent) is determined;
with it agrees in gender and number, as
ضَرَبتْ
I struck the man that came. The الرَّجُلَ الَّذِي جَاءَ
a الَّذِى
explanation of this is that is originally not
relative in our sense of that word, but a demonstra-
tive, and as such it is always determined. The above
sentence, for example, means, strictly speaking: I
struck that man there, he came. On the other hand
Socin, Arabic Grammar 2
9
130
156. RELATIVE CLAUSES.
the relative clause is appended without
جَاءَ
when
ضربت
the antecedent is undetermined, as, s
I struck a man who came (prop. I struck a man, he
came).
U
NOTE. is also dispensed with when the antecedent is
only determined in a general sense (i. e. when it has the generic
like an ass that كَمَثَلِ الْحِمَارِ يَحْمِلُ أَسْفَارًا article see f 1180), as
156.
carries books.
The relative clause, which we have seen to be
strictly speaking merely a verbal or a nominal sen-
tence subordinated to an antecedent noun, ought by
rule to contain a pronoun referring back to this an-
$3
the man whose الرَّجُلُ الَّذِي أَبُوهُ غَنِيٌّ tecedent,as
,he had a son كَانَ لَهُ ابْن سُمّى مُحمد ;father is rich
900
who was named M. (in this case the pronoun is im-
07
plied in the verb); & JE &
زيد
يُقَالُ لَهُ
رَجُل
a man who is
named Z. (prop. of whom it is said: [he is] Zaid, cf.
§ 146). The pronoun which in this way points back
to the antecedent may stand in any part of the rela-
قَدْ قَرَبَ إِلَيْهِ الْجَيْش tive sentence; thus in the sentence
the army had come up close to الَّذِي ظَنَّ أَنَّهُ بَعِيد
him, regarding which he thought that it was still at
a distance, it does not appear till we reach the sen-
tence which is subordinated by to the verb.
157. CIRCUMSTANTIAL CLAUSES.
131
Collectives which denote living creatures (cf. § 136 d)
may be followed here also by a plural verb, as
ول
.people that believe قوم یومنون
NOTE 2.
The omission of the pronoun, however, is not un-
frequent, especially when it would merely consist of a suffix of
قُلْتُ
.I regret what I said قُلْتَهُ for نَدِمتُ عَلَى مَا قلت the person, as
3.
NOTE b. In certain cases the antecedent may be repeated in
the relative clause; indeed, this is the favourite construction with
کل (the idol كَانَ عِندَ هُبَلَ قِدَاءً سَبْعَةٌ كُلَّ قدح مِنْهَا فِيهِ كِتَابٌ as كُل
Hubal had seven arrows (for casting the lot), of which each single
arrow had writing upon it.
A special kind of subordinate sentence is the 157.
circumstantial clause. Such a clause may consist:
1) Of a nominal sentence introduced by the particle a.
the subject of which may have been already men-
دو
مَانَتْ آمِنَةُ tioned or may be something quite new, as
Amina died while she was return-
و و
وهی
G
رَاجِعَةٌ إِلَى مَكَّةَ
Zaid died while مَاتَ زَيْد وَابْنَهُ صَغِير ing to Mecca
his son was still young; with a compound nominal
he journeyed taking سَار وَهُوَ يَقْصِدُ الْمَدِينَةَ sentence
jl
Medina as his goal. A sentence, whose predicate con-
sisting of a preposition and its case comes before
its subject, acc. to § 141, may stand as a circumstan-
as
10-
I
خَرَجْتُ (و) فِي يَدِى قَوْس 28
و
tial clause, without
went out with a bow in my hand.
9*
132
158. TEMPORAL CLAUSES. :
b. 2) Of a verbal sentence frequently; in this case the
imperf. either stands alone or is preceded by .
When the sentence is a negative one, the negative is
For ; or the verb may stand in the apoc. impf. with
لَمْ
:
or (as the negation of the perf.). We may
also have the perfect with
or, when negative
with Log; thus we get the following:
Z.
:
يَفْحَلُ
زيد
جَاءَ
قَالَ أَنَّى يَكُونُ لِي غُلَامٌ وَكَانَتِ :came laughing .2
(Zakariya) أَمْرَأَتِي عَاقِرًا وَقَدْ بَلَغْتُ مِنَ الْكِبَر عِتِيًّا
said: how shall I have a male child, seeing my wife
دَخَلَ ;is barren and I have reached too great an age
he entered the room without البَيْتَ لَا يُسَلِّمُ عَلَى
158.
a.
greeting me.
NOTE. In contrast to the stiffer accusative of condition
(§ 113 b) the verbal circumstantial clause expresses the commence-
ment of the action; there is very little difference, however,
ردو
جاءَ زيد ضاحكا and ا زيد يضحك between
In temporal clauses (also in conditional clauses)
which are formed with the particle of when, if, we find
in the protasis as well as in the apodosis the perfect
اذا
إِذَا رَاضَ يَحْيَى ,in the sense of our present or future
,when John takes the thing in hand الْأَمْرَ ذَلَّتْ صِعَابُهُ
,
its difficulties are easily surmounted.
159. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES.
133
Nore a. The imperfect may also stand after if the action
takes place repeatedly. Should I be followed by a compound
when hell is heated, it is إِذَا الجحيم سعر nominal sentence, as
considered that this is but another way of writing what we should
expect to find expressed in a verbal sentence (and so with ).
NOTE b. A sentence with 3 may also be inserted between
two closely related words, or rather it is to be regarded as form-
فَإِنَّهُمَا بَابَانِ إِذَا فتح : ing with its apodosis a complete unity. Thus
there were two gates, which when they were opened
could not be shut (again). In the apodosis to a perfect is found
where we should expect an imperfect (cf. § 99c), as 1,131
→
كَانُوا إِذَا
they were wont, when they captured a رجلًا وَاطْلُقُوا جَزُوا نَاصِيَتَهُ
man and then released him, to cut off his front lock of hair. Very
frequently a sentence like this, with 3, is inserted between
(§ 152 note c) and its proper verb, asi ja 15
JJU – UZ
نبعته حتى إِذَا دَخَلَ
I followed him until I overtook him as he entered the house.
Lin the sense of 'so long as' takes the perfect, as b.
.so long as I live I shall be thankful مَا دُمْتُ أَنَا شَاكِرٌ
من
In sentences containing the notion of a condition 159.
which is the case after if, if anybody, Lo if
anything, whatsoever, show, how-
soever, when &c. the perf. is used in the sense
of our present or future, and so too in the apodosis,
if thou does that, thou إن فَعَلْتَ ذلكَ هَلَكْتَ as
إِنْ
134
160, 161. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES.
من
wilt perish; JJ whoso seeketh, findeth (if
any one seeks, he finds).
NOTE. If the perf. is meant to retain its proper force in the
160.
a.
b.
C.
161.
إِنْ كَانَ قَمِيصُهُ قَد مِن is placed after as كان protasis, the verb
قُبْلِ فَصَدَقَتْ
if his camisole is torn in front, she has told the truth.
The particles above mentioned may also take the
تَصْبِرُوا
apoc. impf. in protasis and apodosis alike, as was !
So if ye wait patiently, God will help you.
يُمْدِدْكُمْ رَبُّكُمْ
The apoc. impf. also stands in the apodosis after
an imperative (with conditional force) in the protasis,
as
live contentedly (i. e. if thou عِشَ قَنِعًا تَكُنْ مَلِكًا
live &c.) thou wilt be a king.
An apoc. impf. in the protasis may be followed by a
perfect in the apodosis, as
if thou إِنْ تَصْبِرْ ظَفِرْتَ
wait patiently, thou wilt gain the victory. If the clauses
are both negative, we have with the apoc. impf.,
as
لَمْ أَرْضَ
يبرح
إِن لَم
not satisfied.
if he does not go away, I am
NOTE. Occasionally the apodosis of a conditional sentence
هذَا
is wanting, e. g. láb ¿ if this is so-supply: then it is well
(قبها .Arab)
Before the apodoses of conditional sentences,
other than those discussed in § 159-160 we find the
particle, which is employed:
161. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES.
135
1) When the apodosis is a nominal sentence, as a.
if he is refractory, then alas for إِنْ عَصَى فَوَيْلٌ لَهُ
him! Also before sentences with and before
interrogative sentences.
2) When the apodosis is a verbal sentence, of which b.
the perfect is intended to retain its force as a perfect
(cf. § 159 note), especially, too, when ů (cf. § 98 e)
is employed, as
إِنْ أَسْلَمُوا فَقَدِ اهْتَدَوْا وَإِنْ تَوَلَّوْا
if they become Moslems, then have فَإِنَّمَا عَلَيْكَ الْبَلَاغُ
they come to the right way, and if they turn aside,
then thou hast but to announce the message.
3) When the apodosis is a verbal sentence that con- c.
tains an impf. with one of the particles, I, I,
وس
إن كنت or that expresses a command or a wish as
if thou findst thyself among فِي قَوْمٍ فَاحْلُبْ فِي إِنَائِهِمْ
people, milk into their pail.
APPENDIX.
COMPUTATION OF TIME.
a. Names of the Days of the Week.
In the following list the various names may also
107
be used with the word for day, omitted.
يوم
الاحد 1.
يوم
يوم
الاثنين
2.
(1st day) Sunday.
(2nd day) Monday.
.3rd day) Tuesday) يوم الثلاثاء 3
يوم
الْأَرْبِعَاءِ .
يوم
الْخَمِيس 8.
•
(4th day) Wednesday.
(5th day) Thursday.
.day of assembly) Friday يوم الجمعة 6.
.Sabbath) Saturday) يوم السبت 7.
b. Names of the Months.
In the names of the months the word, month,
may be prefixed in the constr. state throughout;
indeed, as the following table shows, some of the
names are always so written.
COMPUTATION OF TIME.
137
1
1.
.al-Muharram المحرم ..
2.
.Safar صفر ..
3.
the first Rabi شَهْرُ رَبيع الاول .
,the second Rabi شهر ربيع الثاني .
4.
.the first Gumada جُمادَى الأولى ...
.the latter Gumada جُمادَى الْآخِرَةُ .
7.
رجب
Ragab.
.saban شَعْبَانُ 8.
Ramaḍān (the month of fasting).
9.
.sawwal شوال .
.Du-lkada ذُو الْقَعْدَةِ .
2.
.(Du-higga (month of the pilgrimage, hagg ذو الحجة 2
c. The Year.
The Moslems reckon by lunar years of 354 days;
their first year is usually considered as beginning
at the date of the Christian era given below. In
calculating from one era to the other, it may be
reckoned that 33 solar years are equal to 34 lunar years.
138
COMPUTATION OF TIME.
In the works of European scholars it is customary,
by means of comparative tables, to give the precise.
day of our era with which each Moslem year begins
(see the Bibliography). The following short table will
be useful in helping to a rapid approximation of the
date required.
The Moslem year
1 began
".
""
""
101
""
16. July
24. July
622 A. D.
719 " "
""
,,
201
""
30. July
816 »
"
""
""
301
""
7. Aug.
913 "
>>
401
2
"}
""
""
""
501
ક
2
2
""
*
";
2 2 2
1235
99
601
"}
701
""
801
"
3
""
""
""
901
""
>>
""
2
1001
19
15. Aug. 1010 » »
22. Aug. 1107 "
29. Aug. 1204 "
6. Sept. 1301 „
13. Sept. 1398
21. Sept. 1495 »
8. Oct. 1592 „
""
" "
""
99
3
""
"}
135
2
1101
"
15. Oct.
1689 " "
""
1201
24. Oct.
1786 »
"
""
"}
"9
"
1301
""
2. Nov. 1883 "
2
""
""
""
1313
""
24. June 1895 "
"
LITERATURE.
A history of Arabic literature as a whole, or even of particular
parts of it, does not exist, for the work of Hammer-Purgstall (Litteratur-
geschichte der Araber, von ihrem Beginn bis zu Ende des zwölften
Jahrhunderts der Hidschret. 7 Bande. Wien 1850-56. 4º.) must
be described as premature and as useless by reason of its numerous
mistakes. An acquaintance with Arabic literature must therefore be
got partly from works by Arabs on the history of their literature, partly
from European catalogues. In the course of the present century
numerous works, including not a few specimens of the earlier litera-
ture, have been printed in the East, especially in Cairo (government
press in Būlak), Beirut (where there is an excellent press managed
by the Jesuits) and Constantinople; also in Persia, India and the
island of Java. We must, in particular, mention the great quantity
of valuable Arabic manuscripts that still await publication both in
European and eastern libraries. A synopsis of such catalogues of
these MSS. as have hitherto appeared will be found below.
In the following selection, books of special importance are marked
with a star, those recommended to beginners with a dagger.
A. BIBLIOGRAPHY.
I. Printed Works.
a Written by Orientals.
*Kitab al-Fihrist (by Ibn abi Yakub an-nadim; wrote in the year 377
H, beg. 3. May 987) mit Anmerkungen herausgegeben von Gustav
Flügel. Nach dessen Tode besorgt von Johannes Rodiger und
August Müller. 2 voll. Leipzig 1871—2.
*Lexicon bibliographicum et encyclopaedicum a Mustapha ben Abdallah
Katib Jelibi dicto et nomine Haji Khalfa (Hağği Halifa† 1658)
celebrato compositum. Ad codicum Vindobonesium Parisiensium
et Berolinensis fidem primum edidit latine vertit et commentario
indicibusque instruxit Gustavus Flügel. Leipzig-London 1835—
1858. 7 voll. 40.
140
LITERATURE A.
B Written by Europeans.
Bibliotheca arabica. Auctam nunc atque integram edidit D. Christianus
Fridericus de Schnurrer. Halae ad Salam 1811.
+Bibliotheca orientalis. Manuel de Bibliographie orientale. I. conte-
nant les livres arabes, persans et turcs imprimés depuis l'invention
de l'imprimerie jusqu'à nos jours tant en Europe qu'en Orient etc.
par J. Th. Zenker. Leipzig 1846. Bibliotheca orientalis.
Manuel de Bibliographie orientale. II. contenant 1. supplément
du premier volume. 2. Littérature de l'Orient chrétien. 3. Litté-
rature de l'Inde etc. Par J. Th. Zenker. Leipzig 1861.
†(Euting) Katalog der kaiserlichen Universitäts- und Landesbibliothek
in Strassburg. Arabische Litteratur. Strassburg 1877. 4º.
Bibliographie des ouvrages arabes ou relatifs aux Arabes publiés dans
l'Europe chrétienne de 1810 à 1885 par Victor Chauvin. I. Pré-
face. Table de Schnurrer. Les Proverbes. Liége 1892
(is being continued).
Wissenschaftlicher Jahresbericht über die morgenländischen Studien,
von 1844 an in Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen
Gesellschaft Leipzig 1847 ff. The annual reports on works
published up to 1858 appeared in the Zeitschrift, those for the
years 1859-61, 62-67 (one part), autumn 1877-81 appeared
as independent publications.
Bibliotheca orientalis oder eine vollständige Liste der im Jahre 1876
in Deutschland, Frankreich, England und den Colonien erschie-
nenen Bücher, Broschüren, Zeitschriften, u. s. w. über die Sprachen,
Religionen, Antiquitäten, Literaturen, Geschichte und Geographie
des Ostens, zusammengestellt von Karl Friederici. Leipzig.
8 years (to 1883).
Bibliography for 1883-85 (not completed) in the Literatur-Blatt für
orientalische Philologie unter Mitwirkung von Dr. Johannes
Klatt herausgegeben von Prof. Dr. Ernst Kuhn. 1883-85.
*Orientalische Bibliographie . . . herausgegeben von A. Müller, now
E. Kuhn. Berlin 1888 ff.
Katalog der Bibliothek der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft.
I. Druckschriften und Ähnliches. Leipzig 1880 (a new and
largely augmented edition will appear in a year or two).
A. G. Ellis, Catalogue of the Arabic books in the British Museum
Vol I. A-L. London 1894.
For works from oriental presses an important guide is: E. J. Brill,
Catalogue périodique de livres orientaux I-IX, Leide 1883 ff.
(To parts I-VII Index de noms d'auteurs et de noms de livres,
ib. 1889).
LITERATURE À.
141
11. Manuscripts.
(Die Handschriftenverzeichnisse der königlichen Bibliothek in Ber-
lin. Vols. 7 ff.). Verzeichniss der arabischen Handschriften
von W. Ahlwardt. 40. 1. Band. Berlin 1887; 2. Bd. 1889;
3. Bd. 1891; 4. Bd. 1892; 5. Bd. 1893; 6. Bd. 1894. A 7th
and last vol. will appear soon.
(Halle) Katalog der Bibliothek der Deutschen Morgenländischen Ge-
sellschaft. II. Handschriften u. s. w. Leipzig 1881.
Verzeichnis der orientalischen Handschriften der Bibliothek des
Halle'schen Waisenhauses von Fr. Aug. Arnold und August
Müller. (Programm der Lateinischen Hauptschule). Halle
1876. 4º.
(University Library, Leipzig) Die Refaïya. Von Prof. Fleischer:
Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft. 8,
S. 573-584.
(Municipal Library in Leipzig) Catalogus librorum manuscriptorum,
qui in bibliotheca senatoria civitatis Lipsiensis asservantur, ed.
Naumann. Codices orientalium linguarum descripserunt H. 0.
Fleischer et Fr. Delitzsch. Grimmae 1838. 40.
Catalogus codicum manuscriptorum orientalium Bibliothecae regiae
Dresdensis. Scripsit et indicibus instruxit H. 0. Fleischer.
Lipsiae 1831. 4º.
Die arabischen Handschriften der herzoglichen Bibliothek zu Gotha.
Verzeichnet von Wilhelm Pertsch. 5 Bände. Gotha 1878-1892.
(Also w. the title: Die orientalischen Handschriften der h. B.
zu G. Dritter Theil).
Die arabischen Handschriften der K. Hof- und Staatsbibliothek in
München, beschrieben von Joseph Aumer. München 1866. (Cata-
logus codicum manuscriptorum Bibliothecae regiae Monacensis.
Tomi primi pars secunda.)
(Tübingen University Library) Catalog arabischer Handschriften in
Damaskus gesammelt von J. G. Wetzstein. Berlin 1863.
Catalogus librorum manuscriptorum orientalium in bibliotheca aca-
demica Bonnensi servatorum adornavit Joannes Gildemeister.
Bonnae 1864-1876. 40.
Katalog der hebräischen, arabischen, persischen und türkischen Hand-
schriften der kaiserlichen Universitäts- und Landesbibliothek zu
Strassburg. Bearbeitet von S. Landauer. Strassburg 1881. 4º.
Die arabischen, persischen und türkischen Handschriften der kaiser-
lich-königlichen Hofbibliothek zu Wien. Von Gustav Flügel.
3 Bände. Wien 1865-7. 40.
(Copenhagen) Codices orientales Bibliothecae regiae Havniensis enu-
merati et descripti a N. L. Westergaard etc. II. Codices hebr.
et arab. Hafniae 1851.
142
LITERATURE A.
Codices Orientales bibliothecae regiae universitatis Lundensis recensuit
Curolus Johannes Tornberg. Lundae 1850.
Codices Arabici, Persici et Turcici bibliothecae regiae universitatis
Upsaliensis. Disposuit et descripsit C. T. Tornberg. Upsaliae
1849. 40.
(Paris) Catalogue des manuscrits arabes de la Bibliothèque Nationale
par le Baron de Slane. Pr. Fascicule. Paris 1883. Sec. Fasc.
1889. Trois. Fasc. 1895. 40. (To be continued.)
Catalogue général des manuscrits des bibliothèques publiques de
France. Départements. Tome VI (p. 437-482). Marseille. Par
M. l'abbé Albanès. Paris 1892. Tome XVIII. Alger. Par
E. Fagnan. Paris 1893.
(Leide) Catalogus codicum orientalium Bibliothecae academiae Lugduno
Batavae I. II. auctore R. P. A. Dozy. III. IV. auct. P. de Jong
et M. J. de Goeje. V. auctore M. J. de Goeje. VI. auctore
M. Th. Houtsma. Lugduni Bavatorum 1851-77.
Editio se-
cunda. Vol. I auctoribus M. J. de Goeje et M. Th. Houtsma.
Lugduni Bat. 1888.
(London) Catalogus codicum manuscriptorum orientalium qui in Museo
Britannico asservantur. Pars secunda codices arabicos amplectens.
Londini 1846. fol.
(London) Supplement to the Catalogue of the Arabic manuscripts in the
British Museum (By Charles Rieu). London 1894, 4º.
London) A catalogue of the Arabic manuscripts in the library of the
India Office. By Otto Loth. London 1877. 40.
(Oxford) Bibliothecae Bodleianae codicum manuscriptorum orientalium,
videlicet hebraicorum, chaldaicorum, syriacorum, aethiopicorum,
arabicorum, persicorum, turcicorum, copticorumque catalogus a
Joanne Uri confectus. Pars Prima Oxonii 1787. Partis se-
cundae volumen primum arabicos complectens confecit Alexander
Nicoll. Oxonii 1821. fol.
(Cambridge) Catalogus Bibliothecae Burckhardtianae cum appendice
librorum aliorum orientalium in Bibliotheca Academica Canta-
brigensitis asservatorum confecit T. Preston. Cantabrigiae
1853. 49.
Catalogue of the Oriental Manuscripts in the Library of King's Col-
lege, Cambridge. By Edward Henry Palmer: Journal of the
Roy. As. Society of Gr. Britain and Ireland. New Series III.
105 ff.
A descriptive Catalogue of the Arabic, Persian and Turkish Manu-
scripts in the Library of Trinity College, Cambridge. By E. H.
Palmer. Cambridge and London 1870.
(Escurial) Bibliotheca arabico-hispana Escurialensi sive Librorum
omnium Mss. quos Arabice ab auctoribus magnam partem Arabo-
Hispanis compositos Bibliotheca Coenobii Escurialensis complectitur
LITERATURE A.
143
recensio et explanatio operâ et studio Michaelis Casiri etc. 2 tomi.
Matriti 1760. fol. - Les manuscrits arabes de l'Escurial décrits par
Hartwig Dérenbourg. Tome premier. Paris 1884.
Catálogo de los Manuscritos árabes existentes en la Biblioteca Na-
cional de Madrid (F. G. Roblès). Madrid 1889.
(Florence) Bibliothecae Mediceae Laurentianae et Palatinae Codicum
manuscriptorum orientalium catalogus, Steph. Evod. Assemanus
recensuit. Florentiae 1742. fol.
(Venice) Catalogo dei Codici manoscritti orientali della Biblioteca
Nániana, compilato dell' abbate Simone Assemani. 2 Part. Pa-
dova 1787-1792. 4º.
Remarques sur les manuscrits orientaux de la Collection Marsigli a
Bologne suivies de la liste complète des Manuscrits arabes de
la même collection par le Baron Victor Rosen. Roma 1885 (atti
della R. Academia dei Lincei. Serie 3ª. Vol. XII).
(Milan) Catalogo dei Codici arabi, persiani e turchi della Biblioteca
Ambrosiana (Hammer-Purgstall): Biblioteca Italiana t. XCIV,
pp. 22 and 322.
Cataloghi dei codici orientali di alcune biblioteche d'Italia. 5 fasc.
Firenze 1878-1892.
Catalogue des manuscripts et xylographes orientaux de la Bibliothèque
Impériale publique de St. Pétersbourg. St. Pétersbourg 1852.
(St. Petersburg) B. Dorn, Catalogue des ouvrages arabes, persans et turcs,
publiés à Constantinople, en Egypte et en Perse, qui se trouvent au
Musée asiatique de l'Académie. Chronologisches Verzeichniss der
seit dem Jahre 1801 bis 1866 in Kasan gedruckten arabischen,
türkischen, tatarischen und persischen Werke, als Katalog der in
dem asiatischen Museum befindlichen Schriften: Mélanges asia-
tiques tirés du Bulletin de l'Académie Impériale des sciences de
St. Pétersbourg. Tome V. Livr. 5. St. Pétersbourg 1867.
(St. Petersburg) Notices sommaires des manuscrits arabes du Musée
asiatique par le Baron Victor Rosen. St. Pétersbourg 1881.
(St. Petersburg) Les manuscrits arabes de l'Institut des langues orien-
tales décrits par le Baron Victor Rosen. St. Pétersbourg 1877.
(J. M. E. Gottwald) description of the Arabic Manuscripts in the
Library of the Imperial University of Kasan. Kasan (no date)
[1885]. In Russian.
7 vols.
(Cairo) Fihrist al-kutub al-'arabiya al-maḥfūza bil-kutubḥāna al-ḥedī-
wiye el-kā'ine biserãi derb al-gamamiz. (Under the management
of Spitta and Vollers.)
Cairo 1301–1308. Second
Edition. Vol. I 1310.
Catalog der mektebe 'umumiye in Damascus. Damascus 1299. 4º.
Studia Sinaitica No. III. Catalogue of the Arabic Mss. in the Convent
of S. Catharine on Mount Sinai compiled by Margaret Dunlop
Gibson. London 1894.
144
LITERATURE B, C.
(Batavia) Friedrich, Codicum arabicorum in Bibliotheca Societatis
Artium et Scientiarum quae Bataviae floret asservatorum Catalogus.
Absolvit indicibusque instruxit L. W. C. van den Berg. Bataviae
et Hagae 1873.
B. INTRODUCTION.
General.
Borhân-ed-dîni es-Sernûdji (as-Sarnūģī lived at the and of the 12th
century of our era) Enchiridion studiosi. Arabice edidit latine vertit
et lexico explanavit Carolus Caspari. Praefatus est H. O. Flei-
scher. Lipsiae 1838. 40.
Einleitung in das Studium der Arabischen Sprache bis Mohammed
und zum Theil später . . . von G. W. Freytag. Bonn 1861.
Orientalische Skizzen. Von Theodor Nöldeke. Berlin 1892. Trans-
lated, with the title 'Sketches form Eastern History' by J. S. Black.
London and Edinburgh 1892.
De auctorum graecorum versionibus et commentariis syriacis, arabicis,
armeniacis persicisque commentatio quam scripsit Joannes Georgius
Wenrich. Lipsiae 1842. 1845.
C. CHRESTOMATHIES.
*†R. Brünnow, Chrestomathy of Arabic Prose-Pieces. Berlin and Lon-
don 1895.
+Chrestomatia arabica quam e libris Mss. vel impressis rarioribus
collectam edidit Fr. A. Arnold. Pars I. Textum continens. Pars II.
Glossarium continens. Halis 1853.
+Chrestomathie Arabe, ou extraits de divers écrivains Arabes, tant en
prose qu'en vers à l'usage des élèves de l'école spéciale des langues
orientales vivantes; par A. J. Sylvestre de Sacy. II. éd. corr. et
augm. Paris 1826. 3 vol.; Tome IV Anthologie grammaticale
arabe. Paris 1829.
+Chrestomathie élémentaire de l'Arabe littéral avec un glossaire par
H. Dérenbourg et J. Spiro. 2 ed. Paris 1892.
Joh. Godofr. Lud. Kosegartenii Chrestomathia arabica ex codicibus
manuscriptis Paris. Goth. et Berol. collecta atque tum adscriptis
vocalibus, cum additis lexico et adnotationibus explanata. Lip-
siae 1828.
Georg. Guil. Freytag, Chrestomathia arabica, grammatica historica in
usum scholarum Arabicarum ex codd. ineditis conscripta. 8º maj.
Bonnae 1834.
LITERATURE D.
145
†Thier und Mensch vor dem König der Genien. Ein arabisches Mähr-
chen aus den Schriften der lauteren Bruder in Basra im Urtext
herausgegeben von Fr. Dieterici. 2. Ausgabe. Leipzig 1881.
Arabisch-deutsches Wörterbuch zum Koran und Thier und Mensch
von Fr. Dieterici. 2. Aufl. Leipzig 1894.
Brevis chrestomathia arabica. In usum scholarum ed. Joh. Bollig.
Roma 1881.
Chrestomatia arábigo-española por Fr. J. Lerchundi y Fr. J. Simonet.
Granada 1881.
Girgas and de Rosen. Arabic Chrestomathy (in Russian). St. Peters-
burg 1875, 1876. Dictionary to the Chrestomathy and to the
Koran by W. Girgas. Kasan 1881 (in Russian).
An Arabic reading-book compiled by W. Wright. Part first, The texts.
London 1870.
Magānī el-adab fi hadaik el-arab. 6. Ed. Beirut 1885 ff. Jesuit Press.
6 vols. Sarḥ mağānī el-adab (Notes &c.). 4 vols. ib. 1886—8.
D. GRAMMARS &c.
a Written by Orientals.
*al-Muzhir fī ‘ulūm el-luga, philological Encyclopaedia by Galāl
ad-dīn as-Suyūṭī († 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505, cf. for as-
Sujuți Goldziher in den Sitzungsber. d. kais. Akademie der
Wiss. zu Wien. Phil.-histor. Cl. LXIX. Bd. 1. S. 7 ff.) Bulak
1282.
*Le livre de Sībawaihĩ, traité de grammaire arabe par Sîboûya, dit
Sībawaihi († 180 H., beg. 16. March 796). Texte arabe publié
d'après les manuscrits du Caire, de l'Escurial, d'Oxford, de
Paris, de St. Pétersbourg et de Vienne par Hartwig Derenbourg.
Tome I, Paris 1881. Tome II, Paris 1889. Sibawaihi's Buch
über die Grammatik nach der Ausgabe von H. Derenbourg und
dem Commentar des Sîrâfî übersetzt und erklärt ... von G. Jahn.
1.-8. Lieferung. Berlin 1894. 1895.
*Al-Mufaṣṣal, opus de re grammatica arabicum auctore Abu 'l-Kāsim
Mahmud bin Omar Zamahsario (az-Zamaḥšari † 538 H., beg.
16. July 1143) ed. J. P. Broch. Editio altera. Christianiae 1879. -
Also: Ibn Jaiš († 643 H., beg. 29. May 1245) Commentar zu
Zamachšarī's Mufaṣṣal. Nach den Handschriften ..... herausgeg.
u. s. w. von Dr. G. Jahn. Erster Band. Leipzig, 1882. Zweiter
Band. Leipzig 1886.
*Alfijjah, Carmen didacticum grammaticum auctore Ibn Malik († 672 H.,
beg. 18. July 1273) et in Alfijjam commentarius quem conscripsit
Ibn Akil (Ibn 'Aķīl † 769 H., beg. 28. Aug. 1367) ed. Fr. Dieterici.
Lipsiae 1851. Ibn 'Akil's Commentar zur Alfijja des Ibn Malik
Socin, Arabic Grammar.2
40.
10
146
LITERATURE D.
aus dem Arabischen zum ersten male übersetzt von Fr. Dieterici.
Berlin 1852.
al-Agurrūmiyya, Arabic Grammar by Ibn Ağurrum aṣ-Sinhāgī († 723 H.,
beg. 10. January 1323). Often printed with and without Com-
mentaries. Cf. E. Trumpp, Einleitung in das Studium der
arabischen Grammatiken. Die Ajrummiyyah des Muhammad bin
Daud. München 1876. On this work see Fleischer in Zeitschrift
der D. Morgenl. Ges. 30 (1876), pp. 487-513; reprinted in
Kleinere Schriften II (Leipzig 1888), pp. 75-106. Text also
printed in Brünnow's Chrestomathy.
Kafiya fin-nahu, Syntax by Ibn al-Hagib († 646 H., beg. 26. April
1248). Frequently printed in the East.
Mugni al-labīb, Grammar composed by Ibn Hišām al-Anṣārī († 762 H.,
beg. 11. Nov. 1360). Another grammatical work by the same
author bears the title: Kaṭar an-nada wa-ball aṣ-ṣadā; a third
Šudur ad-dahab. All three works have been frequently printed
in the East.
al-Ḥarīrī's († 516 H., beg. 16. July 1143) Durrat al-gawwāṣ, heraus-
gegeben von Heinrich Thorbecke. Leipzig 1871. (On errors of
speech). With the commentary of al-Hafāği, Constantinople 1299.
Cf. Le livre des locutions vicieuses de Djawālīķī publié par
Hartwig Derenbourg (al-Ġawālīki † 465 H., beg. 17. Sept. 1072)
in Morgenländische Forschungen. Leipzig 1875.
Tarika mustaḥdata fi tashil al-hatt al-arabi. Calligraphic models
12 parts. Beirut 1891.
B Written by Europeans.
*Die grammatischen Schulen der Araber nach den Quellen bearbeitet
von G. Flügel. Erste Abthl. Leipzig 1862. Abhandlungen der
Deutschen Morgenl. Ges. II. Band. Nr. 4. (This work gives
a list of grammarians to about the year 1000 of our era).
Dr. C. P. Caspari's Arabische Grammatik.
Fünfte Auflage be-
arbeitet von August Müller. Halle 1887.- Grammaire arabe de
C. P. Caspari traduite de la quatrième édition allemande et en
partie remaniée par E. Uricoechea. Bruxelles 1880. A Grammar
of the Arabic Language translated from the German of Caspari
and edited, with numerous additions and corrections by W. Wright.
2. ed. 2 vol. London 1874-5. A 3rd edit. is announced.
Geo. Henric. Aug. Ewald. Grammatica critica linguae arabicae cum
brevi metrorum doctrina. Lipsiae 1831-1833. II vol.
*Grammaire arabe à l'usage des élèves de l'école spéciale des langues
orientales vivantes; avec figures. Par M. le Bon Silvestre de
Sacy. Seconde édition, corrigée et augmentée, à laquelle on a
joint un traité de la prosodie et de la métrique des Arabes. 2 tom.
Paris 1831.-Very important notes and corrections will be found in
LITERATURE E.
147
*Fleischer, „Beiträge zur arabischen Sprachkunde": Berichte über die
Verhandlungen der kgl. sächsischen Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften
zu Leipzig. Philologisch-historische Classe. 1863 (p. 93 ff.); 1864
(p. 265 ff.); 1866 (p. 283 ff.); 1870 (p. 227 ff.); 1874 (p. 71 ff.); 1876
(p. 44 ff.); 1878 (p. 64 ff.); 1880 (p. 89 ff.); 1881 (p. 117 ff.); 1883
(p. 72 ff.); 1884 (p. 272 ff.); conf. 1856 (p. 1 ff.); 1862 (p. 10 ff.)
Reprinted in Kleinere Schriften von Dr. H. L. Fleischer, vol. I,
1st. and 2nd. parts, Leipzig 1886; the two last articles in vol. II,
part 1. Leipzig 1888.
J. G. L. Kosegarten. Grammatica linguae arabicae pp. 1–688, without
title and date, incomplete. (Very rare).
Mortimer Sloper Howell. A Grammar of the Classical Arabic Language,
translated and compiled from the Works of the most Approved
Native or Naturalized Authorities. Published under the Authority
of the Government of the N.-W. Provinces. In an Introduction
and Four Parts. 3 vols. Allahabad 1880. 1883. 1886.
Grammaire arabe composée d'après les sources primitives par le
P. Donat Vernier, S. J. Tome I. Beyrouth 1891; Tome II. 1892.
Darstellung der arabischen Verskunst mit sechs Anhängen u. s. w. nach
handschriftlichen Quellen bearbeitet und mit Registern versehen
von G. W. Freytag. Bonn 1830.
Théorie nouvelle de la métrique arabe précédée de considérations
générales sur le rythme naturel du langage par M. Stanislas
Guyard. Paris 1875 (Extrait du Journal as. 7 sér., t. 7. 8).
Die Rhetorik der Araber nach den wichtigsten Quellen dargestellt und
mit angefuhrten Textauszügen nebst einem literaturgeschichtlichen
Anhang versehen von Dr. A. F. Mehren. Kopenhagen 1853.
E. DICTIONARIES.
a Written by Orientals.
*ṣaḥāḥ al-arabiyye (or as-Saḥah) by al-Gauharī (Abū Naṣr Ismail ibn
Ḥammad † 393 H., beg. 10. Nov. 1002). 2 vols. Bulak 1282. 4º.
Lisan al-'arab by al-Mukarram (Ibn Manzur al-Ifrīķī al-Mișrī al-Anṣārī
al-Ḥazrağı‍† 711 H., beg. 13. May 1311). 20 vols. 4º. Cairo 1308.
*al-Ķāmūs al-muhit (or al-Kamus) by al-Fīrīzābādī († 816 or
817 H. 1413/4). 2 vols. Calcutta 1817; 4 vols. Bulak 1279.
4º. id. 1301/2. With Turkish Commentary 3 vols. Stambul
1272 and later. *Commentary to the Kāmūs with the title
Tag-el-arūs composed by Sayyid Murtadā az-Zubaidī († 1205 H.,
beg. 10 Sept. 1790). 10 vols. Cairo 1307.
Muhit al-muhit by Butrus al-Bistānī. 2 vols. Beirut 1286. (1869/70).
an-Nihaya fi garib al-ḥadīt by Ibn al-'Aṭīr († 606 H., beg. 6. July
1209). 4 vols. Cairo 1311 (Dictionary to the Traditions).
10*
148
LITERATURE E.
ני
Asas al-balaga (Loxicographical Work, dealing esp. with tho mota-
phorical meanings of words) by az-Zamališani († 538 H., beg.
16. July 1143). 2 vols. Bulak 1299.
Fikh al-luga, Synonyms by at-Taalibr († 129 H., bog. 14. Oct.
1037). (Proquently reprinted; osp. in an expurgated edition
Beirut 1888). Cf. Fleischer, Kleinero Schrifton IH, 152.
Talabs († 291 II. = 904) kitāb al-Fasih. Nach den Handschriften
von Loidon, Berlin und Romi horausgegeben, mit kritischon und
erläuternden Noton versohon von Dr. J. Barth. Leipzig 1876.
*Čawaliki's al-Mu'arrah (a work on Arabic loan-words, by al-awalīķı
† 465 II., bog. 17. Sept. 1072). Nach der Leydonor Handschrift
mit Erläuterungon horausgogchon von Ed. Sachan. Leipzig
1867. Cf. Z. d. D. Morg. Gos. 33, 208.
(On
Libor 'as-Sojutii († 911 II., bog. 4. Juno 1505) de nominibus rolativis,
inscriptus Lubb al-lubab, arab. cum annot. crit. od. P. J. Veth.
1--3. Lugduni Bat. 1840 51. 40.
*Al-Moschtabil auctoro Schamso'ddín Abu Abdallah Mohammed n
Ahmed ad-Dhababi (ad-Dababi † 748 II., beg. 13. April 1347).
1 codd. mss. oditus a P. de Jong. Lugduni Batav. 1881.
homonym proper namos).
Kitabo-'l-adhdad sivo liber do vocabulis arabicis quao plures habent
significationes intor so oppositas auctore Abu Bokr ibno-'l-Anbārı
(† 328 II., bog. 18. Oct. 939) ed. M. Th. Houtsma. Lugduni
Bat. 1881.
B Written by Europeans.
G. W. Freytag, Loxicon Arabico-Latinum praesertim ex Djouhari
Firuzabadtiquo et aliorum libris confoctum. Accedit index vocum
Latinorum locuplotissimus. IV. Tomi. Hal. 1830-1837. 40 maj.
G. W. Freytag, Lexicon Arabico-Latinum ox oporo suo majoro in
usum tironum excerptum odidit. Halis 1836.
40 maj.
*Maddu-l-Kamoos, an Arabic-English Lexicon derived from the best,
and the most copious eastorn sources comprising a very large
collection of words and significations omittod in the Kamoos,
with supplements to its abridgod and defective oxplanations,
amplo grammatical and critical comments, and oxamplos iu prose
and vorse: composed by moans of the munificonco of the most
noblo Algernon, Duke of Northumberland and the bounty
of the British Governmont: by Edward William Lane. In two
books: the first containing all the classical words and significa-
tions commonly known to the learned among the Arabs; the
socond, those that are of rare occurronco and not commonly
known. Book 1, Parts 1- 5. London 1863-1874. Ed. by
Stanley Lano Poole, Parts 6-8 (and Supplement) 1877-1893.
LITERATURE E.
149
(From the letter onwards, the book is incomplete; its continua-
tion is not to be expected.)
*Supplément aux dictionnaires arabes par R. Dozy. 2 tom. Leyde
1881. Cf. Fleischer, Studien über Dozy's Supplément: Be-
richte über die Verhandlungen der kgl. sächs. Gos. d. Wiss. zu
Leipzig. Philol.-histor. Classe 1881-1887. Reprinted in Kleinero
Schrifton von II. L. Fleischer. Vol. II, pt. 1. Leipzig 1888.
Vol. III id.
A. Kazimirski do Biberstein, Dictionnairo arabe-français I. II. Paris
1860.
†A. Wahrmund. Handwörterbuch der deutschen und nou-arabischen
Spracho. I. Neuarabisch-deutscher Theil I, 1. 2. II, 1. 2.
II. Deutsch-neuarabischer Theil. Giessen 1870-77.
F. Steingass, The Student's Arabic-English Dictionary. London 1884.
H. Anthony Salmoné, An Arabic-English Dictionary on a new System.
2 vols. Vol, I Arabic-English; vol. II English Index. London 1890.
Arabic-English Dictionary by the lato William Thomson Wortabet.
Second edition, revised and enlarged, Beyrout 1893.
George Percy Badger, English-Arabic Lexicon. London 1881.
F. Steingass, English-Arabic Dictionary for the use of both Travellers
and Students. London 1882.
English-Arabic Dictionary by Mr. J. Abcarius. New edition revised
and enlarged: Boyrout 1894.
Vocabulaire arabo-français à l'usago des étudiants par un pèro mis-
sionnairo do la Cie do Jésus; 3. 6d. Beyrouth 1893. (Arab.: al-
Faräid ad-durrïye.)
Dictionnairo français-arabo par le P. J.-B. Belot, 8. J. 2 parties.
Beyrouth 1890.
*Dio aramäischen Fromdwörter im Arabischen. Von Siegmund Fränkel.
Leiden 1886.
Dictionnaire détaillé des noms des vêtements choz los Arabes. Par
R. Dozy. Amsterdam 1845.
Die Namen der Säugothicro bei den südsemitischen Völkern. Von
Fritz Hommel. Loipzig 1879.
Die Waffon der alten Araber aus ihron Dichtern dargestellt. Ein
Beitrag zur arabischen Alterthumskunde, Synonymik und Lexi-
cographie nobst Rogistorn von Friedrich Wilhelm Schwarzlose.
Leipzig 1886.
*Glossaire des mots espagnols et portugais dérivés de l'Arabo par
R. Dozy et W. II. Engelmann. 2. ed. Leyde 1869.
Glossario etimologico de las palabras españolas de orígon oriental por
D. Leopoldo de Eguilaz y Yanguas. Granada 1886.
Dictionnaire étymologique des mots français d'origino orientale par
Marcel Devic. Paris 1876. Cf. Romarques sur les mots
français dérivés de l'Arabo par Henri Lammens. Beyrouth 1890.
150
LITERATURE F.
F. KORAN, ISLAM, LIFE OF MUHAMMED.
CHRISTIANITY.
a. Written by Orientals.
Al-Coranus seu Lex islamitica Muhammedis filii Abdallae Pseudo-
prophetae edita ex museo Abrahami Hinckelmanni. Hamburgi
1694.
Alcorani textus universus summa fide atque pulcherrimis characteribus
descriptus, in latinum translatus, oppositis notis, auctore Ludovico
Marracio. Patavii 1698 fol.
+Corani textus arabicus ad fidem librorum manuscriptorum et impres-
sorum et ad praecipuorum interpretum lectiones et auctoritatem
recensuit indicesque triginta sectionum et suratarum addidit
Gustavus Flügel. Editio stereotypa C. Tauchnitzii. Tertium
emendata; nova impressio Lipsiae 1869 (I. 1834; recensionis
Flügelianae textum recognitum iterum exprimi curavit Gustavus
Mauritius Redslob, Lipsiae 1837). (In Flügel's first edition and
in numerous oriental editions of the Koran, the enumeration of
the verses, which is indispensable for reference, is wanting).
*Concordantiae Corani arabicae. Ad literarum ordinem et verborum
radices diligenter disposuit Gustavus Flügel. Editio stereotypa,
Lipsiae 1842.
Chrestomathia Corani arabica, notas adjecit glossarium confecit C. A.
Nallino. Lipsiae 1893.
al-Itķān fī 'ulūm al-ķur'ān, a sort of introduction to the Koran by
as-Suyūṭī († 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505); 2 pts. Cairo 1278.
Sayúty's Itqán on the exegetic sciences of the Qorán. Edited by
Mowlawies Basheerooddeen and Noorool-Haqq with an analysis by
A. Sprenger. Calcutta 1852-54.
al-Kaššāƒ. Commentary on the Koran by az-Zamaḥšarī († 538 H.,
beg. 16. July 1143). 2 vols. Bulak 1281. The Qoran with
the commentary of Zamakhshari entitled the Kashshaf, an haqaiq
al-tanzil, ed. by W. Nassau Lees and Khadim Hosain and 'Abd
al-Hayi. Calcutta 1856.
*Beidhawii († 685 H., beg. 27. Febr. 1286; or 692) commentarius in
Coranum ex codd. Parisiensibus Dresdensibus et Lipsiensibus edidit
indicibusque instruxit H. O. Fleischer. 2 vol. Lipsiae 1846-48.
40. Indices ad Beidhawii commentarium in Coranum confecit
Winand Fell. Leipzig 1878.
•
Chrestomathia Baidawiana. The commentary of El-Baidāwī on Sura
III trans. and expld. by D. S. Margoliouth. London 1895.
*Le Recueil des traditions musulmanes par Abou Abdallah ibn Ismail
al-Bokhari (al-Buḥārī † 257 H., beg. 29. Nov. 870) publié par
LITERATURE F.
151
L. Krehl. I-III. Leyde 1862-68 (incomplete). Oriental
edition: Sahih al-Buḥārī. 8 vols. Cairo 1290; also frequently
elsewhere, with and without commentary.
Sahih Muslim. Collection of the Traditions of the Prophet, composed
by Muslim († 261 H., beg. 16. Oct. 874). With commentary by
an-Nawawi († 676 H., beg. 4. Juni 1277). 5 vols. Cairo 1283.
Maṣābiḥ as-sunna, composed by Husain ibn Mas'ud al-Farra al-Ba-
ġawi († 516 H., beg. 12. March 1122). 2 vols. Cairo 1294.
Ihya al-'ulum, by al-Ġazālī († 505 H., beg. 10. Juli 1111). 4 vols.
40. Bulak 1289. (Cf. Richard Gosche, Über Ghazzâlîs Leben
und Werke: Abhdl. d. kgl. Akad. d. Wiss. zu Berlin 1858).
'Abdu-r-razzāg's Dictionary of the technical terms of the Sufies edited
by Aloys Sprenger. Calcutta 1845.
*Das Leben Muhammeds nach Muhammed ibn Ishak († 151 H., beg.
26. Jan. 768) bearbeitet von 'Abd el-Malik ibn Hischām († 218 H.,
beg. 27. Jan. 833); hrsg. von F. Wüstenfeld. 2 Bände. Göttingen
1858-60. Oriental edition; Sīrat ibn Hišām. 2 vols. Cairo 1295.
(Translated into German: Das Leben Muhammeds u. s. w. be-
arbeitet von G. Weil. Stuttgart 1864).
Muhammed in Medina. Das ist Vakidi's (al-Wakidi † 207 H., beg.
27. May 822) Kitab al-Maghazi in verkürzter deutscher Wieder-
gabe herausgegeben von J. Wellhausen. Berlin 1882.
Šama'il at-Tirmidē († 279 H., beg. 3. April 892) Traditions respecting
the Prophet. Cairo 1273; with commentary 2 vols. Bulak 1296.
Usd al-gāba. List of 7500 persons who knew Muhammed, drawn
up by Ibn al-'Aṭīr († 630 H., beg. 18. Oct. 1232). 5 vols. Cairo 1286.
al-Iṣābe, A biographical dictionary of persons who knew Muhammed
by Ibn Hagar (Ibn Ḥağar † 852 H., beg. 7. March 1448). Edited
in Arabic by Mowlawies Mohammed Wajyh, 'Abdal-Haqq, and
Gholám Qádir and A. Sprenger. Bibliotheca Indica. Vol. I, Cal-
cutta 1856; vol. IV, Calcutta 1873. Vol. II, fasc. 1—13; vol. III,
fasc. 1-15.
Kişaş al-'anbiya (Legends of the Prophet), by at-Talabi († 427 H.,
beg. 5. Nov. 1035). Cairo 1297 and often.
Pillar of the creed of the Sunnites by al-Nasafi, ed. by W. Cureton.
London 1843.
Ad-dourra al-fakhira: la perle précieuse de Ghazálî (al-Ġazālī † 505 H.,
beg. 10. July 1111) par L. Gautier. Genève 1878. Muslim
Eschatology.
Muhammedanische Eschatologie nach der Leipziger u. Dresdner Hand-
schrift zum ersten Male arabisch und deutsch herausgegeben von
M. Wolff. Leipzig 1872.
Disputatio pro religione Mohammedanorum adversus Christianos
Textum arabicum (composed 942 H. 1535) e codice Leidensi
cum varr. lect. edidit F. J. van den Ham. Lugduni Bat. 1890.
=
152
LITERATURE F.
Book of religious and philosophical sects by Muhammed al-Shahra-
stúni (aš-Šahrastāni † 528 H., beg. 29. March 1153). Now first
edited by W. Cureton. 2 vol. London 1846. Abu-'l-Fath
Muhammad asch-Schahrastâni's Religionsparteien und Philo-
sophenschulen. Aus dem Arabischen übersetzt mit Anmerkungen
von Th. Haarbrücker. 2 Bände. Halle 1850—1.
*(Bible) Kitāb al-mukaddas (Old Testament). London. R. Watts.
1822. (New Testament 1. vol. 1821.) — † Beirut, various editions.
+ New York 1867.
Arabic Bible-Chrestomathy with a Glossary edited by Geo. Jacob.
Berlin 1888.
3 Written by Europeans.
Der Koran nach Boysen von Neuem aus dem Arabischen übersetzt
mit einer historischen Einleitung und Anmerkungen von G. Wahl.
Halle 1828.
Der Koran. Aus dem Arabischen wortgetreu neu übersetzt mit An-
merkungen von L. Ullmann. 6. Aufl. 1862.
Le Koran, Traduction nouvelle, faite sur le texte arabe par Mr.
Kazimirski. Nouv. éd. Paris 1854.
The Koran commonly called the Alcoran of Mohammed: translated
into English from the Original Arabic. With explanatory notes
taken from the most approved commentators. To which is pre-
fixed a preliminary discourse. By George Sale. London 1774.
Last ed. by E. M. Wherry "with additional notes and emenda-
tions". 4 vols. London 1882-87.
J. M. Rodwell, The Koran, translated from the Arabic. 2. ed. Lond. 1876.
The Qur'ân translated by E. H. Palmer. 2 parts. Oxford 1880. (The
sacred books of the East translated by various oriental scholars
and edited by F. Max Müller, vol. VI. IX).
Der Koran. Im Auszuge übersetzt von Friedrich Rückert, heraus-
gegeben von A. Müller. Frankfurt a. M. 1888.
Die fünfzig ältesten Suren des Korans in gereimter deutscher Über-
setzung von M. Klamroth. Hamburg 1800.
+*Geschichte des Qorâns von Theodor Nöldeke. Göttingen 1860.
Über die Religion der vorislamischen Araber. Eine zur Habilitation
etc. öffentlich zu vertheidigende Abhandlung von Ludolf Krehl.
Leipzig 1863.
*Skizzen und Vorarbeiten. Von J. Wellhausen. Drittes Heft. Reste
arabischen Heidentumes. Berlin 1887.
Kinship and marriage in early Arabia. By W. Robertson Smith.
Cambridge 1885.
*Das Leben und die Lehre des Mohammad nach bisher grössten-
theils unbenutzten Quellen bearbeitet von A. Sprenger. Zweite
Ausgabe. 3 Bände. Berlin 1869.
LITERATURE G.
153
†Das Leben Muhammed's. Nach den Quellen populär dargestellt von
Theodor Nöldeke. Hannover 1863.
*W. Muir, The Life of Mahomet and History of Islam. 4 vol. London
1858-61. 3rd edition 1 vol. 1894.
†Das Leben und die Lehre des Muhammed. Dargestellt von Ludolf
Krehl. 1. Theil. Das Leben des Muhammed. Leipzig 1884.
Skizzen und Vorarbeiten von J. Wellhausen. Viertes Heft. 1. Medina
vor dem Islam. 2. Muhammad's Gemeindeordnung von Medina.
3. Seine Schreiben, und die Gesandtschaften an ihn. Berlin 1889.
+Was hat Mohammed aus dem Judenthum aufgenommen? von Abra-
ham Geiger. Bonn 1833.
*R. Dozy, Het Islamisme. Leiden 1863. 2 ed. Haarlem 1880; Essai
sur l'histoire de l'Islamisme par R. Dozy trad. par V. Chauvin.
Leyde-Paris 1879.
*Snouck Hurgronje, Het mekkaansche Fest. Leiden 1880.
Die Mu taziliten oder die Freidenker im Islâm. Ein Beitrag zur all-
gemeinen Kulturgeschichte von Heinrich Steiner. Leipzig 1865.
De strijd over het Dogma in den Islâm tot op el-Ash'ari door Dr.
M. Th. Houtsma. Leiden 1875.
=
935) von
Zur Geschichte Abu 'l-Hasan al-Aš arî's († about 324 H.
Wilhelm Spitta. Leipzig 1876.
Exposé de la réforme de l'Islamisme commencée au IIIème siècle de
l'Hégire par Abou-1-Hasan Ali el-Ash'ari et continuée par son
école. Avec des extraits du Texte arabe d'Ibn Asâkir par
M. A. F. Mehren. Vol. II des Travaux de la 3e session du
Congrès international des Orientalistes.
I. Goldziher, Die Schule der Zahiriten, ihr Ursprung, ihr System
und ihre Geschichte. Leipzig 1884.
*Mohammedanische Studien von I. Goldziher. Erster Teil. Halle
1889. Zweiter Teil. Halle 1890.
Polemische und apologetische Literatur in arabischer Sprache zwischen
Muslimen, Christen und Juden, nebst Anhängen verwandten
Inhalts. Von Moritz Steinschneider. Abhandlungen für die Kunde
des Morgenlandes VI, 3. Leipzig 1877.
G. JURISPRUDENCE.
al-Muwaṭṭa' fil-ḥadīt. Corpus juris composed by Malik ibn Anas
al-Himyari al-Madani († 179 H., beg. 27. March 795). Frequently
printed; also with commentaries, e. g. that of az-Zarkāni († 1122
H., beg. 19. Febr. 1710). 4 vols. Bulak 1280.
Sunan Abi 'Abdallah al-Kazwini, known as Ibn Mağa († 273 H., beg.
8. June 886). Delhi 1282 and 1889. (Legal traditions).
Sunan Abi Da'ud Sulaiman as-Siğistānī († 275 H., beg. 16. May
888); freq. printed, e. g. Bulak 1280. 2 vols. (Legal traditions).
154
LITERATURE H.
al-Ġāmi by Abū Īsā Muḥammad at-Tirmidi († 279 H., beg. 3. April
892). Frequently printed. (Legal traditions).
Sunan Abi 'Abd ar-rahman an-Nasa' († 303 H., beg. 17. July 915);
lithogr. in Kanfür 1847. (Legal traditions).
Flügel, Die Classen der hanefitischen Rechtsgelehrten: Abhandlungen
der k. Sächs. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften VIII. Leipzig
1860.
Jus Schafiiticum.
At-Tanbih auctore Abu Ishak as-Shīrāzī (Abū
Ishāk aš-Šīrāzī wrote the work in the year 452/3 H. = 1060/1)
edidit A. W. T. Juynboll. Lugduni Bat. 1879.
Précis de Jurisprudence Musulmane selon le rite Châfeite, par Abu
Chodjâ (Abū Suğā' † in the 6th cent. of the Flight). Publication
du texte arabe, avec traduction et annotations, par S. Keijzer.
Leyde 1859.
Minhadj at-Talibin, le guide des zélés croyants. Manuel de juris-
prudence musulmane selon le rite de Châfi'i (aš-Šāfi'i). Texte
arabe, publié par ordre du gouvernement avec traduction et
annotations par L. W. C. van den Berg. 3 vol. Batavia 1882-1884.
(Cf. Snouck Hurgronje in the Indian Gids, 1884 ff. Elaborate
criticism.)
Précis de jurisprudence musulmane suivant le rite malékite par
Sidi Khalil (Halil lived in the 8th cent. of the Flight) publié par
les soins de la Société asiatique. Quatrième édition. Paris 1877.
Maverdii (al-Māwardī † 450 H., beg. 28. Febr. 1058) constitutiones
politicae. Ex recensione Maximiliani Engeri. Bonnae 1853.
H. PHILOSOPHY.
a Written by Orientals.
Documenta philosophiae Arabum, edidit latine vertit illustravit Aug.
Schmölders. Bonnae 1836. Cf. id. Essai sur les écoles philo-
sophiques chez les Arabes et notamment sur la doctrine d'Algaz-
zali. Paris. 1842.
Tahāfut al-falāsifa (the mutual refutation of the philosophers) by
al-Gazāli († 505 H., beg. 10. July 1111), Ibn Rušd († 595 H.,
beg. 3. Nov. 1198), Hōğa Zade († 893 H., beg. 17. Dec. 1487).
Cairo 1303.
Die sogenannte Theologie des Aristoteles aus arabischen Handschriften
zum ersten Male herausgegeben. Von Fr. Dieterici. Leipzig
1882 (Abhandlungen des Berl. Or.-Congresses). Cf. Die so-
genannte Theologie des Aristoteles aus dem Arabischen übersetzt
und mit Anmerkungen versehen von Fr. Dieterici. Leipzig 1883.
Il commento medio di Averroë alla Poetica di Aristotele pubbl. da
Fausto Lasinio. Parte I. Il testo arabo: Annali della Università
LITERATURE H.
155
Toscanè. Tomo XII. Pisa 1872. 40. Il testo arabo del com-
mento medio di Averroe alla retorica di Aristotele, pubbl. da
Fausto Lasinio. Firenze 1875. (Pubblicazioni del R. Istituto
di studi superiori).
Alfārābī's († 950 A. D.) philosophische Abhandlungen aus Londoner,
Leidener und Berliner Handschriften. Herausgegeben von Fried-
rich Dieterici. Leiden 1890. Id. aus dem Arabischen über-
setzt. Leiden 1892. Alfarabi's Abhandlung der Musterstaat
aus Londoner und Oxforder Handschriften herausgegeben von
F. Dieteerici. Leiden 1895.
Philosophie und Theologie von Averroes (Ibn Rušd † 595 H., beg.
3. Nov. 1198). Herausgegeben von M. J. Müller. München
1859. Aus dem Arabischen übersetzt. München 1875.
Le Guide des Égarés. Traité de Théologie et de Philosophie par
Moïse ben Maimoun dit Maimonide († 605 H., beg. 16. July
1208). Publié pour la première fois dans l'original arabe et ac-
compagné d'une traduction française par Munk. I-III. Paris
1856-66.
Kitāb Ihwan as-ṣafa wa-hullān al-wafā (between 950-1000 of our
era). 4 vols. Bombay 1305—1306. A part of the rasail
ihwan aş-şafa has also been printed in Cairo, 1306. Die
Abhandlungen der Ichwan Es-Safâ in Auswahl herausg. von
F. Dieterici. 3 Hefte. Leipzig 1883-6.
Statio quinta et sexta et appendix libri Mevakif auctore 'Adhad-eddîn
el-Iģî († 756 H., beg. 16. Jan. 1355) cum commentario Gorgānii
ex codd. etc. edidit Th. Sörensen. Lipsiae 1848 (Scholastic
Metaphysics).
Definitiones viri meritissimi Sejjid Scherif Ali ben Mohammed Dschor-
dschani (al-Ġorğānī † 816 H., beg. 3. Apr. 1418). Accedunt de-
finitiones theosophi Mohji-ed-din Mohammed ben Ali vulgo Ibn
Arabi († 638 H., beg. 23 July 1240) dicti. Ed. et adnot. critica
instruxit Gustavus Flügel. Lipsiae 1845.
B Written by Europeans.
Die griechischen Philosophen in der arabischen Überlieferung. Von
August Müller. (Festschrift der Franckischen Stiftungen zu dem
50jährigen Doctorjubiläum Bernhardy's). Halle 1873.
Al-Kindî († ca. 850 A. D.) genannt,,der Philosoph der Araber". Ein
Vorbild seiner Zeit und seines Volkes. Von G. Flügel. Leipzig
1857. (Abhandlungen der D. Morg. Ges. 1. Band. Nr. 2). Cf.
Otto Loth, Al-Kindi als Astrolog, Morgenländische Forschungen.
Leipzig 1875, pp. 261 ff. and Sir Wm. Muir, The Apology of
Al-Kindy 2 Ed. London 1887.
Al-Farabi, des arabischen Philosophen, Leben und Schriften. Von
156
LITERATURE I.
Moritz Steinschneider: Mémoires de l'Académie Imp. des Sciences
de St. Pétersbourg. VII. série, tome XIII, 4, 1869. 40.
Ernest Renan, Averroès et l'Averroisme. 3. éd. Paris 1861.
Die Philosophie der Araber im X. Jahrhundert n. Chr. aus den
Schriften der lauteren Brüder herausgegeben von Fr. Dieterici.
Die Naturwissenschaft und Naturanschauung der Araber. Berlin
1861. Die Propädeutik. Berlin 1865. Die Logik und Psy-
chologie. Leipzig 1868. Die Anthropologie. Leipzig 1871.
Die Lehre von der Weltseele. Leipzig 1872. Die Natur-
anschauung und Naturphilosophie. 2. Ausg. Leipzig 1876.
Einleitung und Makrokosmos. Leipzig 1876. Mikrokosmos.
Leipzig 1879.
I. NATURAL SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
F. Wüstenfeld, Geschichte der arabischen Ärzte und Naturforscher.
Göttingen 1840 (rather out of date).
Histoire de la médecine arabe par le Dr. Lucien Leclerc. 2 vol.
Paris 1876 (insufficient).
Ibn Abi Useibia. Herausgegeben von August Müller. Königsberg
i. Pr. 1884 (Ibn Abī Ușaibi'a † 668 H., beg. 14. May 1297
wrote this great work on the history of Arab physicians under
the title: 'Uyun al-'anba' fi tabakat al-'atibba'. For which see
Vol. II des travaux de la 6e session du Congrès international des
Orientalistes à Leide. Leide 1884. p. 257 ff.).
Hayat al-haiwan (zoological work) by ad-Damīrī († 808 H., beg.
29. June 1405). 2 vols. Bulak 1284. Cairo 1305.
Kitāb al-ķānūn fit-tibb, Theory of Medicine, composed by Abu ‘Alī
ibn Šīnā (Avicenna † 428 H., beg. 25. Oct. 1036). 3 vols.
Bulak 1294.
al-Gāmi li-mufradāt al-'adwiya wal-'agdiya (On the common medicines
and foods) by Diya' ad-din Abu Muḥammad Ibn al-Baiṭār
(† 646 H., beg. 26. April 1248). 4 vols. Bulak 1231.
Tedkire (Science of medicine) by Da'id al-Antākā († 1005 H., beg.
15. Aug. 1596). 3 vols. Cairo 1294.
•
La Chimie du moyen-âge. par M. Berthelot. Tome III. L'al-
chimie arabe comprenant une introduction et les traités de Cratès,
d'el-Habib, d'Ostanès et de Djâber . . . texte et traduction
avec la collaboration de M. O. Houdas. Paris 1893. 40.
Matériaux pour servir à l'histoire des sciences mathématiques chez
les Grecs et les Orientaux par M. L. P. E. A. Sédillot. 2 tomes.
Paris 1845. 1849.
Traité des instruments astronomiques des Arabes, trad. par J. J. Sé-
dillot. Paris 1834. 1835. Mémoires sur les instruments astro-
nomiques des Arabes par J. J. Sédillot. Paris 1841-45.
LITERATURE K.
157
K. HISTORY, BIOGRAPHY.
a Written by Orientals.
Ibn Coteiba's (ibn Ķutaiba † 276 H. beg. 6. May 889) Handbuch der
Geschichte herausgegeben von Ferd. Wüstenfeld. Göttingen 1850.-
Oriental edition: Kitab al-ma'arif. Cairo 1300.
Abu Bekr Muhammed ben al-Hasan Ibn Doraid's († 321 H., beg.
1. Jan. 933) genealogisch-etymologisches Handbuch herausgegeben
von F. Wüstenfeld. Göttingen 1854.
*Chronologie orientalischer Völker von Albérûni. Herausgegeben von
Eduard Sachau. Gedruckt auf Kosten der D. M. Ges. Leipzig
1878. 4º.- Chronology of ancient Nations. An English Version
of the Arabic Text of the Athar ul Bâkiya of Albîrûnî, or
"Vestiges of the Past". Collected and reduced to writing by
the Author in A. H. 390—1, A. D. 1000. Translated and
Edited, with Notes and Index, by C. E. Sachau. Published for
the Oriental Translation Fund of Great Britain and Ireland.
Roy 80. London 1879.
Ibn Wadhih (Waḍih) qui dicitur al-Ja qubī (Ya'ķūbī) Historiae (composed
ca. 297 H.). 2 partes ed. M. Th. Houtsma. Lugduni Batav. 1883.
Anonyme Arabische Chronik Band XI vermuthlich das Buch der Ver-
wandtschaft und Geschichte der Adligen von Abulhasan ahmed
ben jahjā ben gabir ben dawūd elbeladori elbagdādi (al-Baladurī
† 279 H., beg. 3. Apr. 893). Autogr. und herausgegeben von
W. Ahlwardt. Greifswald 1883.
Kitāb al-ahbär aṭ-tiwal verf. von Abu Hanifa Ahmed ibn Daud ad-Dai-
nawarī († 282 or 290 H.) hrs. von Wladimir Girgas. Leiden 1888.
*Annales auctore Abu Djafar Mohammed Ibn Djarir At-Tabari (at-
Tabari† 309 H., beg. 12. May 921), quos ediderunt J. Barth,
Th. Nöldeke, O. Loth (†), E. Prym, H. Thorbecke (†), S. Fränkel,
D. H. Müller, M. Th. Houtsma, S. Guyard (†), V. Rosen et
M. J. de Goeje I, 1-5; II, 1—3; III, 1-4. Leiden 1879 seq.
Maçoudi (al-Masudi † 346 H., beg. 4. Apr. 957) Les prairies d'or.
Texte et traduction par C.Barbier de Meynard et Pavet de Cour-
teille. 9 tomes. Paris 1861-77. (id. 2 vols. Bulak 1283).
Hamzae Ispahanensis (Hamza wrote about 350 H.) annalium libri X.
Edidit J. M. E. Gottwaldt. I. textus, II. transl. Petropoli-Lipsiae
1844. 1848.
Fragmenta historicorum arabicorum. Tomus primus continens partem
tertiam operis Kitábo '1-Oyun wa 'lhádáïk fi akhbàri 'l-hadáïk
(written after the 11th cent. A-D.) quem ediderunt M. J. de
Goeje et P. de Jong. Lugduni Bat. 1868. 4º.- Tomus secundus
continens partem operis Tadjáribo 'lOmami, auctore Ibn Maskowaih
(† 421 H., beg. 9. Jan. 1030) edidit M. J. de Goeje. Lugd. Bat. 1871.
158
LITERATURE K.
*Ibn el-Athiri (ibn al-'Aṭīr † 630 H., beg. 18. Oct. 1232) Chronicon
quod perfectissimum (el-Kamil) inscribitur. Edidit Carolus Jo-
hannes Tornberg. 14 vol. Lugduni Bat. 1851-1876, - 12 vols.
Bulak 1290 and later.
Commentaire historique sur le poème d'Ibn-Abdoun (Ibn 'Abdūn
† 529 H., beg. 22. Oct. 1134) par Ibn Badroun (Ibn Badrūn
wrote in the same century) publié par R. P. A. Dozy. Leide 1846
(Ouvrages arabes publiés par Dozy).
Historia saracenica arabice olim exarata a Georgio Elmacino (al-Makīn
† 672 H., beg. 18. July 1273), edita et latine reddita opere et
studiis Thomae Erpenii. Lugduni Bat. 1625.
Ta'rih muhtasşar ad-duwal (Outlines of History by Gregorius abū
'l-Farag Ibn el-'Ibri (Barhebraeus † 1286 A. D.) ed. by Salḥāni.
·Beirut 1890. (The edition by Pococke, 2 tomi 4º. Oxonii 1663
is rare).
Elfachri. History of the Moslem Empires from the beginning to
the end of the Califate by Ibn etthigthaqa (wrote about 1302
A-D.). Edited in Arabic by W. Ahlwardt. Gotha 1860.
Abulfedae († 732 H., beg. 4. Oct. 1331). Annales muslemici arabice
et latine. Opera et studiis J. J. Reiskii, nunc primum ed. J. G.
Ch Adler. 5 vol. Hafniae 1789-94. 2 vols. Stambul 1286.
+Abulfedae historia Anteislamica, Arabice e duob. Codd. Paris.
edidit, vers. lat. notis et indicibus auxit H. O. Fleischer. Lipsiae
1831. 40.
Taʼrīḥ Zain ad-dīn ‘Umar ibn al-Wardī († 749 or 750 H. 1348/9).
2 vols. Cairo 1285. An excerpt: Aegyptus auctore Ibn
al-Vardi. Edidit vertit notulisque illustravit Martinus Frähn.
Halae 1804.
Ibn Ḥaldūn († 808 H., beg. 29. June 1405) al-'ibar etc. History of
the World. 7 vols. Bulak 1284. Prolégomènes d'Ebn-
Khaldoun. Texte arabe par Quatremère. 3 vols. Paris 1858
(Notices et extraits des mscr. XVI, 1. XVII, 1. XVIII, 1.).
Prolégomènes historiques d'Ibn Khaldoun. Traduction
Traduction par Mac
Guckin de Slane. 3 vols. Paris 1862-68 (Notices et extr. XIX,
1. XX, 1. XXI, 1).
The Tarikh al-Kholafá; or history of the Caliphs, from the death of
Mohammad to the year 900 of the Hijrah by the celebrated Jalál
al-Dín Al-Osyootí (as-Suyūṭī † 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505), ed. by
W. N. Lees und Mawlawi Abd al-Haqq. Calcutta 1857. Another
edition Cairo 1305.
*Liber expugnationis regionum auctore Imámo Ahmed ibn Jahja ibn
Djábir al-Baladsori (al-Balāḍurī † 279 H., beg. 3. Apr. 892) ed.
M. J. de Goeje. Lugduni Bat. 1866. 40.
Ousâma ibn Mounkidh un émir syrien au premier siècle des Croisades,
(1095-1188) par Hartwig Derenbourg. Deuxième partie. Texte
LITERATURE K.
159
arabe de l'autobiographie d'Ousâma. Paris 1886 (cf. Carlo de
Landberg, Critica arabica II. Leyde 1888). Ousâma ibn
Mounkidh etc. par H. Derenbourg (French edition.). Paris 1889.
‘Imād ed-dîn el-kātib el-iṣfahānī († 597 H. 1201) Conquête de la
Syrie et de la Palestine par Salaḥ ed-din. Publié par le comte
Carlo de Landerg. Vol. I. Texte arabe. Leyde 1888.
Vita et res gestae sultani Almalichi Alnasiri Saladini auctore Bohad-
dino F. Sjeddadi (Bahā ad-dīn ibn Šaddād † 632 H. 1234)
edidit ac·latine vertit Albertus Schultens. Lugduni Batav. 1732
(1755). fol.
Šihāb
Kitab ar-rauḍatain fi ta'riḥ ad-daulatain (History of Nureddin and
Saladin) by Sihab ad-din al-Mukaddasi, called Abū Šāma
(† 665 H. 1267). Cairo. 2 vols. 1287.
Kitab al-'ins al-galil bi-ta'rih al-kuds wal-halil. History of Jeru-
salem and Hebron by Muğīr ad-din († 927 H., beg. 12. Dec.
1520). Cf. Histoire de Jérusalem et d'Hébron. Fragments de
la Chronique de Moudjîr-ed-dyn traduits sur le texte arabe par
Henry Sauvaire. Paris 1876.
Die Chroniken der Stadt Mekka. Gesammelt und herausgegeben von
Ferdinand Wüstenfeld (I Azraki. II Fākihi, Fāsī, Ibn Dhuheira,
III Kuṭb ed-dīn. IV German edition). I—IV. Leipzig 1857—61:
Hulāṣat al-wafā bi'ahbār dār al-muṣṭafā (History of the town of
Medina) by as-Samhūdi († 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505). Bulak
1285. Extracts translated by Wüstenfeld in den Abhandlungen
der k. Ges. der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen. Bd. IX. 1860.
*al-Hitat (Geography and History of Egypt) by al-Maḥrīzī († 845
H., beg. 22. May 1441). 2 vols. Bulak 1270. Histoire des
Sultans Mamlouks de l'Egypte, écrite en arabe par Taki-eddin-
Ahmed Makrizi, traduite en français et accompagnée de notes
par Quatremère. 2 vol. Paris 1837-45. 40.
Abul-Maḥāsin ibn Tagri Bardii († 874 H., beg. 11. July 1469) Annales
(History of Egypt) I, 1. 2 ediderunt T. G. J. Juynboll et B. F.
Matthes. II, 1. 2. ed. T. G. J. Juynboll. Lugduni Bat. 1852—61
(incomplete).
Husn al-muhaḍara. History of Egypt by as-Suyūṭī († 911 H., beg.
4. June 1505). 2 vols. Cairo.
Ağaib al-āṭār fit-tarāğim wal-abbar (History of Egypt) by al-Gabartī
(† 1236 1821). 4 vols.
4 vols. Cairo n. d.
Ahmedis Arabsiadae (Aḥmed ibn Arabšah † 854 H., beg. 14. Febr.
1450) vitae et rerum gestarum Timuri, qui vulgo Tamerlanes
dicitur historia. (Ed.) Latine vertit etc. S. H. Manger. 2 vol.
Leovardiae 1767. 1772. Cairo 1285.
The History of the Almohades by Abdo-'l-Wahid al-Marrekoshi
(wrote in the year 621 H. 1224) edited by R. Dozy. 2. ed.
Leyden 1881.
160
LITERATURE K.
Historia Abbadidarum praemissis scriptorum Arabum de ea dynastia
locis nunc primum editis, auctore R. P. A. Dozy. I-III. Lug-
duni Bat. 1849. 4º. (Deals w. Spain).
Annales regum Mauretaniae a condito Idrisidarum imperio ad annum
fugae 726, ab Abu-1 Hasan Ali ben Abd Allah Ibn Abi Zer'
Fesano, vel ut alii malunt Abu Muhammed Salih ibn Abd el
Halim Granatensi conscriptos ed. illustr. Carolus Joh. Tornberg.
2 vol. Upsaliae 1843. 1846.
Histoire de l'Afrique et de l'Espague intitulée al-Bayáno 'l-Moghrib
par Ibn Adhárí (de Maroc) (Ibn al-Iḍārī wrote between 363
and 366 H.) et fragments de la chronique d'Arîb (de Cordoue)
publiés par R. P. A. Dozy. 2. vols. Leyde 1848-51.
Analectes sur l'histoire et la littérature des Arabes d'Espagne par
Al-Makkari (al-Makkari † 1041 H., beg. 30. July 1631). Publiés
par R. Dozy, G. Dugat, L. Krehl et W. Wright. 2 vol. Leyde
1855-61. (Conf. Fleischer, Textverbesserungen in Al-Makkarī's
Geschichtswerke. Kleinere Schriften. Vol. II pt. 1. Leipzig
1888.) Lettre à M. Fleischer contenant les remarques critiques
et explicatives sur le texte d'Al-Makkari par R. Dozy. Leyde
1871. Cf. The history of the Mohammedan Dynasties in Spain
by Ahmed ibn Mohammed Al-Makkarī. Translated and illustrated
by Pascual de Gayangos. 2 vol. London 1840-3. 4°.
Bibliotheca arabo-sicula, ossia Raccolta di testi arabici che toccano la
geografia, la storia, la biografia e la bibliografia della Sicilia,
messi insieme da Michele Amari. Lipsia 1857; Appendice, ibid.
1875.
Alberuni's India, an account of the religion, philosophy, literature,
chronology, astronomy, customs, laws and astrology of India
about 1030. Ed. by Edw. Sachau. London 1887. 4º.
- Id.
An English edition with notes and indices. By E. Sachau. London.
2 vol. 1888.
Scriptorum Arabum de Rebus Indicis loci et opuscula inedita rec.
et illustr. Joannes Gildemeister.
Fasc. pr.
Bonnae 1838.
Cf. id., Dissertationis de rebus Indiae, quo modo in Arabum
notitiam venerint, pars I. Bonnae 1838.
*Ibn Challican, Vitae illustrium virorum. E codd. nunc primum
arabice edidit variis lectionibus, indicibusque locupletissimis in-
struxit Ferd. Wüstenfeld. Gottingae 1835-40, 4°. Ibn Hal-
likān († 681 H., beg. 11. Apr. 1282). 2 vols. Bulak 1275; another
edition 1299. Ibn Khallikan's Biographical Dictionary, translated
from the Arabic by Baron Mac Guckin de Slane. 4 vol. Paris-
London 1843-71. 40.
Fawat al-wafayat (supplement to Ibn Hallikān) by as-Salāḥ al-Kutubī
(† 764 H., beg. 21. Oct. 1362). 2 vols. Bulak 1283.
LITERATURE K.
161
The biographical dictionary of illustrious men chiefly at the beginning
of Islamism by Abu Zakariya Jahya el-Nawawi († 676 H. = 1277)
edited by Ferd. Wüstenfeld. Göttingen 1842-47 (cf. idem for
the Life and Writings of el-Nawawi, Göttingen 1849, from the
4th vol. of the Abhandl. d. kgl. Ges. d. Wiss. zu Gött..
Nuzhat al-'alubba fi tabakāt al-'udabā. Concerning celebrated Men.
By Abul-Barakāt al-'Anbāri († 577 H., beg. 17. May 1181).
Cairo lithogr. n. d.
8 Written by Europeans.
+Vergleichungstabellen der muhammedanischen und christlichen Zeit-
rechnung nach den ersten Tagen jedes muhammedanischen Monats
berechnet. Herausgegeben von Ferd. Wüstenfeld. Leipzig 1844.-
Fortsetzung der Wüstenf. Vergl.- Tab. bis 1500 von E. Mahler.
Leipzig 1887.
*Die Geschichtsschreiber der Araber und ihre Werke. Von F. Wüsten-
feld. (From the XXVIII. and XXIX. vol. of the Abhandlungen
der Kgl. Ges. d. W. zu Göttingen). Göttingen 1882. 40.
*Genealogische Tabellen der Arabischen Stämme und Familien
Aus den Quellen zusammengestellt von Ferdinand Wüstenfeld.
Göttingen 1852. q.-fol. Register zu den genealogischen Ta-
bellen der Arabischen Stämme und Familien. Mit historischen
und geographischen Bemerkungen von Ferdinand Wüstenfeld.
Göttingen 1853.
*Caussin de Perceval, Essai sur l'histoire des Arabes avant l'islamisme
3 vol. Paris 1847.
Geschichte der Perser und Araber zur Zeit der Sassaniden. Aus
der arabischen Chronik des Tabari übersetzt und mit ausführ-
lichen Erläuterungen und Ergänzungen versehen von Th. Nöldeke,
Leyden 1879.
**Der Islam im Morgen- und Abendland. Von A. Müller. 2 Bände.
Berlin 1885. 1887. (Allgemeine Geschichte in Einzeldarstellungen
hrsgg. von L. Oncken. Zweite Hauptabteilung. Vierter Teil).
*Geschichte der Chalifen. Nach handschriftlichen grösstenteils noch
unbenützten Quellen bearbeitet von Gustav Weil. 3 Bände.
Mannheim 1846-51. Geschichte des Abbasidenchalifats in
Aegypten. Von Gustav Weil. 2 Bände. Stuttgart 1860-2.
†Geschichte der islamitischen Völker von Mohammed bis zur Zeit
des Sultan Selim übersichtlich dargestellt von Gustav Weil.
Stuttgart 1866.
+Geschichte der Araber bis auf den Sturz des Chalifats von Bagdad.
Von Gustav Flügel. 2. Aufl. Leipzig 1864.
The Caliphate, its rise, decline, and fall from original sources by
Sir William Muir. London 1891. New and revised edition 1894.
Socin. Arabic Grammar.2
11
162
LITERATURE L.
+
Handbuch der morgenländischen Münzkunde. Von J. G. Stickel.
2 Hefte. Leipzig 1865-70.
40.
Catalogue of Oriental Coins in the British Museum, 9 vol. London
1875-1889.
The Mohammadan Dynasties, chronological and genealogical Tables
with historical Introductions by St. Lane-Poole. London 1894.
Die Charidschiten unter den ersten Omayyaden. Ein Beitrag zur
Geschichte des ersten islamischen Jahrhunderts von R. E.
Brünnow. Leiden 1884.
De opkomst der Abbasiden in Chorasan door G. van Vlooten. Leiden 1890.
Mémoires sur les Carmathes du Bahrain et les Fatimides par M. J.
de Goeje. Leiden 1886.
Die Statthalter von Ägypten zur Zeit der Chalifen. Von F. Wüsten-
feld. Parts 1 and 2. Abhandlungen der Kgl. Ges. d. Wissen-
schaften zu Göttingen. 1875 (4). Band 20. Parts 3 and 4.
ibid. 1876, Band 21.
History of the Moors in Spain to the Conquest of Andalusia by the
Almoravides (711-1110), by R. Dozy. German Edition with
additions by the Author. 2 vols. Leipzig 1874.
Poesie und Kunst der Araber in Spanien und Sicilien. Von Adolf
Friedrich von Schack. 2 Bände. Berlin 1865. 2. Aufl. 1877.
*Culturgeschichte des Orients unter den Chalifen. Von Alfred von
Kremer. 2 Bände. Wien 1875-77.
Das Einnahmebudget des Abbasiden-Reichs
vom Jahre 360 H.
(918-919) von Alfred von Kremer. Denkschriften der philos.-hist.
Classe der Kais. Akademie der Wiss. in Wien. Bd. XXXVI. 1887.
*Geschichte der herrschenden Ideen des Islams. Der Gottesbegriff, die
Prophetie und Staatsidee. Von Alfred v. Kremer. Leipzig 1868.
Die Baustile. Historische und technische Entwicklung. Des Handbuchs
der Architectur (von J. Durm) Zweiter Theil. 3. Band, zweite Hälfte;
Die Baukunst des Islam. Von Franz Pascha. Darmstadt 1887.
Prisse d'Avennes, L'art arabe d'après les monuments du Caire depuis
le VIIe siècle jusqu'à la fin du XVIIIe. 3 vol. fol. 1 vol. 4.
Paris 1877. La décoration arabe. (Extrait du grand ouvrage.)
Paris 1865. fol.
L. COSMOGRAPHY, GEOGRAPHY, ETHNOGRAPHY,
TRAVELS.
a Written by Orientals.
Cosmographie de Chems ed-din Abou Abdallah Mahommed ed-Dimichqi
(ad-Dimišķī† 654 H., beg. 30. Jan. 1256). Texte arabe publié
d'après l'édition commencée par M. Frähn, et d'après les manu-
LITERATURE L.
163
Manuel
scrits par M. A. F. Mehren. St. Pétersbourg 1866. 40.
de la cosmographie du moyen âge, traduit de l'arabe „Nokhbet
ed-dahr fi 'adjaib-il-birr wal-bah'r" de Shems ed-dîn Abou-Abdallah
Mohammed de Damas et accompagnée d'éclaircissements par M.
A. F. Mehren. Copenhague 1874.
*Zakarija Ben Muhammed ben Mahmúd el-Cazwini's (al-Kazwīnī
682 H., beg. 1. Apr. 1283) Kosmographie. Herausg. von Ferd.
Wüstenfeld. 2 Bände. Göttingen 1848-9. id. nach der
Wüstenfeld'schen Textausgabe etc. übersetzt von Hermann Ethé.
Erster Halbband. Leipzig 1868.
Haridat al-ağaib wa-faridat al-garaib, a species of Cosmography
composed by 'Umar ibn al-Wardi († 749 or 750 H. = 1348 or 9).
Cairo 1292.
Specimen e literis orientalibus exhibens az-Zamaksarīi, (az-Zamaķšarī
† 538 H., beg. 16. July 1143) lexicon geographicum quod auspice
T. G. J. Juynboll edidit Mathias Salverda de Grave. Lugduni
Bat. 1856.
Al-Hamdûnî's († 334 H., beg. 13. Aug. 945) Geographie der Arabischen
Halbinsel. Nach den Handschr. herausgegeben von David Heinrich
Müller. Leiden 1884.
Das geographische Wörterbuch des Abu 'Obeid 'Abdallah ben ‘Abd
el-'Aziz el-Bekri († 487 H. 1094) nach den Handschriften
zu Leiden, Cambridge, London und Mailand herausgegeben von
Ferd. Wüstenfeld. 2 Bände. Göttingen, Paris 1876. 1877.
*Jacut's (Yāķūt † 626 H. 1229) Geographisches Wörterbuch aus
den Handschriften zu Berlin, St. Petersburg und Paris auf Kosten
der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft herausgegeben von
Ferdinand Wüstenfeld. 6 Bände. Leipzig 1866-73.
Jacut's Moschtarik, das ist: Lexicon geographischer Homonyme.
Herausgegeben von Ferd. Wüstenfeld. Göttingen 1846.
Marāṣid al-iṭṭilâ'i, Lexicon geographicum ed T. G. J. Juynboll I—VI.
Lugduni B. 1850-64. (An Extract from Yāķūt).
Géographie d'Aboulféda (Abul-fidā † 732 H., beg. 4. Oct. 1331). Texte
arabe par Reinaud et Mac- Guckin de Slane. Paris 1840.
Géographie d'Ismail Abou 'l-Féda en arabe publiée par Charles
Schier. Éd. autogr. Dresde 1846. Géographie d'Aboulféda,
traduite de l'arabe en français par Reinaud I (*Introduction
générale à la géographie des Orientaux) II, 1 Paris 1848; II, 2
par Stanislas Guyard. Paris 1883.
*Bibliotheca geographorum arabicorum. Edidit M. J. de Goeje.
Pars prima. Viae regnorum. Descriptio ditionis moslemicae
auctore Abu Isḥāk al-Fārisī al-Istakhri (al-Isṭaḥrī, cf. Zeitschrft
d. D. Morgenl. Ges. Bd. 25, p. 42 ff.). Lugduni Bat. 1870.
Pars secunda. Viae et regna. Descriptio ditionis moslemicae
auctore Abu 'l-Kāsim Ibn Haukal (ibid.). Lugduni Bat. 1873.
11*
164
LITERATURE L.
Pars tertia. Descriptio imperii Moslemici auctore Al-Mokad-
dasi (al-Mukaddasī wrote in year 378 the H.). Lugduni Bat. 1876.
Cf. Description of Syria &c. by Mukaddasi. Translated from
the Arabic by Guy Le Strange. (Palestine Pilgrims' Text Society).
Pars quarta. Continens indices, glossarium et addenda et emen-
danda ad part. I-III auctore M. J. de Goeje. Lugduni Bat. 1879.
Pars quinta. Compendium libri Kitab al-boldan auctore Ibn
al-Fakih al-Hamadhani (wrote ca. A. D. 290). Lugd. Bat. 1885.
Pars sexta. Kitâb al-masalik wal-mamālik (liber viarum et
regnorum) auctore Abu'l-Kâsim Obaidallah ibn Abdallah ibn
Khordadbeh (Ibn Hordadbeh wrote in the second half of the
9th cent. A. D.) et excerpta e Kitâb al-Kharâdj (K. al-harāģ
Taxbook) auctore Kodāma ibn Djafar (Kudāma ibn Ga far
wrote about 930 A. D.). Lugduni Bat. 1889.
Pars septima. Kitāb al-alāk an-nafīsa VII auctore Abū Alī
Ahmed ibn Omar ibn Rosteh (wrote before 301. H.) et Kitāb al-
boldan auctore Ahmed ibn abì Jakub ibn Wadhih al-Katib al-
Jaķūbī (cf. p. 157). Lugduni Bat. 1892.
Pars octava. Kitâb at-tanbîh wa'l-ischrâf auctore al-Masûdî
(cf. p. 157). Accedunt indices et glossarium ad tomos VII et
VIII. Lugduni Bat. 1894.
Description de l'Afrique et de l'Espagne par Edrīsī (wrote 548
H., beg. 29 March 1153) texte arabe publié pour la première fois
d'après les man. de Paris et d'Oxford avec une traduction, des
notes et un glossaire par R., Dozy et M. J. de Goeje. Leyde 1866.
The travels of Ibn Jubair (Ibn Gubair end of the 6th cent.) edited by
William Wright. Leyden 1852.
Voyages d'Ibn Batoutah (Ibn Baṭūṭa † 779 H., beg. 10 May 1377).
Texte arabe, accompagnée d'une traduction par C. Defrémery et
B. R. Sanguinetti (Publications de la Société asiatique). 4 vol.
Paris 1853-58; deux. tir. 1874-77. Cairo 1288.
3 Written by Europeans.
F. Wüstenfeld, Die Litteratur der Erdbeschreibung bei den Arabern.
Zeitschrift für vergleichende Erdkunde hrsgg. von J. G. Lüdde I,
1841, S. 24-67.
Carte générale des provinces européennes et asiatiques de l'Empire
Ottoman, dressée par Henri Kiepert 4 feuilles. Deux. éd. en-
tièrement corrigée et augmentée d'un index alphabetique. Berlin
1892.
(Karte von) Arabien zu C. Ritters Erdkunde, Buch III, West-Asien,
Teil XII und XIII bearbeitet von H. Kiepert. Neue berichtigte
Ausgabe, die Orthographie revidiert von Th. Nöldeke. Berlin 1867
(D. Reimer).
1.
LITERATURE L.
165
Skizze der Geschichte und Geographie Arabiens von den ältesten
Zeiten bis zum Propheten Muḥammad. Auf Grund der Inschriften,
der Angaben der alten Autoren und der Bibel von Eduard Glaser.
Zweiter Band. Berlin 1890.
Die alte Geographie Arabiens als Grundlage der Entwicklungsgeschichte
des Semitismus von A. Sprenger. Bern 1875.
Arabien im sechsten Jahrhundert. Eine ethnographische Skizze von
Otto Blau. Mit einer Karte: Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenl.
Gesellschaft. Leipzig 1869 (XXIII B.) p. 559-592.
Arabien und die Araber seit hundert Jahren. Eine geographische
und geschichtliche Skizze von Albrecht Zehme. Halle 1875.
Palestine under the Moslems. A description of Syria and the Holy
Land from A. D. 650 to 1500. Translated from the works of the
medieval Arab Geographers by Guy le Strange. (London) 1890.
Relation de l'Égypte par Abdallatif ('Abd al-Laṭīf al-Bagdadi † 629 H.,
beg. 29. Oct. 1231). Le tout traduit et enrichi de notes par
Silvester de Sacy. Paris 1810. 4º. (The text of 'Abd al-Latif
has been published by J. White: 'Abdollatiphi Historiae Aegypti
compendium. Oxonii 1800).
*Beschreibung von Arabien. Aus eigenen Beobachtungen und im
Lande selbst gesammelten Nachrichten abgefasst von Carsten
Niebuhr. Kopenhagen 1772. 4°.
Carsten Niebuhrs Reisebeschreibung nach Arabien und andern um-
liegenden Ländern. 1. Band. Kopenhagen 1774. 2. Band. 1778;
English edtn. 2 vols. Edinb. 1792.
+*Travels in Arabia (1814) comprehending an account of those territories
in Hedjaz which the Mohammedans regard as sacred. By the
late John Lewis Burckhardt. London, 2 vol. 1829. Johann
Ludwig Burckhardt's Reisen in Arabien, enthaltend eine Beschrei-
bung derjenigen Gebiete in Hedjaz, welche die Mohammedaner
für heilig achten... Aus dem Englischen übersetzt. Weimar 1830.
**J. L. Burckhardt, Notes on the Bedouins and Wahábys. 2 vol.
London 1831. Bemerkungen über die Beduinen und Wahabi's.
Weimar 1831.
-
Richard Burton, Personal narrative of a pilgrimage to El Medinah and
Meccah. 2 vol. London 1857 (and frequently, also in the Tauchnitz
edition).
*Travels in Arabia Deserta by Churles M. Doughty. 2 vol. Cambridge
1888. (With new map).
Adolf von Wrede's Reise in Hadhramaut, Beled Beny 'Issa und Beled
el Hadschar. Herausgegeben... von H. Freiherr von Maltzan.
Braunschweig 1870. Reise nach Südarabien und Geographische
Forschungen im und über den südwestlichen Teil Arabiens von
Heinrich Freihern von Maltzan. Braunschweig 1873.
166
LITERATURE M.
Mekka von Dr. C. Snouck Hurgronje. 2 Bände. Mit Bilder-Atlas.
Haag 1888. 1889.
*An account of the manners and customs of the modern Egyptians,
written in Egypt etc. By Edward William Lane. Various
editions. London. Lane, Sitten und Gebräuche der heutigen
Egypter. Übersetzt von J. Zenker. 3 Bde. Leipzig 1852.
E. W. Lane, Arabian society in the middle ages. Studies from the
Thousand and One Nights ed. by Stanley Lane Poole. London
1883. (Supplement to the "Manners and Customs", containing
the notes to Lane's translation of the Thousand and One Nights
(v. infra).
M. VERSE.
Delectus veterum carminum arabicorum. Carmina selegit et edidit
Th. Noeldeke, glossarium confecit A. Müller. Berolini 1890.
Über Poesie und Poetik der Araber von Wilhelm Ahlwardt. Gotha
1856. 40.
Beiträge zur Kenntniss der Poesie der alten Araber. Von Th. Nöldeke.
Hannover 1864.
Kitab al-aġānī by Abu 'l-Farağ ‘Alī al-Isfahānī († 352 H., beg.
30. Jan. 962). 20 vols. Bulak 1285. Alii Ispahanensis
liber cantilenarum magnus, ed. Kosegarten. T. 1. Gripesvoldiae
1840. 40. The twenty-first volume of The Kitâb al-aghâni
ed. by Rud. E. Brünnow, Leyden 1888. Tables alphabetiques
du Kitâb al-Agânî par J. Guidi. 1er fasc. Leide 1895.
Kitāb raudat al-adab fi tabaķāt suara al'arab by Iskander-Aga
Abkarius (modern Beyrout scholar). Beirut 1858.
Ḥizānat al-adab wa-lubb lubab lisan al-'arab, by ‘Ab-dal-Kādir ibn
‘Umar al-Bağdādī († 1093 H.; beg. 21. Aug. 1629) 4 vols. Bulak
1291 (A work on poets; on the margin are printed the Sawahid
al-Aini). An index to the poets appeared from the pen of Guidi
in the transactions of the R. Accademia dei Lincei, Rome 1887.
*The Diwans of the six ancient Arabic poets Ennabiga, Antara, Tharafa,
Zuhair, Alqama and Imruulqais, ed. by W. Ahlwardt. London.
1870.
Bemerkungen über die Ächtheit der alten Arabischen Gedichte mit
besonderer Beziehung auf die sechs Dichter etc. von W. Ahlwardt.
Greifswald 1872.
Le Dîwân de Nabiga Dhobyânî publié par H. Dérenbourg.
asiatique 1868-9.
Journal
H. Thorbecke, Antarah, ein vorislamischer Dichter. Leipzig 1867.
Die Gedichte des Alkama Alfahl. Mit Anmerkungen herausgegeben
von Albert Socin. Leipzig 1867.
Le diwan d'Amro'lkais par le Bon de Slane. Paris 1837. 40. With
LITERATURE M.
167
Commentary by al-Batalyūsi. Cairo 1308. Cf. Amrilkais, der
Dichter und König. Von Fr. Rückert. Stuttgart und Tü-
bingen 1843.
+*Septem Mo' allakât carmina antiquissima Arabum, textum etc. rec.
F. A. Arnold. Lipsiae 1850 (out of print) With commentary
by az-Zauzani († 375 H., beg. 24. May 958). Cairo 1288.
A commentary by Abû Zakariya Sahya at-Tibrizi († 420 H., beg.
11. Aug. 1108) on ten ancient Arabic poems edited from the Mss.
of Cambridge, London and Leiden by Charles James Lyall.
Fasc. I Bibliotheca Indica, New Series, No. 789, Calcutta 1891;
Fasc. II ib. No. 840. Calc. 1894.
Der Diwan des Lebid. Nach einer Handschrift zum ersten Male
herausgegeben von Jūsuf Dijā-ad-dīn al-Chūlidī. Wien 1880.
Cf. A. von Kremer in den Sitzungsberichten der phil.-hist.
Classe der Kais. Akademie d. Wissenschaften 98. Bd. 2 Heft.
Wien 1881. Die Gedichte des Lebīd. Nach der Wiener
Ausgabe übersetzt und mit Anmerkungen versehen aus dem
Nachlasse des Dr. A. Huber herausgegeben von Carl Brockel-
mann. Leiden 1891.
Die Mufaddalījāt (Anthology of the Grammarian al-Mufaddal; † about
170 H.) Nach den Handschriften herausgegeben von Heinrich
Thorbecke. Erstes Heft. Leipzig 1885.
*Hamasae carmina cum Tebrisii scholiis integris edidit, indicibus in-
struxit, versione latina et commentario illustr. G. G. Freytag.
2 vol. Bonnae 1828-47 (collected by Abu Tammām † 190, beg.
27. Nov. 805; at-Tabrizi Comm. † 420 H., beg. 11. Aug. 1108).
Another edition Bulak 1296. Cf. Hamâsa oder die ältesten
arabischen Volkslieder, gesammelt von Abu Temmâm, übersetzt
und erläutert von Friedrich Rückert. 2 T. Stuttgart 1846.
The Hudsailian poems contained in the manuscript of Leyden edited
in Arabic and translated with annotations by J. G. L. Kosegarten.
Vol. I. London 1854. 4º. Letzter Theil der Lieder der Hu-
dhailiten, arabisch und deutsch: Skizzen und Vorarbeiten von
J. Wellhausen. 1. Heft. Berlin 1884. Comp. Z. der D. Morgenl.
Gesellschaft 39. pp. 104, 151, 411 ff.
Die Gedichte des 'Urwa ibn Alward. Von Th. Nöldeke: Abhandlungen
der Kgl. Ges. d. Wiss. zu Göttingen. Hist. -Phil. Classe 11.
Gedichte und Fragmente des 'Aus ibn Hajar, gesammelt, herausgegeben
und übersetzt von Rudolf Geyer: Sitzungsberichte der Kais.
Akademie der Wissenschaften in Wien. Philos.-hist. Classe. Band
126. Wien 1892.
Anis al-gulasa' fi dīwān al-Hansā' (The poetess al-Hansa is said to
have died A. H. 24, beg. 7. Nov. 644 A. D.) Beirut 1888.
Le diwan d'al Hansa' traduit par le P. de Coppier et suivi de
fragments inédits d'Al-Hirniq. Beyrouth 1889.
168
LITERATURE M.
Ibn Hišami († 762 H., beg. 11 Nov. 1360) Commentarius in Carmen
Ka'bi ben Zoheir Banat Suad ed. Guidi. Lipsiae 1871. 1874.
Der Diwan des Garwal b. Aus al-Huṭej'a († between 68-70 H.)
Bearbeitet von Ignaz Goldziher: Zeitschrift der D. Morgenl.
Gesellschaft Bd. 46, S. 1-53; 173-225; 471-527; Bd. 47,
S. 43-85; 163-201. Also in a collected edition. Leipzig 1893.
Dīvān sayyidna Hassan ibn Tabit († 54 H., beg. 30. Aug. 683).
Tunis 1281.
Dîwân d'al-Ahtal, Texte arabe publié pour la première fois d'après le
manuscrit de St. Pétersbourg et annoté par le P. A. Salhani
S. J. Beyrouth 1891.
Divan de Férazdak († 110 H., beg. 16. April 728) récits de Mohammed
ben-Habib d'après Ibn-el-Arabi publié sur le manuscrit de Sainte-
Sophie de Constantinople avec une traduction française par R.
Boucher. Paris 1870. 4º. (incomplete).
•
.
Magmu muštamil 'ala hams dawāwīn (an-Nabiga, 'Urwa, Ḥātim, ‘Al-
kama and Farazdak) Cairo 1293 cf. Z. der D. Morgenl. Ge-
sellschaft 31, 667 ff.
Chalef elahmar's (died after 155 H.) Qasside. Berichtigter arabischer
Text etc. von A. Ahlwardt. Greifswald 1859.
Diwan al-Buḥturī († 190 H., beg. 27 Nov. 805). Constantinople 1300.
Diwan des Abu Nowas nach der Wiener und Berliner Handschrift
mit Benutzung anderer Handschriften herausgegeben von W. Ahl-
wardt. 1. Die Weinlieder. Greifswald 1861. Diwan Abi Nuwās.
Cairo 1277. (Abū Nuwās † about 195 H. 810).
Diwan poëtae Abu-l-Walid Moslim ibno-'l-Walīd al-Ançāri cognomine-
Çarīo-'l-ghawāni (Ṣarī al-ġawāni † 208 H., beg. 16. May 823)
quem edidit M. de J. Goeje. Lugduni Bat. 1875. 4º.
Al-anwār az-zāhiya fi dīwān Abi'l-'Atahiya (Abu'l-Atāhiya † 221
H., beg. 26. Dec. 835). Beirut 1886. 2me édit. 1888.
Diwan Abi Tammām Habib ibn Aus at-Ta'i († 231 H., beg. 7. Sept.
845). Cairo 1292.
909)
Dīvān amir al-mu'minīn Ibn-al-Mutazz al-'Abbāsi († 296 H.
Cairo 1891. Cf. Über Leben und Werk des Abdallah ibn al-
Mutazz von Otto Loth. Leipzig 1882.
Mutanabbii (al-Mutanabbī † 354 H.
=
965) carmina cum commen-
tario Wahidii primum edidit, indicibus instruxit, varias lectiones
adnotavit Fr. Dieterici. Berolini 1861. 4º.
Dīwān Abi Firās al-Hamdāni († 357 beg. 7. Dec. 967). Beirut
1873.
Abu'l-Ala' al-Ma arrī († 449 H., beg. 10 March 1057) Sakt ez-zind,
Poems with Commentary. 2 vols. Bulak 1286 and 1302 (Another
edition Beirut 1884). Luzūm mā lā yalzam. Bombay 1303.
40; Luzumiyat 2 vols. Cairo 1891. Caroli Rieu de Abul-Alae
LITERATURE N.
169
poetae arabici vita et carminibus. Bonnae 1843. Cf. Zeitschrift
der D. Morgenl. Gesellschaft 29, 304; 30, 40; 31, 471 ff.
Yatimat ad-dahr fi šu ara' ahl al-'așr, Anthology composed by Abū
Manṣūr ‘Abd al-Malik at-Ta‘ālibí († 429 H., beg. 14. Oct. 1037)
4 vols. Damascus 1302.
Anthologie arabe ou choix de poésies arabes inédites traduites pour
la première fois en français et accompagnées d'observations critiques.
et littéraires par M. Grangeret de La Grange. (Paris) 1828.
N. BELLES-LETTRES, ETHICS, ROMANCES.
*The Kamil of El-Mubarrad († 285 H., beg. 28. Jan. 898), edited
for the German Oriental Society by W. Wright. Part. 1-12;
Leipzig 1864–92. A reprint appeared in Cairo 2 vols. 1308.
al-'Ikd al-farid, by Ibn 'Abd-rabbihi al-Andalusī († 328 H., beg.
28. March 860) 3 vols. Bulak 1293.
Kitāb al-Muwaššā of Abu 't-Tayyib Muhammed ibn Ishaq al-Waššā
(lived 860-936 A. D.) edited by R. Brünnow. Leyden 1886.
Ibn Arabschah († 854 H., beg. 14. Febr. 1450) Fructus imperatorum
et jocatio ingeniosorum edidit G. G. Freytag. 2. vol. Bonnae
1832. 4º. Oriental editions with the title: Fakihat al-bulafā'
wa-mufakahat az-zurafā'.
Makāmāt badi' az-zaman al-Hamadānī (al-Hamadāni, the predecessor
of Hariri died 398 H., beg. 17. Sept. 1007) with commentary by
Seih Muhammad Abdo. Beirut 1889. Other Makamat of Hama-
dāni Constantinople 1298.
*Les séances de Hariri (al-Hariri † 516 H., beg. 12. March 1122),
avec un commentaire choisi pao Silvestre de Sacy; 1 éd. Paris
par Reinaud et J. Derenbourg. 2 tom.
1822; 2. éd.
1847-1853.
beg. 15. Feb.
J
Paris
With the Commentary of aš-Sarīsī († 619 H.,
1222) 2 vols. Bulak 1284. Makāmāt (Vowelled
text) 2. Ed. Beyrouth 1886. The Assemblies of Al-Hariri,
transl. &c. by Thomas Chenery. Vol I 1867. Do. Arabic text
with English notes &c. by F. Steingass 1895.
*Kitab Adab al-Katib (proply. an aid to elegant writing) composed
by Muhammed Abdallah ibn Muslim Ibn Kutaiba († in the
2nd. half of the 3rd. Centy. of the Flight). Cairo 1300.
Kitāb al-matal as-sa'ir fī 'adab al-kātib waš-šā ir (Treatise on Style)
by Ibn al-Atīr al-Gazarī († 637 H., beg. 3. Aug. 1239) Cairo
1282.
Rasail (Letters) abi'l-Fadl badi' az-zaman al-Hamadāni († 398 H.,
beg. 17. Sept. 1007). Constantinople 1298.
al-Maidānī († 518 H., beg. 19. Feb. 1124) Mağma al-amtāl. (Collec-
tion of Proverbs). 2 vols. Bulak 1284. Arabum proverbia,
170
LITERATURE N.
vocalibus instruxit, latine vertit, commontario illustravit G. G.
Freytag I, II, III (a b.), Bonnae 1838-43,
Les colliers d'or, allocutions morales de Zamakhschari (az-Zamaḥ šarī
† 538 H., beg. 16. July 1143) texto arabo suivi d'une traduction
françaiso ot d'un commentaire philologique par C. Barbier de
Meynard. Paris 1876.
Ali's hundort Sprüche arabisch und persisch paraphrasiert von Roschid-
oddin Watwat, nobst einom doppelten Anhang arabischer Sprücho
herausgegeben, übersetzt und mit Anmorkungon begleitet von
H. L. Fleischer, Leipzig 1837. 4º.
Sirāģ al-mulūk (Ethics and Anocdotos) composed by Abu Bokr Mu-
hammed at-Tarṭūšī al-Maliki († 520 H., beg. 27. Jan. 1126).
Cairo 1289.
Muḥndarät al-udabā wa-muḥāwarāt aš-šu'ara' wal-bulaga', a spocies
of Ethics with Anecdotos by ar-Rajib al-Isfahani († in tho
boginning of the 6th centy, of tho Flight). 2 vols. Cairo 1287. 4º.
al-Mustatraf fi kull fann al-mustazraf, a species of anthological En-
cyclopaodia compiled by Ahmad al-1bšihi (lived about 800 H.)
2 vols. Cairo 1304. 1307.
Sirot 'Antur ibn Saddäd, 32 vols. Cairo 1286. 1307. (another recension
10 vols. Beirut 1871). Cf. Antar, a Bedoucen romance. Trans-
lated from Arabic by T. Hamilton. Part. I, i-iv. London 1820.
Alf laila wa-laila. Tausoud und eino Nacht arabisch. Nach einer
Handschrift aus Tunis herausg. von Maximilian Habicht I-VIII;
fortgos. von H. L. Fleischer IX-XII vol. Breslau 1825--43.
(This odition is not suitable for beginners in Arabic, as the
langungo is in many parts strongly influenced by the vulgar
tongue). The Alif Laila or book of the thousand nights and
one night, published from an Egyptian Ms. by W. H. Macnaghten.
4 vols. Calcutta 1839-42. 4 vols. Bulak 1279. Original
in expurgatod edition. Beyrout 1888-90. Following the
earlior Bulak edition: The thousand and ono nights commonly
called, in England, The Arabian nights' ontertainments. Trans-
lated by W. Lane. 3 vol. London. 1 od. 1841. Other editions
by Edw. Stanley Poole (the last 1882).
►
PART II.
PARADIGMS, CHRESTOMATHY
AND
GLOSSARY.
Socin, Arabio Grammar.
A
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA I.
Suffixa et Praefixa in flexione
verbi adhibita.

Persona Numerus
Perfectum
3. masc. sing.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
>>
1.
3. masc.
3. fem.
2.
""
1335
dual.
"
3. masc.
plur.
3. fem.
""
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
"
"
ว
(၉
dding d
Imperfectum
- ? ()
3 (3)
3 (3)
lin 1:0
(S—) J— 3 (3)
E
-10
(1)
تُمَا
سُوا
13
نَا
(3) يَـَان (-)
(—) J— 3 (3)
(3) ذَ ـَان (ا)
(دُ) يَدُونَ (سُوا )
(1__2__)
19
(3)
1w
دُونَ
() ذَـُونَ
ذَنَ
— 3 (3)
5 (3)
4*
PARADIGHATA.

TABULA II.
Paradigma flexionis verbi sani stirpis I.
Activum
Imperfectum
Nume- Perfec-
Persona
Impera-
tivus
rus
tum
Indicativus
mpf
Subjunc-
tivus
Apocopat. Energ. I. Energ. II
0907
3. masc. sing.
3. fem.
A
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
يقتلن يقتلن
اقتل
تقتلن
وه و
يقتل
تقتلن تقت
13
أقتلِي تَقْتُلِن
اقتل
اقتلن
نتلي
0905
اقتل
اقتل
يقتل
فتل
تقتل
ـقتل
قتلت
قَتَلْتَ
تقتلِينَ
قتلت
9905
اقتل
قتلت
A
PARADIGMATA.
5*
900
يقتلا
ـقتلا
قتلا
تقتلا
تقتلا مثلان
قَتَلَنَا
تقتلا
تَقْتُلَا
تقتلا تَقْتُ
قَتَلْتُما
ת
3. masc. | dual.
3. fem.
2.
909
اقتلا
اقتلوا
وہ
أقتلن
يَقْتُلُنْ يَقْتُلُنَّ يَقْتُلُوا يَقْتُلُوا يَقْتُلُونَ قَتَلُوا .masc. plur .3
يَقْتَلْنَانِ يَقْتَلْنَ يَقْتُلْنَ يَقْتُلْنَ قَتَلْنَ
تَقْتُلُنْ تَقْتُلُنَّ تَقْتُلُوا تَقْتُلُوا تَقْتُلُونَ قَتَلْتُمْ
تَقْتُلْنَانِ تَقْتُلْنَ تَقْتُلْنَ
تَقْتُلْنَ
قَتَلْتُنَّ
90.
نقتلن نقتلَنَّ نَقْتُلْ نقتل
نَقْتُلُ
قَتَلْنَا
ת
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
6*
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA III.
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I verbi sani

Imperfectum
Perfec-
Nume-
Persona
rus
tum
Subjunc-
Indicativus
Apocopat.
tivus
3. masc. | sing.
3. fem.
"
2. masc.
2. fem.
រា
1.
3
3. masc. | dual.
3. fem.
"}
2.
3. masc. plur.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
E
ກ
يُقْتَل
يقتَلَ
يقتل
قُتل
تُقْتَل
•
تُقْتَلَ تقتل
قُتلَتْ
تُقْتَلْ
تقتل
يُقْتَلُ
قُتِلتَ
تُقْتَلي
تقتلى تُقْتَلِينَ قُتِلْتِ
ه و
أَقْتَل
اقتل
اقتل
قتلتُ
يُقْتَلَا
يُقْتَلَا يُقْتَانِ
قتلا
تقتلا
تُقْتَلَا تُقْتَلَانِ قُتِلَنَا
تُقْتَلَا
تُقْتَلَا تُقْتَلَانِ قُتِلْتُمَا
يُقْتَلُوا يُقْتَلُوا يُقْتَلُونَ قُتِلُوا
يُقْتَلْنَ يُقْتَلْنَ | يُقْتَلْنَ قُتِلْنَ
يُقْتَلُوا
تُقْتَلُوا تُقْتَلُونَ قُتِلْتُم
تُقْتَلْنَ تُقْتَلْنَ تُقْتَلْنَ قُتِلْتُنَّ
نقتل
يُقْتَل نقتل
قُتِلْنَا
PARADIGMATA.
7*

TABULA IV.
Paradigma stirpium verbi quadrilitteralis.
Stirps Genus
Perfectum
Imperfectum Imperativus
Participium
Infinitivus
I
Act.
I
Pass.
II
Act.
II
Pass.
مُقَمْطِرْ
يقمطر
قمطر
قمطر
قِمْطَارُ
مُقَمْطَر
يُقَمْطَرُ
تُمْطِرَ
متقمطر
تَقَمْطَرْ
يَتَقَمْطَرُ
تَقَمْطَرَ
مُتَقَمْطر
يتقمطر
تقمطر
8*
PARADIGMATA.

Perfectum
Imperfectum
III
IV
▼
TABULA V.
Paradigma stirpium verbi sani.
Activi
I
II
تقتل
اقتل
قاتل
قتل
قتل
يُقتِل
يُقَاتِلُ
,,
يقَتِلُ
يقتل
أقتل
قَاتِلْ
قتل
قتل
S
متقتل
مقاتل
مقتل
حَاذِلْ
تقتل
اقتِل
قوتِلَ
قُتِلَ
يتقبل
يُقَاتَلُ
يقتل
متقتل
مقتل
مُقَاتَل
مقتل
مقتول
تقتل
إقْتَالُ مُقَاتَلَةٌ vel قِتَالُ
تقتيل قبل
Imperativus
מ
3
Participium
23
Perfectum
Passivi
Imperfectum
Participium
Infinitivus
E
Perfectum
Activi
Imperfectum
Imperativus
Participium
E
VI
VII
VIII
IX
X
PARADIGMATA.
استقتل
اقتل
اقتتل
انقتل
تقاتل
يَسْتَقْتِلُ يَقْتَلُ
ستقتِل
مستقتل
استقيل
يستقتل
مُسْتَقْتَل
اسْتِقْتَالُ انْتِلَال
يَقْتَتِلُ يَنْقَتِلُ يَتَقَاتَلُ
907
نيل
اقتتل
انقيل
يقتتل
ينقتل
G
مُقْتَتَل
مُنقَتَل
تَقَاتَلْ
مُتَقَاتِلٌ
دو
تقويل
يُتَقَاتَلُ
مُتَقَابَل
انْتِتَالُ انْقِتَالُ تَقاتل
Perfectum
Passivi
Imperfectum
Participium
Infinitivus
A
9*
hrains linguae
linguae valde
valde vvisers

"verbum sanum“ male dicitur: verba enim omnia
10*
PARADIUMATA.
TABULA VI.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi mediae geminatao
Imperfectum
Nume- Perfec-
Persona
rus
tum
Imper
tivus
Indica- Subjunc-
A pocopatus
tivus
tivus
3. masc. sing.
3. form.
2. masc.
2. fem.
=
3
1.
3. masc. dual.
3. fem.
2.
=
3. masc. plur.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
n
1.
يمرر يفر
يفر
يغير
تفرر
فرت
در
فررت
فرى
تفرى
تقرينَ
افرز پر تَفَررْتَفِرُ تَفِرُ تَفِرُ
آفرز أير اير اير فَرَرْتُ
1 B
اخر
يَفِرا
تَفِرًا
خيرا
يَفِرُوا
يَقْرِرْنَ
13
فردا
تَفِرُوا
يفرا تهران فرا
نَفِرًا تَفِرانِ فَرَّتَا
تَفِرانِ فَرَرْتُمَا
&
يَفِرُونَ فَرُوا
ررْنَ يَفْرِرْنَ فَرَرْنَ
يَفرِدن
تفرون فررت
ذَفِرُوا
تَفْرِرْنَ تَفْرِرْنَ فَرَرْتُنَّ
تَفْرِرْنَفِرٍ نَفِرٌ نَفِر
PARADIGHMATA.
11*
TABULA VII.
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I vorbi mediae geminatao
Nume- Perfec-
Persona
rug
ta
3. masc. sing.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
=
135
=
=
3. masc. | dual.
3. fem.
"
2.
3. masc. plur.
3. fem.
"
2. masc.
12
2. fem.
1.
=
Imperfectum
Indicati- Subjunc-
Аросорация
7118
tivus
W ,
يفرر يفر يفر
يفر
,
تفرر نفر
تفر
تفر
فرت
&-
تقرر
تفري
تفِرِينَ دَرِد
افرر اثر
افر
B
يُفرا
يُقرا
يُقرانِ فَرَا
1212
M
تَفَرَّان
فُرَّنَا
يفروا
يُفَرُوا
فروا
يفرون
,
يفرون
تقروا
13_09
تفررن
تقررن
نفرر نفر
نفر
نفر
فورتا
يفررن
يقررن
تفرون
وں
تفررن فررتن
12*
PARADIGMATA.

VI
VII
VIII
X
TABULA VII
Paradigma stirpium verbi mediae geminatae contractarum.
I
III
IV
Perfectum Activi
Imperfectum
A
فَارٌ
193
43
14
ورد
يُفَا
G
غرور
Imperativus
Participium
Perfectum Passivi
Imperfectum
Participium
Infinitivus
493
استفر افتر
يستفر
انفر
استفرر افترر انفرد
13
43
منفر
ينفر
>>
فرا
193
زار
43
,
193
اِنْفِرَا
متفـ
43
,
يستفر
مستفر
اِسْتِفَرَا
PARADIGMATA.
13*
TABULA IX.
Paradigma formarum selectarum flexionis
verborum hamzatorum
I. Perf.
Act.
Impf.
❤
Imperat.
""
Partic.
Perf. Pass.
Imperf.
II. Imperf. Act.
Infin.
IV. Perf. Act.
Perf. Pass.
verbi tert.
Verbi sec.
ء .Verbi pr
قواً
كَتِبَ لَأَمَ
أثر
يقرأ يَكْبُ يلام
يَأْتِرُ
إقرا
إِكْتَبْ الْأَمْ
ایتر
lig nig
قاری
لَاثِمٌ
آپر
قرى
ليم
اثر
يَقرا
يُلام
دود
يُقَرِى
pic G pl
يُلَيَّمُ
يُوثِر
تَلْثِيمٌ
تاثیر
اقرا
الام
اثر
الْيَّم
أوثير
اقترا
التام
(اتَّخَذَ) ايتَثَرَ At
(يَتَّخِذُ) يَأْتَتِرُ
يَلْتَثِم
(اتَّخِذَ) اُوتُثر Pass
VIII. Perf.
Imperf.
Perf.
Imperf.
""
94
يَقْتَرِى
K
اقترى
القيم
يُقرا
يُلتام
(يُتَّخَذُ) يُوتَثرُ
14*
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA X.
1
Paradigma flexionis verborum
primae radicalis et
و .Verbi pr
Imperf. i
و
,
ی

Verbi pr. Verbi pr.
Imperf. a
Verbi pr.
sani
,
ی
يوسر
يسر
ايسَرَ
دوسر
موسر
إِيسَارُ
انسر
يسر
پیسر
ايسر
,
وسخ
يوسخ
(أَرْسَنْ إِيجَلْ) دَعْ
يُوسَخ
يتسر
ون
اتسر
استيسر
L L L L L L L L L J J
وَدَعَ
وَصَلَ
يَدَعُ
يَصِلُ
صل
يُودَعُ
يُوصَل
دَعَة
ودع صِلة
I. Perf.
Act.
Imperf.
3
Imperat.
Imperf. Pass.
Infinit.
أودَعَ
أَوْصَلَ
يُوصِلُ
يُودِعُ
مُودِعُ مُوصل
إِيدَاعُ إِيصَال
3
IV. Perf.
Act.
Imperf.
Partic.
اِندَعَ
اِتَّصَلَ
يَندِعُ
يَبْصِلُ
ونت
أُنْدِعَ
أتصل
استوسحَ اسْتَودَعَ اِسْتَوْصَلَ .Act
Infinit.

VIII. Perf.
Act.
Imperf.
Perf. Pass.
X. Perf.
اِسْتِيسَارُ اسْتِيساخ اِسْتِيدَاعُ إِسْتِيصَال
Infinit.
PARADIGNATA.
15*
TABULA XI.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi mediae radicalis

Nume- Perfec-
Persona
rus
tum
Imperfectum
Indicati- | Subjunc- | Apocopa-
vus
tivus
tus
3. masc. sing.
3. fem.
""
2. masc.
2. fem.
Impera-
tivus
قُلْ
وہ
يقل
يَقُولُ قَالَ
يَقُولَ يَقُولُ
تَقُل تَقُولَ تَقُولُ
تَقُولَ تَقُولُ قَالَتْ
تَقُل تَقُول تَقُولُ
قُلْتَ
قولي تقولي تَقُولِي تَقُولِينَ قُلْتِ.
SE
أقل أقُولَ أَقُولُ قُلْتُ
يَقُولَا يَقُولَا يَقُولَان قَالَا
تَقُولَا
تَقُولَا
تَقُولَانِ
قَالَتَا
قُولَا
تَقُولَا
تَقُولَا
قُلْتُمَا
تَقُولَانِ
1.
2
""
3.
masc. dual.
3. fem.
""
2.
وو
3. masc. plur. j
يَقُولُوا يَقُولُوا يَقُولُونَ قَالُوا
يَقُلْنَ يَقُلْنَ يَقُلْنَ تُلْنَ
قُولُوا تَقُولُوا تَقُولُوا تَقُولُونَ قُلْتُمْ
قُلْنَ
وه
تَقُلْنَ تَقُلْنَ تَقُلْنَ قُلْتُنَّ
نَقُولَ نَقُولُ | قُلْنَا
نَقُلْ نَقُولَ
3. fem.
19
2. masc.
2. fem.
"}
1235
1.
16*
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA XII.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi mediae radicalis
ی
Imperfectum
Nume- Perfec-
Impera-
Persona
rus
tum
tivus
Indicati- Subjunc- Apocopa-
Vus
tivus
tus
سير
يميدر
سَار .masc. sing .3 يسير يسير
تَسِيرَ نَسِيرُ
نَسِرٌ
تمير
تسير تسير
سَارَتْ
ـيـرت
سِر
سِيرِى تَسِيرِى تَسِيرِى تَسِيرِينَ
U
E
اسیر
أَسِيرَ أَسِيرُ
,
سرت
=
1:3
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
يَسِيرًا يَسِيرًا يَسِيرَانِ سارا .masc. dual .3
تَسِيرًا تَسِيرًا تَسِيرَانِ سَارَنَا
سِيرًا نَّسِيرًا تَسِيرًا تَسِيرَانِ سِرْتُمَا
3
3. fem.
2.
يَسِيرُوا يَسِيرُوا يَسِيرُونَ ساروا .masc. plur .3
c
سیون
يَسِرْنَ يَسِرْنَ
يسرن
سِيرُوا نَسِيرُوا تَسِيرُوا تَسِيرُونَ
تسرن تسرنَ تَسِرن
سیون تسرن
نَسِيرَ نَسِيرُ
نسير
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
"
1.
""
=
PARADIGMATA.
17*
TABULA XIII.
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I verbi mediae radicalis
Nume- | Perfec-
Persona
rus
3. masc. | sing.
3. fem.
2. masc.
3:3
2. fem.
""
1.
=
3. masc. dual.
vel
,
Imperfectum
ی

tum
Indicativus
Subjunc- | Apocopa-
tivus
tus
يُقَل
يُقَالَ
يُقَالُ
قِيلَ
تقل
تُقَالَ
تُقَالُ
قبلت
تقل
تُقَالَ
يُقَالُ
قلتَ
تُقَالِي
تُقَالِي
تُقَالِينَ قِلْتِ
اقل
أَقَالَ
أَقَالُ
قِلتُ
يُقَالَا
يُقَالَا
يُقَالان قِيلا
تُقَالَا
تُقَالَا
تُقَالَانِ قِيلَتَا
تُقَالَانِ قِلْتُمَا
تُقَالَا
تقالا
3. fem.
2.
يُقَالُوا يُقَالُوا يُقَالُونَ قِيلُوا .masc. plur .3
يُقَلْنَ قِلْنَ
يُقَلْنَ يُقَلْنَ يُقَدِّنَ
تقَالُوا تُقَالُوا تُقَالُونَ قِلْتُمْ
تُقَلْنَ تُقَدْنَ قِلْتُنَّ
تقلن تقلن
تُقَلْنَ
نُقَل
نُقَالَ
B
قلنا
يُقَالُ
3
1353
=
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.2
18*
PARADIGMATA.

TABULA XIV.
Paradigma stirpium verborum mediae
I
I
I
IV
و
et irregularium.
VII
VIII
X
Verb. med. | Verb. med. | Verb. med. Verb. med. Verb. med. Verb. med. | Verb. med.
Perfect. Act.
. . masc. .
Imperf.
Imperat. »
vel
,
ی
vel
,
ی
,
vel
ی
vel و
فَعِل و
فعل ی
فعل و
استقال
اقتال
انقال
اقال
نار
خَافَ
قَالَ
?
استقلت
اقتلت
انْقَلتَ
أقلت
قلت
سود
يَسْتَقِيلُ يَقْتَالُ يَنْقَال يُقِيلُ
يَسِيرٌ
يَقُولُ
\
استقل
اقتل
أَقِلْ
سیر
سْتَقِيلٌ مُقْتَال
مُنْقَال
مُقِيلٌ
سَائِر
فَائِفٌ
قَائِل
اسْتُقِيلَ أُقْتِيلَ انْقِيلَ
سير
خِيفَ قيل
يُسْتَقَالُ يُقْتَالُ يُتعال
يسار
مسْتَقَالَ مُقْتَال مُنقَال مُقَال
اسْتِقَالَة اِقْتِيَالُ اِنْقِيَالُ إِقَالَةٌ
مسير
مَخُوفٌ
6.2 6.6
مَقُولٌ
سير
قول
Particip.
Perfect. Pass.
Imperf.
Particip.
Infinitivus
❤
PARADIGMATA.
19*
TABULA XV.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi ultimae, é

Imperfectum
Persona
Nume- Perfec-
rus
tum
Indica- Subjunc- Apoco-
Impera-
tivus
tivus
tivus patus
3. masc. sing.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
23
1.
3
3. masc. dual.
3. fem.
2.
3. masc. plur.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
"}
""
""
يغزو
يغز
يَغْرُو
تَغْرُ
تَغْزُو
تغزو
غَزَا
ว
غَرَتْ
أَغْرُ تَعْرُ تَعْرُو تَعْرُو غَزَوْتَ
تَغْزِى تَغْزِينَ غَزَوتِ
أُخْرَى تَغْرَى
اغز
E و
اغزو
أفْرُو غَزَوْتُ
يَعْزُوا يَعْزَوَانِ غَزَوَا
تَغْرُوا تَغْزُوَانِ غَزَنَا
زُوَانِ غَزَوْتُمَا
تَغْرُوا تَعْرُوَانِ
أَغْزُوا تَعْزُوا
غزوا
يَعْزُوا يَعْزَون
غزون
يغزون
يغزون
تَغْرُوا تَغْرُونَ
أَغْزُوا تَغْرُوا
غزوتم
غزوتن
تغزون تغزون
أُغْزُونَ تَغْزُونَ
نغزو | نغزو
نغز
فَرُوْنَا
B*
20*
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA XVI.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi ultimae
فَعَلَ ي

Imperfectum
Nume- Perfec-
Impera-
Persona
rus
tum
Indica- Subjunc- Apoco-
tivus
tivus
tivus patus
3. masc. sing.
3. fem.
13
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
>>
"}
3. masc. dual.
3. fem.
"
2.
23
ان
يرم
يرمى يرمى
رمی
ترمی
ترمی
رمت
ارم
رمیت
ترمِی ترمِینَ رَمَيْتِ
ارمى
آرمی
و
رميـ
يَرْمِيَا يَرْمِيَا يَرْمِيَانِ رَمَيَا
تَرْمِيَا تَرْمِيَا تَرْمِيَانِ رَمَتَا
اِرْمِيَا تَرْمِيَا تَرْمِيَا تَرْمِيَانِ رَمَيْتُمَا
يَرْمُوا يَرْمُوا يَرْمُونَ رَمَوا
يرمين يرمين يرمين زمين
يَرْمِينَ رَمَيْنَ
ارْمُوا تَرْمُوا تَرْمُوا تَرْمُونَ رَمَيْتُمْ
اِرْمِينَ تَرْمِينَ تَرْمِينَ تَرْمِينَ رَمَيْتُنَّ
ترم نَرْمِي نَرْمِي رَمَيْنَا
3. masc. plur.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
""
39
""
PARADIGMATA.
21*
TABULA XVII.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi ultimae
vel
,
فعِل
ی

Imperfectum
Nume- Perfec-
Persona
Indica-
rus
tum
Subjunc- Apocopa-
Impera-
tivus
tivus
tivus
tus
3. masc. sing.
يرض
يرضى يرضى
رَضِيَ
ارْضَ
A
ترضَى تَرْضَى رَضِيَتْ
تَرْضَ
ترض ترضَى تَرْضَى رَضِيتَ
ارْضَى تَرْمَى تَرْمَى تَرْضَيْنَ رَضِيتِ
ترضی ترضی
أَرْضَ أَرْضَى أَرْضَى
أَرْضَى رَضِيتُ
""
E
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
""
يَرْضَيَا يَرْضَيَا يَرْضَيَانِ رَضِيَا .masc. (dual .3
تَرْضَيَا تَرْضَيَا تَرْضَيَانِ رَضِيَنَا
وو
ارْضَيَا تَرْضَيَا تَرْضَيَا تَرْضَيَانِ رَضِيتُمَا
3. fem.
2.
يَرْضَوْا يَرْضَوْا يَرْضَوْنَ رَضُوا .masc. plur .3
يرضين يرضين يَرْضَينَ رَضِينَ
=
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
ת
1.
""
3
اِرْضَوْا
تَرْضَوْا تَرْضَوْا تَرْضَوْنَ رَضِيتُمْ
اِرْضَيْنَ تَرْضَيْنَ تَرْضَيْنَ تَرْضَيْنَ رَضِيتُنَّ
فرض نَرْضَى نَرْضَى رَضِينَا
22*
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA XIX.
Paradigma stirpium verborum ultimae
I
verbi ult.
I
verbi ult.
Perfectum
Activi
Imperfectum
Imperativus
Participium
فَعَلَ
Perfectum Passivi
Imperfectum
Participium
Infinitivus
وا
فَعَلَ
ی
I
verbi ult.
Tel
و
فَعِلَ
ی
ى et
H
Ш
verbi alt, verbi alt.
,
rel
ی
ی Tel
IV
rerbi ult.
Tel S
يُقَضِي
يرضى
قاضی
ارم
مُقَضٌ
راضِ
اقضِ
مُقَاضِ
يُقْضَى يُقَاضى
مقضى مقاصی
Tel
قضاء
إقصاء
مُقَاصَاةٌ
رضى
๓)
یرمی
يغرك
یمی
PARADIOMATA.
23*
VI
VI
VIII
verbi ult.
verbi ult.,
verbi ult.
verbi ult.
>
,
Perfectum
Activi
Imperfectum
Imperativus
Participium
R
X
verbi ult.
ی Tel
ی Tel
ی rel
ی vel
ی Tel
اسْتَقْضَى
اقتضى
انقضى
يست
نَاضَى
يتقاضى
استقفر
اقتَضِ
مستقد
مقتصد
مُنقَضِ
تَقْضِي أَقْتُضِي
انقضى
تقُونِي تُقضى
يُسْتَقْضَى يُقْتَضَى
يُنقَضَى
يتقاض
مست
منقضی
مُقْتَضَى
مُتَقَاضي
اسْتِقْضَاء اِنتِصَاء
ـقِضَاءِ
تَفَاضِ
Perfectum Passivi
Imperfectum
Participium
Infinitivus
24*
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA XVIII.
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I verbi ultimae vel
,
ی
Imperfectum
Persona
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
tum
Indicativus
Subjunc- | Apocopa-
tivus
tus
3. masc. | sing.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1:35
THE RE
1.
1235
3. masc. dual.
3. fem.
2.
13
"}
يقض
يقضى
يُقْضَى
نیستی
نقض
تقضی
تُقْضَى
قضیت
تُقْضَ
تقضی
تقضی
قُضِيتَ
وہ
تقضَى نُقْضَ
سی
تقضين
قُضِيتِ
أقضَى
اقص
اقضی
قُضِيتُ
يُقْضَيَا يُقضَيَا يُقْضَيَانِ قُضِيَا
تُقْضَيَا نُقْضَيَا تُقْضَيَانِ قُضِيَنَا
تَقضَيَانَ قُضِيتُمَا
نُقْضَيَا تُقضَيَ
يُقْضَوا يُقْضَوا يُقْضَوْنَ قَضوا
قُضِينَ
يُقضَيْنَ يُقْضَيْنَ يُقْضَيْنَ
تُقْضَوا تُقْضَوا تُقْضَوْنَ قُضِيتُمْ
وہ
تُقضَيْنَ تُقضَيْنَ تُقضَيْنَ
قُضِيتُنَّ
نُقْضَى تُضِينَا
نُقْضَى نُقْضَى
نقض
3. masc. plur.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
33
=
""
PARADIGMATA.
25*
TABULA XX.
Paradigma flexionis nominis
a) generis masculini
a) triptoti
determinati
determinati in
indeterminati
cum articulo
statu constructo
Sing. Nom.
Gen.
Acc.
قَصَّابُ
الْقَصَّابُ قَصَّابُ
قَصَّابِ
الْقَصَّابِ قَصَّابِ
قَصَّابَ
قَصَّابًا
الْقَصَّابَ
Dual. Nom.
الْقَصَّابَانِ قَصَّابَانِ
قَصَّابًا
قَصَّابَيْ
الْقَصَّابَيْنِ فَصَّابَيْنِ Gen. Acc
قصابو
الْقَصَّابُونَ قَصَّابُونَ
Plur. Nom.
قَصَّابِي
الْقَصَّابِينَ قَصَّابِينَ .Gen. Acc
3) diptoti
آخَرُ
الاخر
آخر
آخر
آخر
2112
الْآخَرِ
آخر
الآخر
آخر
آخرا
الْآخَرَانِ
آخَرَانِ
آخَرَكْ
الاخرين
آخَرَينِ
Sing. Nom.
Gen.
Acc.
Dual. Nom.
Gen. Acc.
26*
PARADIGMATA.
determinati
determinati in
cum articulo statu constructo
آخَرُو
indeterminati
Plur. Nom.
الْآخَرُونَ آخَرُونَ
Acc.
آخَرِى الْآخَرِينَ آخَرِينَ Gen Ao.
TABULA XXI.
b) generis feminini
a) triptoti
G
Sing. Nom.
Gen.
Acc.
سَاعَةُ
اَلسَّاعَةُ
سَاعَة
سَاعَة
السَّاعَةِ
ساعة
السَّاعَةَ
سَاعَةَ
سَاعَة
السَّاعَتَانِ سَاعَتَانِ
سَاعَنَا
Dual. Nom.
سَاعَتَى السَّاعَتَيْنِ سَاعَتَيْنِ .Gen. Acc
سَاعَات
سَاعَاتُ السَّاعَاتُ
Plur. Nom.
Gen.-Acc. lalu
سَاعَاتٍ
Sing. Nom.
Gen. Acc.
و
B) diptoti
مية
سَاعَاتِ السَّاعَاتِ
ceterum idem
PARADIGMATA.
27*
TABULA XXII.
generis masculini in
desinentis.
determinati determinati in
قاضی
الْقَاضِي
الْقَاضِيَ
قَاضِيَ
قاضيا
indeterminati
cum articulo statu constructo
Sing. Nom.-Gen.
Acc.
Dual. Nom.
قَاضِ
قَاضِيا
قَاضِيَي
قَاضُو
قاضی
أَلْقَاضِيَانِ قَاضِيَانِ
Gen.-Acc.
الْقَاضِيَيْنِ فَاضِيَيْنِ .Gen. Acc
الْقَاضُونَ قَاضُونَ
Plur. Nom.
الْقَاضِينَ قَاضِينَ .Gen. Acc
b) nominis in, desinentis.
a) triptoti
{
مُصْطَفَى الْمُصْطَفَى مُصْطَفَى )
مُصْطَفَيَا الْمُصْطَفَيَانَ مُصْطَفَيَان
Sing. Nom.-
Gen.-Acc.
Dual. Nom.

مُصْطَفَيَى الْمُصْطَفَيَيْن مُصْطَفَيَيْن .Gen-Acc
مُصْطَقَ الْمُصْطَفَوْنَ مُصْطَفَوْنَ
Plur. Nom.
مُصْطَفَى الْمُصْطَفَيْن مُصْطَفَيْنَ Gen-Acc
28*
PARADIGMATA.
Sing. Nom.-
Gen.-Acc.
Dual. Nom.
Sing. Nom.-
Gen.-Acc.
id.
determinati
determinati in
indeterminati
cum articulo statu constructo
عَصَا
اَلْعَصَا
عَمَّا
عَصَوا
الْعَصَوَان عَصَوَان
B) diptoti
ذِكْرَى
الذِكْرَى
ذِكْرَى
دُنْيَا
الدُّنْيَا
دُنْيَا
TABULA XXIII.
Paradigma nominis cum suffixis.
G
a) nominis masc. in singulari positi; fem..
cum suffixo 1. pers. sing.
"
2
£
A
3
3
""
3
""
2
دو
2.
2.
3. "
3. "
2. " dualis
3. "
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
""
13
:
❤
جَارِيَتِي .fem قَصَّابِي
قَصَّابُكَ .masc
تصابك .fem
قَصَّابُكِ
قَصَّابِهِ .gen) قَصَّابُهُ .masc.
قَصَّابُهَا .fem
قَصَّابُكُمَا
(قَصَّابِهِمَا .gen) قَصَّابُهُمَا
قَصَّابُنَا
قَصَّابُكُمْ
قَصَابُكُنَّ fem.
(قَصَّابِهِمْ .gen) قَصَّابُهُمْ
(قَصَّابِهِنَّ .gen تَصَّابُهُنَّ em.
pluralis
"
msc.
msc.
PARADIGMATA.
29*
قَصَّابَايَ
b) nominis in duali positi.
Nominativus cum suffixo 1.pers. sing.
.etc قَصَّابَاكَ .msc.
قَصَّابَى
قَصَّابَيْكَ .msc
قَصَّابَيه
""
2. "
2
,,
1. "
2.
3.
>>
3
3.
""
.etc قَصَّابَيْهَا .fem
Gen:-Acc.
29
"
c) nominis masculini in plurali positi.
Nominativus cum suffixo 1. pers. sing.
قَصَّابِيَّ
.etc قصابوك
تَصَّابِي
2. "
"> msc.
قَصَّابِيكَ .msc
1. "
2. "
""
قصابيه msc "
.etc قَصَّابِيهَا .fem.
3
3
""
Gen.-Acc.
3
=
"
n 3. "
" 3. »
d) nominis feminini in plurali positi.
Nom.-Gen.-Acc. cum suff. 1. pers. sing.
سَاعَاتِي
سَاعَاتُكَ .msc.
.etc سَاعَاتُه
سَاعَاتِكَ
etc سَاعَاتِه
2. »
"}
=
3. "
99 2.
11:35
,,
3. "
=
3:3
3
"}
Nominativus "
"}
"}
Gen.-Acc.
">
"
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
I.
A. EXERCISES IN READING.
الكتاب معرفة يقبضون نظلم ذخيرة تهتدى جميع
وصلنا فريق غالب ثمین اسكنوا رجز خطط خلف
بالغ هروبة شمس فرزدق بصل عام اضطرمت قال
محسنات
1.
يغلظ تحرث تفلح ماض تشبه سلوك طاف حججح باع ورش
درج وظيفة شاه تقنص يلحقك صحابة
قُتِلَ يُضْرَبُ دَاعٍ ظُهُورٌ نَوْمٌ يَعْلَبُ مِيزَانِ صَلوةٌ ..
ضَيْعَةٌ شُوَاطٌ كُبْرَى تِيه رقّى وَيْلًا مَشرُوبٍ غِرَارَةً لَوْمًا
رضی
يَسْتَبِهُونَ نَجَجًا مُسْتَدَاقَ سُفْلَى بُلغُوا تَحْضَرَةً سَقَوا
حديَا مَختُومُ تَرْدَلِعُ سُبِقُوا سُلَيْمَنُ *
إبْلِيسُ تَألفُونَ أَسَدًا مُونِ أَعْبِنَا أَنْزَلَ إِمْضَاه ..
مَعْلُوهُ صَأَنْ يُطَاطِئُ مِلْ: هَيبا هراة مؤتمر كَيْب
هَنِيئًا
مشنوءة
بَطُوِّ زَائِلٌ حَمْرَاءُ يَبْدَأَ مَلَاكَ يَجِي *
4.
EXERCISES IN READING.
31*
وبتحب المتوفى أُمَّ يُسَيِّبُونَ التَّقَطُ الشَّلِيعُ تَشَرًا
الظَّالِمِينَ مَقْضِى الدَّلرُ الطَّحَانَ الصِّدِّيقُ الحَيَّة
أَحَضِرُ التَّرَاءِ الْقُنَّاءَةُ الذَّهَبِيُّ اللَّهُمُ الْمُصَلَّى السَّيَّارَةُ
اللهُ الْقَصَّابَ الإِيْلُ الْمُفَتِشُ التَّطْهِيرُ يُرَدُّ *
قَامَ الرَّسُولُ * اِعْتَزَلَ الْفَرِيقُ * فَاتَّبِعُوهُ وَلَا تَتَّبِعُوا
,
السَّبُلَ القَرْبُ اشْهَدْ * حِرْبُ اللهِ * ثم الْعَالِمُونَ *
*
هُمُ
عَلَى السَّطْح * عُمَرُ بْن الْحَرِدِ * قَوْم افْتَرَقُوا * بِسْمِ
Bur
الرَّحْمنِ * زَيْدِ الطَّبِيلِ * إِنِ انْقَضَى الأَمْرُ * لَلصَّبْرُ
الْجَمِيلُ * عُيُونَا أَنْبَسَطَ ** مَانَتِ الصَّبِيَّةُ فِي الْبَيْتِ *
اِشْتَرَوُا القِيرَانَ * عَنِ الطُّوفَانِ * عَيْنَى الْإِنْسَانِ *
الافتراء * لِلصَّالِيَةِ *
مَلاَنْ آخِرًا تَسَاءلُوا سَائِقُ قَضَاؤُهُ آذَى أَقْرَبَاء آفَةٌ
وَزَرَاء أَعْدَائِهِ يَجِيُّونَ *
ទ
الْعَالَمِينَ يُؤْمِنُ إِلَيْهِمْ كُلٌّ مَادَّةٌ هُدًى رَحْمَةٌ وَدَعَا
يُفْتَرَى يُحِيَ يَنْظُرُوا وَلِيَّةُ السَّمَوَاتِ الرَّحْمَنُ تَأْتِيَهُمْ
اتَّبَعَنِي اِسْتَعْجَلَ الْمَلَائِكَةُ اِمْشِ تَحْمِلُهُ اِخْتَلَفُوا بَشَرٌ
أمَدَّكُمْ كَذَّبُوهُ يُوبِقَهُنَّ بَيْنَهُمْ مَسْقَطَةٌ يَشَاءُ *
5.

6.
7.
8. 9.
32*
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
B. EXERCISES ON THE ETYMOLOGY.
بَشْرَ اجْتَذَبَ تَحَارَبَ أَحْزَنَ حَسُنَ تَمَرَّغَ غَضِبَ 29-1.
اسْتَحَبَ اضْطَجَعَ انْطَلَقَ شَاهَدَ اِخْضَرْ اطَّلَعَ عَمِلَ
أَقْبَلَ تَنَصَّرَ صَدَّقَ تَزَلْزَلَ أَسْتُعْمِلَ مُولِجَ طُحِنَ انْتُزِعَ
تقبل قربَ أَصْلِمَ تَقُومِرَ اصْطَرِبَ زُلْزِلَ *
خَبَرْتُ خَتَمَنَا أَخْرَجَتْ يَرْكَبُ أحْسُنَ اِرْتَعَدْتُمْ تُرَضِعُ 33-0.
أَرْزَقُ يَرْجِعُونَ افْتَحْ حَمَلَا تَحْهَدُ اِحْتَفِظُ يُدْفَعَانِ أَدْرَكُوا
نَسْتُر يَرْغَبُوا نَتَكَلَّمُ أَقْعُدِى كَبُرْتُنَّ يَنْخَرِقُ أَظْهِرْتَ
تَتَحَارَبُ لِقِبَنَا يَتَكَبْرُ يُقبهُنَ اخْتُبِرْتِ يَنْكَشِفَ
تُقْسِمُ اِفْتَرَقُوا نَكَرَهُ
تقيم افترقوا نكره تَسْتَخْرِحِينَ تَقَدَّمُوا نَاشَدْنَا
يُنتَزَعُ أَسْنِدُوا شَرِبْتُمْ تُسَلِّطِي امْتَنَعْنَا الْبَثُوا غَسَلْتُ
تُشْرِفُونَ تُفَاخِرُ يُلْتَحَنَّ يَسْتَنْكِحُ تُتَفَقَدُ أَقْدَرنَا
أَعْلَمْنَ الْبِسُوا فَزِعَنَا تَعَرَّضُ يُسْنَدُوا اِحْتَفِرُوا نَاكِتَها
-- دو
W
رَدَدْنَا يَضُمُونَ أَحْبَبْتِ يَنفَك صُبّ نَرْتَدَّ شَدِى خَروا 36-34.
استتبَّتْ يُقرر هَمَمْتُم تُزَنِين تنقض جُرُوا يَعزِزن احِبوا
تُحِلُّ مُرٌّ شَدِدْتَ نَسْتَفِرٌ تَصْدُدْ *
EXERCISES ON THE ETYMOLOGY.
33*
37-38
يَأْكُل مُرُوا تُؤْمِنِينَ نَتَّخِذُ يَسْتَأْذِنُونَ تُؤْخَرُ ابْتَلَفْنَا
ايلَف آكِلُوا بَرُّسْنَا يَسْتَثْثِرُ تَشَاءَمْتُمْ يُبْطِئُ بَطُوتِ
ابْدَأُ نَسْتَبْطَأُ تَنَبَّأَتُ اِمْتَلَدُّنَ نَخْطَئِينَ نَتِتْنَا يُطَاطِئُ *
رِدُوا يَوْسَنُ أُوسِعَتْ تَصِفُ تَرَكُوا أَسْتُولِدَ تَتَّعِدُ
نَتَوَاضَعَ يَصِلُوا تَفِدِينَ دَعُوا نَقِفُ يُوَكَّلُ تَوَجَّهْنَ
يُوجِبُ يَيْأَسُ اسْتَيْقَطْنَا تُوقِظُ ايقَظْ تَرِدُ *
سو
جُرْتَ تَقُومُ أَشَرْنَا مِرْ طِرْتُمْ أَيْمْ بَاعُوا تَسْتَعِينُ
اِعْوَجَتْ يَحْتارُ يُمَيِّرُونَ مُتِ خُيّلا كُنْ يَبِعْنَ أَبِينُوا
خِفْتُمَا أُخْتِرْنَا نَنَامُ يُرِيدَانِ تَزَوَّجْتِ أَطِيعُوا يَنْهَارُ
اِنْهَارَتْ يَسْتَعِذْ أَطَلْتَ غَيَّرْتُمْ يَتَصَايَحُوا نَمْ لِمْنَا تَلْ
خَافُوا أَسْتَعِينَ يُرَدَّ جُدْنَا *
وہ و
يَمْشِي أَمْسَيْتُ غَدَوْنَا أَمْضِ لَقِيَتْ نَتَغَدَّى عَمُوا
تَنتَهِينَ يُصَلُّونَ أُفْضِي اقْتَنِيتْ تَنجُو انقَضَتْ بَكَيْتَ
بلِينَا تُبْلَوْا يَكْفِيَانِ فَنِ نَادَيْتُمْ يَنْبَغِي اِسْتَتَنَيْتُ
تَعْفِينَ تُبْنَى اشْتَرُوا اسْتُرُوا اشْتَرُوا يُكنَوْنَ يَتَنَم
اِرْمُوا أَدْرَيْتُ رَخُوتِ ارْضَى نَسمْ نُودِيَتْ دَنَتْ *
Socin, Arabic Grammar.2
C
40.
41-44.
45-48.
34*
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
يومون
يَلِي تُوقِيَتْ نَطْوِي نَشَاء يَومُ
تَرَيْن أَر أَرَيْتَ نَجِي يَوَدُّ *
اِنقَتْ جِدُّنَا يَرَوْنَ
49.
جَعَلْنَاهُ نُقبِتُها تَرْمِيهِمْ أَجَبْنَاكُمْ يَبِيعُكِ حَرَّكْتُمُوهُ 53.
نَشْتَرِيهِ يَتْرُكُوكُمَا لُمْنِى يُحِبُّنَا يَفْتَحْهَا يُعَالِجُونَنِي مَنَعُوكَ
ظَلَمْنَاهُنَّ يُحَدِّتُكُنَّ يُنَادِيهِمَا *
خَادِمٌ مُرْتَعِدُ مُخْرَجٌ مُسَلَّطٌ مَكْتُوبٌ مُحْتَضَرٌ مُتَحَارِبُ 61-80.
تحرك مُجْتَمِعَ فَاكِلٌ مُتَّبَعَ مُضْطَجِعْ مُنَاكُمْ عَمَلٌ مُفَاخَرَةٌ
إِقْسَامُ فَتُمْ مُسْتَخْرِج تَحْرِيمُ تَحَارُبُ الْقِصَاى نجود
مُتَمَسِكُ إِظْهَارُ تَكَلَّمْ نِكَاحُ تَزَعْزُعُ إِنْكِشَافُ اِسْتِقْبَالُ

S
مَعْمُولُ تَقْرِيبٌ مُتَفَقَدْ **
وہ
سَمَّ اِنْفِكَاكَ أَذَنْ مُنْقَضٌ حَاجَ اسْتِتَبَابٌ يُحِبُّ مُرتَد 71-67
مَرْفُوفٌ مُسْتَقَرٌّ أَعَزُّ اَكِلُّ مَأْمُورٌ إِيمَانْ مُتَّخِذُ مُؤَخَّر
مَعْلُو قُرْآنَ إِبْطَاءِ مُمْتَلِيٌّ مُبْطَأَ وَسَلَّم إِنسَاءً مُتَعَدِّ
صِفَةٌ اِسْتِيلَاهُ مُوجِبٌ مُوقَظٌ وَضْعُ تَوكِيلُ بَيْعٌ خَوْفٌ
مُقِيمٌ صَائِرُ اخْتِيَارُ نَائِمٌ مُمَيَّرُ مُقَارٌ تَصَادِمٌ إِطَاعَةً
مُخَيَّل مُنْهَارُ مَيِّتْ مُعْوَجٌ مَخُوفٌ
W
استعانة تزوج
تمويتُ الْقِيَادُ تَغيِيرُ مُسْتَقِيمٌ سُوقُ مَقَامُ مَغِيبٌ
EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX.
35*
211693
مَشَى رَهْو مَقْضِى مُمْ اِقْتِنَاء مُفْشَى مُتَعَدِ فَانٍ
مُنَادَاةٌ تَنَ
تَنَحٌ مُسْتَثْنِّى مَدْعُو اِنْبِغَاء جَفَاء رِضَى غَنِيٌّ
693
مُعْطَى تَسْمِيَة مُنتَهى بَقَاءَ مُضِي عَدُوٌّ
سُيُون أَدْيَانَ رُؤُوسُ رِجَالٌ عُمَّالٌ مَسَاكِرُ جَمْ
أَسْمِكَةٌ عَوَاشِ حُجَجْ أَبْيَاتٌ مُحُفْ رُوسَاء أَرْجُلٌ أَغْنِيَاء
صُفْرٌ عَجَائِبُ عَبِيدٌ عِبَادٌ صُورٌ بَوَاطِنُ مَلَابِسُ أَمْكِنَةٌ
رُعَاةٌ جُهَّلْ قَتْلَى رَعَايَا عَقَارِيتُ أَقرباء آلِهَةً سَكَارَى
أَمْطَارُ مَمَالِكُ نَسَم نجوم نُوقَ بيرَانُ أَيْقَامُ السُنَّ
كَرَادِيسُ أَقْوَال عَشَائِرُ سُودٌ سُودَانٌ سُرُوجُ مِحَاحٌ
مَلَائِكَةُ مَرَاعٍ عُمَى دَوَابٌ دَرَاهِمُ رِيَاحُ زَوَايَا سَوَاعِدُ
سَادَةٌ شُهُودٌ آثار *
E و
C. EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX.
1
ضَرَبَ عَمْرُو غُلَامًا لَهُ * نَزَلَ الْمُؤْمِنُونَ عَلَى بَابِ
الدَّارِ * أُحِلَّ لَكُمْ صَيْدُ الْبَحْرِ وَطَعَامُهُ * كَانَتِ
النِّسَاء فِي الْجَاهِلِيَّةِ يُطَلِقْنَ الرِّجَالَ * كَانَ عَبْدُ
2
1
$ 130.
2 § 99 c.
*0
88.89.
135-138.
36*
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
3
اللَّهِ عَائِلًا مَاهِرًا فِي الْعُلُومِ * قَالَتِ الْيَهُودُ وَالنَّصَارَى
نَحْنُ أَبْنَاء اللّهِ وَأَحِبَّاؤُهُ * وَلَى الْأَعْدَاء هَارِبِينَ *
كَانَ النَّبِيُّ يَعُودُ الْمَريضَ وَيَتْبَعُ الْجَنَائِزَ وَيُجَالِسُ
الفقراء * قَالَ قَائِلٌ مِنْهُمْ لَا تَقْتُلُوا يُوسُفَ *
تَمَرَّغَ مُوسَى بَيْنَ يَدَيِ اللَّهِ تَوَاضُعًا لَهُ * قَدْ جَعَلَ
الله قُلُوبَهُمْ فَاسِيةٌ * قَاتَلَهُمُ ابْنُ الْعَبَّاسِ قِتَالًا
"
شَدِید | 12
*
13
10
ا
أَصْبَحَ النَّاسُ مِن النَّادِمِينَ * أَمَرَ اللَّهُ رَسُولَهُ
بِالْهِجْرَةِ وَفَرَضَ عَلَيْهِ جِهَادَ الْكُفَّارِ * أَنْزَلَتِ التَّوْرية
عَلَى مُوسَى عَلَيْهِ السَّلَامُ * أَقَامَ مُحَمَّدٌ بِمَكَّةَ
ثَلَاثَ عَشْرَةَ سَنَةَ * أَعُوذُ بِاللَّهِ مِنَ الشَّيْطَانِ
14
-
0 -
16
الرَّحِيمِ * يَقْبِضُ اللَّهُ الْأَرْضَ يَوْمَ الْقِيَامَةِ وَيَطْوِى
السَّمَاءِ بِيَمِينِهِ ثُمَّ يَقُولُ أَنَا الْمَلِكُ أَيْنَ مُلُوكُ
الْأَرْضِ * أَتَّبِعُوا فِي هَذِهِ الدُّنْيَا لَعْنَةً " * كَانَ وَرَقَةً
مدونه
19
17
ابْنُ نَوْفَل قَدْ قَرَأَ الْكُتُبَ وطَلَبَ الْعِلْمَ وَرَغِبَ عَنْ
18
§ 110. 149. 2 § 136 c 2. 3 § 124. 4 § 113b. 5 § 118 c. 6 § 137 d.
1
7
§ 121a. 8 § 101 b.
4 § 92b. 15 § 113 a.
9
§ 113 d. 10 § 108. 11 § 126. 12 § 109. 13 § 110.
16 § 141.
17 § 108. 18 § 6f2. 19 § 98 ef. 20 § 116.
EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX.
37*
1
عِبَادَةِ الأَوْتَانِ وَبَشِّرَ خَدِيجَةَ بِالنَّبِي وَأَنَّهُ نَبِيٌّ
2
هذِهِ الْأُمَّةِ وَأَنَّهُ سَيُوذَى وَيُكَذِّبُ * التَّواضع سلم
الشرف
EU
*
3
الْعَبِيدُ ثَلَاثَةٌ عَبْدُ رِقٍ وَعَبْدُ شَهْوَةٍ وَعَبْدُ
505
طَمَع * لَهُمْ مَغْفِرَةٌ وَأَجْرٌ عَظِيمٌ * لِكُلِّ شَيْءٍ رَأْسٌ
ورَاسُ الْمَعْرُوفِ تَعْجِيلُهُ * قُلُوبُ الأَحْرَارِ قُبور
الْأَسْرَارِ * اَلسَّامِعُ شَرِيكَ الْقَائِلِ فِي الشَّرِ * الْأَقَارِبُ
هُمُ الْعَقَارِبُ * اَلتَّفَكُرُ نُورٌ وَالْعَفْلَةُ ظُلَمَةٌ وَالْجَهَالَهُ
ضَلَالَةٌ وَالْعِلْمُ حَيوةٌ * مِنْ عَلَامَةِ الْأَحْمَقِ الْجُلُوسُ
فَوْقَ الْقَدْرِ وَالْحِي فِي غَيْر الْوَقْتِ الْمُلُوكُ حُكام
عَلَى النَّاسِ وَالْعُلَمَاء حُكّام عَلَى الْمُلُوكِ * أَحْسَنُ
الكنوز مَحَبَّةُ الْقُلُوبِ * نَشَاطُ الْمُتَكَلِّمِ بِقَدْرِ إِقْبَالِ
السَّامِع * قَالَ النَّبِيُّ الفَحْرُ فِي الْإِسْلَامِ بِالتَّقْوَى *
الْعُدْرُ الْجَمِيلُ خَيْرٌ مِنَ الْمَطْلِ الطَّوِيلِ إِحْدَى
مَوَاجِبِ الرَّحْمَةِ إِطْعَامُ الْأَخِ الْمُسْلِمِ الْجَائِعِ * الْبِطْنَةُ
تُذْهِبُ الْفِطْنَةَ * حُسْنُ الْخُلْقِ رَمَامٌ مِنْ رَحْمَةِ
1 8 147a, 148 note.
2 § 99a, cf. note b. 3 § 123.
139 ff.
38*
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
و
الْمَلَكِ
اللَّهِ تَعَالَى فِي أَنْفِ صَاحِبِهِ وَالرِّمَامُ بِيَدِ
وَالْمَلَكُ يَجْرُهُ إِلَى الخَيْرِ وَالْخَيْرُ يَجرَّهُ إِلَى الجَنَّةِ
تُحِبُّ وَالْبَعْضُ يُتَوَارَتَانِ * اَلصَّدِيقُ الْأُلُوفُ لَا يُبَاعُ
بالألُونِ * اَلْمُنَافِقُ يُعْطِيكَ لِسَانَهُ وَيَمْنَعُكَ قَلْبَهُ *
إن الظَّالِمِينَ لَهُمْ عَذَابٌ أَلِيمٌ * أَلَمْ تَرَ أَن اللَّهَ 147.
أنْزَلَ مِنَ السَّمَاءِ مَاءً فَتُصْبِحُ الْأَرْضُ مُحْضَرَّهُ إِنَّ اللَّهَ
أيها النبي حرض المُؤْمِنِينَ
W
لَطِيفٌ خَبِيرٌ * يَا
علَى الْقِتَالِ * إِنَّا أَنْزَلْنَا إِلَيْكَ الْكِتَابَ بِالْحَقِ *
إنَّ اللَّهَ حَرَّمَ الجَنَّةَ عَلَى الْمُتَكَتِرِينَ * إِنَّ اللَّهَ يُحِبُّ
الْمُحْسِنِينَ * يَا اللَّهُ إِنَّكَ أَنتَ لَعَلَّامُ الْغُيُوبِ *
إِنَّ الْآخِرَةَ هِيَ دَارُ الْقَرَارِ * إِنَّ اللَّهَ لَسَرِيعُ
الْحِسَابِ * إِنَّ الْمُنَافِقَ يُسِيءُ كُلَّ يَوْمٍ فَلَا يَعْتَذِرُ *
إِنَّ فِي ذلِكَ لَآيَاتٍ
ذلِكَ لَآيَاتٍ إِنَّ فِي ذَلِكَ لَعِبْرَةً لِأُولى
الْأَبْصَارِ * إِنَّهُ لَا يُفْلِحُ الظَّالِمُونَ * جَلَسَ
الإِسْكَنْدَرُ لِلنَّاسِ يَوْمًا فَلَمْ يَسْأَلْهُ أَحَدٌ حَاجَةً فَقَالَ
لِجُلَسَائِهِ إِنِّي لَا أَعُدُّ هُذَا الْيَوْمَ مِنْ أَيَّامٍ مُلْكِى *
2
1 § 134.
2 § 152.
EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX.
39*
قَالَ بُقْرَاطُ اسْتَهِينُوا بِالْمَوْتِ فَإِنَّ مَرَارَتَهُ فِي خَوْفِهِ *
الدُّنْيَا كَأَنَّكَ عَابِرُ سَبِيلٍ وَعُدِ نَفْسَكَ فِي
أَصْحَابِ الْقُبُورِ * رَزَقَكُمُ اللهُ مِنَ الطَّيِّبَاتِ لَعَلَّكُمْ
في
1
تَشْكُرُونَ
تَمَامُ الْمُرُوءَةِ خِدْمَةُ الرَّجُلِ ضَيْفَهُ * الْقُلُوبُ
أَوْعِيَةُ وَالشَّفَاهُ أَقْفَالُهَا وَالأَلْسُنُ مَفَاتِيحُهَا فَلْيَحْفَظُ
كُلَّ إِنْسَانِ مِفْتَاحَ سِرهِ * تَصَدَّقَ أَبُو الْأَسْوَدِ عَلَى
سَائِلِ بِتَمْرَةٍ فَقَالَ لَهُ جَعَلَ اللَّهُ نَصِيبَكَ مِنَ الْجَنَّةِ
5w w
مِثْلَهَا * لَا تُودِعُ سِرَّكَ إلَى طَالِبِهِ فَالطَّالِبُ لِلسر
*
مُدِيعٌ
مَا نَحْنُ بِتَارِكِي آلِهَتِنَا * الْكُفَّارُ مَا هُمْ بِخَارِجِينَ
مِنَ النَّارِ * مَا رَبُّكَ بِظَلَّامٍ لِلْعَبِيدِ * الظَّالِمُونَ
مَا لَهُمْ مِنْ وَلِي * مَا مِنَ الْأَعْمَالِ شَيْءٍ أَحَبُّ إِلَيَّ
مِنْ ثَلَاثَةِ إِشْبَاعِ جَوْعَةِ الْمُسْلِمِ وَقَضَاءَ دَيْنِهِ وَتَنْفِيسِ
كُرْبَتِهِ * لَا يَسْتَوِي الْخَبِيثُ وَالطَّيِّبُ * قَالَ مُعَاوِيَةُ
1 § 131.
2 § 101 a note.
3 § 152.
4 § 98 d.
5 § 132.
6 $ 144.
7 § 141.
40**
EXERCISLS AND TEXTS.
كُلُّ النَّاسِ أَقْدِرُ أُرْضِيهِمْ إِلَّا حَاسِدٍ نِعْمَةٍ فَإِنَّهُ لَا
يُرْضِيهِ إِلَّا زَوَالُهَا * لَا يَتَكَبر إلا كل وضيع ولا
يَتَوَاضَعُ إِلَّا كُلَّ رَفِيع * مَا نُرْسِلُ الْمُرْسَلِينَ إِلَّا
2
مُبَشِّرِينَ وَمُنَذِرِينَ *
نهى
أُوحِيَ إِلى هَذَا الْقُرْآنُ لِأُنذِرَكُمْ بِهِ * يَنْبَغِي 100
الإنسان أَن يَجْتَنِبَ مُعَاشَرَةُ الأَشرَار وَيَتْرُكَ مُصَاحَبَةَ
الْفُجَّار
لَا يَكُونُ الصَّدِيقُ صَدِيقًا حَتَّى يَحْفَظَ
أَخَاهُ فِي ثَلَاثِ فِي نَكْبَتِهِ وَغَيْبَتِهِ وَوَفَاتِهِ *
رَسُولُ اللَّهِ أَنْ يُتْبِعَ الرَّجُلُ بَصَرَهُ لقَمَةَ أَخِيهِ *
إِنَّمَا يُرِيدُ الشَّيْطَانُ أَنْ يُوقِعَ بَيْنَكُمُ الْعَدَاوَةَ وَالْبَغْضَاءِ
فِي الْخَمْرِ وَالْمَيْسِرِ وَيَصُدَّكُمْ عَنْ ذِكْرِ اللَّهِ وَعَنِ
الصَّلوةِ
إن الْعَائِلَ يَتَّعِظُ بالأدب وَالْبَهَائِمُ لَا تَتَّعِظُ
إِلَّا بِالضَّرْبِ * قَالُوا آمَنَّا بِأَفْوَاهِهِمْ وَلَمْ تُؤْمِنْ
قُلُوبُهُمْ * أَوَأَمِنَ أَهْلُ الْقُرَى أَنْ يَأْتِيَهُمْ بَأْسُنَا
1 S 151.
2 § 113 b.
3 § 157.
EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX.
41*
فُحَى وَهُمْ يَلْعَبُونَ * سَوَاء عَلَيْهِمْ أَأَنذَرْتَهُمْ أَمْ
لَمْ تُنْذِرْهُمْ **
قَالُوا يَا أَمِيرَ الْمُؤْمِنِينَ فِي الدَّارُ الَّتِي كُنَّا
نَسْكُنُهَا مِنْ قَبْلُ * الَّذِينَ آمَنُوا وَعَمِلُوا الصَّالِحَاتِ
سَنُدْخِلُهُمْ جَنَّاتٍ تَجْرى مِنْ تَحْتِهَا الْأَنْهَارُ خَالِدِينَ
EE
فِيهَا أَبَدًا * قَالَ اللَّهُ يَا عِيسَى ابْنَ مَرْيَمَ ا انت
قُلْتَ لِلنَّاسِ الْخِذُونِي وَأَقِمِي الهَيْن مِن دُونِ اللَّهِ *
W
قَاتَلَ جَيْشُ الْمُسْلِمِينَ الْأَعْدَاء حَتَّى انْهَزَمُوا *
مَثَلُ الْمَلِكِ الَّذِي يُعَمِرُ خَزَائِنَهُ بِأَمْوَالِ الرَّعَايَا
كَمَثَلِ الَّذِي يُطَيِّنُ سَطْحَ بَيْتِهِ بِالتَرَابِ الَّذِي
يقتلِعُهُ مِنْ أَسَاسِةِ * قِيلَ لَا يُحِبُّكَ مَنْ يُحِبُّ
عَدُوكَ * لَا تَسْتَغْفِرِ الرَّأْيَ الْجَلِيلَ يَأْتِيكَ بِهِ
الرَّجُلُ الحَقِيرُ فَإِن الدَّرَةَ الْفَائِقَةَ لَا يُسْتَهَانُ لِهَوَانِ
فَائِصِهَا * كَذَّبَ الْقَوْمُ نُوحًا فَأَنْجَيْنَاهُ وَالَّذِينَ مَعَهُ
الْفُلْكِ وَأَغْرَقْنَا الَّذِينَ كَذَّبُوا بِآيَاتِنَا * الصَّاحِبُ
رُقْعَةٌ فِي التَّوْبِ فَلْيَنْظُرِ الْإِنْسَانُ بِمَ يَرْقَعُ تَوْبَهُ *
أَدْنَى أَخْلَاقِ الشَّرِيفِ كِنْمَانُ السِّرِ وَأَعْلَى أَخْلَافِهِ
فِي
154ff.

42*
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
نِسْيَانُ مَا أُسِر إِلَيْهِ * مَا نَدِمْتُ عَلَى مَا لَمْ أَقُلْ
مَرَّةً وَنَدِمْتُ عَلَى مَا قُلْتُ مِرَارًا * سَوْفَ يُنَبِّئُهُم
اللَّهُ بِمَا كَانُوا يَصْنَعُونَ * قِيلَ لِرَاهِبِ مِنْ أَيْنَ
تَأْكُلُ فَأَشَارَ إِلَى فِيهِ وَقَالَ الَّذِي خَلَقَ هَذِهِ الرَّحَى
يَأْتِيهَا بِالطَّحِينِ * الْمَحَبَّةُ شَجَرَةُ أَصْلُهَا الزِيَارَةُ **
لَا تَسْتَقِلَّ عَدُرًّا وَاحِدًا وَلَا تَسْتَكْثِرُ أَلْفَ صَدِيقٍ 58.
وَلَا تَسْتَبْدِلْ بِأَخ قَدِيمٍ أَنَّا مُسْتَحْدَنَا مَا اسْتَقَامَ
لَكَ الْحَبِ النَّاسَ كَمَا تَعْجَبُ النَّارَ خُذْ مِنْ
مَنْفَعَتِهَا وَأَحْذَرْ أَنْ تُحْرقَكَ * قَالَ الْإِسْكَنَدَرُ انْتَفَعْتُ
بِأَعْدَاءى أكثر مِمَّا انتفعْتُ بِأصْدِقاهى * لَقَدْ
كُذِبَتْ رُسُلٌ مِنْ قَبْلِكَ فَصَبَرُوا عَلَى مَا كُذِبُوا وَأُوذُوا
وَلَا مُبَدِّلَ لِكَلِمَاتِ اللَّهِ *
يدر
ج .
قَالَ عَلِيٌّ الرزق رِزْقَانِ رِزْقٌ تَطْلُبُهُ وَرِزْقٌ يَطْلُبُكَ
فَإِن لَم تَأْتِهِ أَتَالَ * سَوَّلَ أَسِيرُكَ فَإِذَا تَكَلَّمْتَ
صرت أَسِيرَهُ * الْكَلَامُ كالدواء إِنْ أَقْلَلْتَ مِنْهُ نَفَعَ
وَإِنْ أَكْثَرْتَ مِنْهُ قَتَلَ * نَظَرَ الْإِسْكَنْدَرُ إِلَى شَيْخ
EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX.
43*
و
خَضِيب فَقَالَ لَهُ إِنْ كُنْتَ خَضَبْتَ الشَّيْبَ فَكَيْفَـ
تَصْبِعُ آثَارَ الْكِبَر * لِلْمُسْلِمِ عَلَى أَخِيهِ الْمُسْلِمِ مِنَ
الْمَعْرُوفِ سِتَّ يُسَلِّمُ عَلَيْهِ إِذَا لَقِيَهُ وَيَنْصَحُ لَهُ
إِذَا غَابَ عَنْهُ وَيَعُودُهُ إِذَا مَرِضَ وَيُشَمِّعُ جِنَازَتَهُ
إذَا مَاتَ وَيُجِيبُهُ إِذَا دَعَاهُ وَيُشَمِّتُهُ إِذَا عَطَسَ *
قَالَ الرَّسُولُ إِذَا أَكَلَ أَحَدُكُمْ فَلْيَأْكُلْ بِيَمِينِهِ وَإِذَا
شَرِبَ فَلْيَشْرَبُ بِيَمِينِهِ فَإِنَّ الشَّيْطَانَ يَأْكُلُ بِشِمَالِهِ
وَيَشْرَبُ بِشِمَالِهِ * لِكُلِّ مَقَامٍ مَقَالُ وَخَيْرُ الْقَوْلِ
.
ما وَافَقَ الْحَالَ * قَالَ النَّبِيُّ إِذَا قُمْتُمْ إلَى الصَّدُوةِ
فَاغْسِلُوا وُجُوهَكُمْ وَأَيْدِيكُمْ إِلَى الْمَرَافِقِ وَامْسَحُوا
بِرُءُوسِكُمْ وَأَرْجُلِكُمْ إِلَى الْكَعْبَيْنِ * اَلْكَلِمَةُ إِذَا
خَرَجَتْ مِنَ الْقَلْبِ وَقَعَتْ فِي الْقَلْبِ وَإِذَا خَرَجَتْ
منَ اللَّسَانِ لَمْ تُجاوز الآذَانَ * مَنْ قَتَلَ نَفْسًا
بِغَيْرِ نَفْسٍ أَوْ فَسَادٍ فِي الْأَرْضِ فَكَأَنَّمَا قَتَلَ النَّاسَ
جَمِيعًا * إِذَا دَخَلَ أَحَدُكُمُ الْمَسْجِدَ فَلْيَقُلِ اللَّهُمَّ
افْتَحْ لِي أَبْوَابَ رَحْمَتِكَ وَإِذَا خَرَجَ فَلْيَقُلِ اللَّهُمَّ
أَسْأَلُكَ فَضْلَكَ * إِذَا دَخَلَ رَمَضَانُ فُتِحَتْ

إِنِّي
44*
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
أَبْوَابُ السَّمَاءِ وَغُلِقَتْ أَبْوَابُ جَهَنَّمَ وَسُلْسِلَتِ
الشَّيَاطِينُ * تَبَاعَدُوا فِي الدَّارِ تَقَارَبُوا فِي الْمَوَدَّةِ *
اِرْحَمُوا تُرْحَمُوا وَاغْفِرُوا يُغْفَرْ لَكُمْ *
إِذَا فَرَّبَكَ السُّلْطَانُ فَكُنْ مِنْهُ عَلَى حَذَر وَاحْذَر
انْقِلَابَهُ عَلَيْكَ وَكَلِّمْهُ بِمَا يَشْتَهِي وَلَا يَحْمِلَنَّكَ لُطْفُهُ
بِكَ عَلَى أَنْ تَدْخُلَ بَيْنَهُ وَبَيْنَ أَهْلِهِ وَحَشَمِهِ *
مَثَلُ الْمُسْلِمِينَ فِي تَرَاحُمِهِمْ وَتَوَادُدِهِمْ وَتَوَاصُلِهِمْ كَمَتَلِ
الْجَسَدِ إِذَا اشْتَكَى عَضْوٌّ مِنْهُ تَدَاعَى لَهُ سَائِرُ الْجَسَدِ
بالحمى والسهر * إِنَّ اللَّهَ خَلَقَ الْجَنَّةَ لِمَنْ أَطَاعَهُ
ولَوْ كَانَ عَبْدًا حَبَشِيًّا وَخَلَقَ النَّارَ لِمَنْ عَصَاهُ وَلَوْ
كَانَ حُرًّا قُرَشِيًّا * قَالَ النَّبِيُّ لَا تَرْفَعُونِي فَوْقَ قَدْرِى
فَتَقُولُوا فِي مَا قَالَتِ النَّصَارَى فِي الْمَسِيحَ فَإِنَّ اللَّهَ
عَزَّ وَجَلَّ اتَّخَذَنِي عَبْدًا قَبْلَ أَنْ يَتَّخِذَنِي رَسُولًا *
قِيلَ لِرَجُل بِمَ سَادَكُمُ الْأَحْلَفُ فَوَاللهِ مَا كَانَ بأكبركم
سِنَّا وَلَا بِأَكْتَرِكُمْ مَالًا فَقَالَ بِقُوَّةِ سُلْطَانِهِ عَلَى
لِسَانِهِ * لَا يَقُولَنَّ أَحَدُكُمْ عَبْدِى وَأَمَتِي كُلُّكُمْ
عَبِيدُ اللَّهِ وَكُلُّ نِسَائِكُمْ إمَاء اللَّهِ وَلكِنْ لِبَقَل

EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX.
45*
غُلَامِي وَجَارِينِي وَفَتَايَ وَفَتَانِي * مَنْ حَسُنَ
خُلْقُهُ طَابَتْ عِيشَتُهُ وَدَامَتْ سَلَامَتُهُ وَتَأَكَدَتْ فِي
النُّفُوسِ مَحَبَّتُهُ وَمَنْ سَاءَ خُلْقُهُ تَنَكَّدَتْ عِيشَتُهُ
F
وَدَامَتْ بِغْضَتُهُ وَنَفَرَتِ التَّفُوسُ مِنْهُ * لَمَّا فَرَعَ نُوح
مِنْ بِنَاءِ السَّفِينَةِ دَعَا النَّاسَ إِلَى الرَّكُوبِ فِيهَا
وَأَعْلَمَهُمْ أَنَّ اللَّهَ بَاعِثُ الطُّوفَانِ عَلَى الْأَرْضِ
كُتِهَا حَتَّى يُطَهِّرَهَا مِنْ أَهْلِ الْمَعَاصِي فَلَمْ يُجِبْهُ
أَحَدٌ مِنْهُمْ * قِيلَ لِعَلِيِّ بْنِ أَبِي طَالِبٍ عَلَيْهِ
السَّلَامُ كَمْ بَيْنَ الْمَشْرِقِ وَالْمَغْرِبِ قَالَ مَسِيرَةُ يَوْمٍ
لِلشَّمْسِ قِيلَ لَهُ كَمْ بَيْنَ السَّمَاءِ وَالْأَرْضِ قَالَ
مَسِيرَةُ سَاعَةٍ لِدَعْوَةِ مُسْتَجَابَةٍ * قِيلَ لِبَعْضِ
الْكُرَمَاءِ كَيْفَ اكْتَسَبْتَ مَكَارَمَ الْأَخْلَاقِ وَالتَادْبَ
الأَصْبَابِ فَقَالَ كَانَتِ الْأَسْفَارُ تُونِي إِلَى أَنْ
أَفِدَ عَلَى النَّاسِ فَمَا اسْتَحْسَنْتُ مِنْ أَخْلَاقِهِمُ اتَّبَعْتُهُ
وَمَا اسْتَقْبَحْتُهُ اجْتَنَبْتَهُ * حَضَرَ أَعْرَابِيٌّ عَلَى مَائِدَةِ
بَعْضِ الخُلَفَاء فَقَدِمَ جَدْى مَشْرى فَجَعَلَ الْأَعْرَابِيُّ
مَشْوِيٌّ
يُسْرِعُ فِي أَكْلِهِ مِنْهُ فَقَالَ لَهُ الخَلِيفَةُ تَأْكُلُهُ بِحَرْدٍ
مع
46*
EXERCISES AND TEXTs.
,
كَأَن أُمَّهُ نَطَحَتْكَ فَقَالَ أَرَاكَ تُشْفِقُ عَلَيْهِ كَأَنَّ أُمَّهُ
E
أَرْضَعَتْكَ
*
كَانَ مِنْ سُنَنِ الْعَرَبِ نِكَاحُ الْمَقْتِ وَهُوَ أَن
الرَّجُلَ إِذَا مَاتَ قَامَ وَلَدُهُ الْأَكْبَرُ فَأَلْقَى ثَوْبَهُ عَلَى
امْرَأَةِ أَبِيهِ فَوَرِثَ نِكَاحَهَا فَإِنْ لَمْ يَكُنْ لَهُ بِهَا
حَاجَةٌ زَوْجَهَا لِبَعْضِ إِخْوَتِهِ بِمَهْرٍ جَدِيدٍ فَكَانُوا
يَرِثُونَ النِّكَاحَ كَمَا يَرِثُونَ الْمَالَ * كَانَ عَبْدُ اللَّهِ
ابْنُ مَرْزُوقٍ مِنْ نُدَمَاء الْمَهْدِي فَسَكِرَ يَوْمًا فَفَاتَتْهُ
الصَّلَاةُ فَجَاءَتْهُ جَارِيَةٌ لَهُ بِجَمْرَةٍ فَوَضَعَتْهَا عَلَى رِجْلِهِ
فانتَبَة مَدْعُورًا فَقَالَتْ لَهُ إِذَا لَمْ تَصْبِرْ عَلَى نَارِ
الدُّنْيَا فَكَيْفَ تَصْبِرُ عَلَى نَارِ الْآخِرَةِ * دَخَلَ عَامِلٌ
لِعُمَرَ بْنِ الْخَطَّابِ رَضِيَ اللَّهُ عَنْهُ فَوَجَدَهُ مُسْتَلْقِيًا
عَلَى ظَهْرِهِ وَصِبْيَانَهُ يَلْعَبُونَ عَلَى بَطْنِهِ فَأَنْكَرَ ذَلِكَ
عَلَيْهِ فَقَالَ لَهُ عُمَرُ كَيْفَ أَنْتَ مَعَ أَهْلِكَ قَالَ إِذَا
دَخَلْتُ سَكَتَ النَّاطِقُ فَقَالَ لَهُ أَعْتَزِلْ فَإِنَّكَ لَا
تُرْفِقُ بِأَهْلِكَ وَوَلَدِكَ فَكَيْفَ تُرْفِقُ بِأُمَّةِ مُحَمَّدٍ صَلَّى
اللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّم
*
EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX.
47*
قَالَ بَعْضُ الْمُلُوكِ لِبَعْضِ وَزَرَائِهِ وَأَرَادَ مِحْنَتَهُ مَا
خَيْرُ مَا يُرْزَقُهُ الْعَبْدُ قَالَ عَقُلْ يَعِيشُ بِه قَالَ فَإِنْ
عَدِمَهُ قَالَ فَأَدَبُ يَتَحَلَّى بِهِ قَالَ فَإِنْ عَدِمَهُ قَالَ
فَمَالْ يَسْتُرُهُ قَالَ فَإِنْ عَدِمَهُ قَالَ فَصَاعِقَةٌ تَحْرِقُهُ
فَتُرِيحُ مِنْهُ العِبَادَ وَالْبِلَادَ *
نَزَلَ رَجُلٌ بِصَوْمَعَةِ رَاهِبِ فَقَدَّمَ إِلَيْهِ الرَّاهِبُ أَرْبَعَةَ
أَرْغِفَةٍ وَذَهَبَ لِيَحْضِرَ إِلَيْهِ الْعَدَسَ فَحَمَلَهُ وَجَاءَ
فَوَجَدَهُ قَدْ أَكَلَ الْخُبْزَ فَذَهَبَ فَأَتَى بِجُبْرِ فَوَجَدَهُ قَدْ
أكَلَ الْعَدَسَ فَفَعَلَ مَعَهُ ذَلِكَ عَشْرَ مَرَّاتٍ فَسَأَلَهُ
الرَّاهِبُ أَيْنَ مَقْصِدُهُ قَالَ إِلَى الْأُرْدُنِ قَالَ لِمَا ذَا قَالَ
بَلَغَنِي أَنَّ بِهَا طَبِيبًا حَاذِقًا أَسْأَلُهُ عَمَّا
يُصْلِحُ
مَعِدَتِي فَإِنِّي قَلِيلُ الشَّهْوَةِ لِلطَّعَامِ فَقَالَ لَهُ الرَّاهِبُ
إِنَّ لِي إِلَيْكَ حَاجَةً قَالَ وَمَا هِيَ قَالَ إِذَا ذَهَبْتَ
وَأَصْلَحْتَ مَعِدَتَكَ فَلَا تَجْعَلْ رُجُوعَكَ عَلَى *

48*
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
II.
ARABIC PROSE EXTRACTS.
}
زَعَمُوا أَنَّ مَلِكًا يُقَالُ لَهُ الْهَدْهَادُ خَرَجَ لِلصَّيْدِ
فِي جَمَاعَةٍ مِنْ خَدَمِهِ وَخَاصَّتِهِ فَرَأَى غَرَالًا يَطْرُدُهُ
ذِتُبُ وَقَدْ أَصَابَهُ إِلَى ضِيقِ لَيْسَ لِلْعَرَالِ مِنْهُ مَخلَص
فَحَمَلَ الهَدْهَادُ عَلَى الدِّثْبِ حَتَّى طَرَدَهُ عَنِ الْعَوَالِ
وَخَلَّصَ الْعَوَالَ مِنْهُ فَسَارَ فِي أَثر العَوَالِ وَانْقَطَعَ عَنْهُ
أَصْحَابُهُ فَبَيْنَا هُوَ كَذَلِكَ إِنْ ظَهَرَتْ لَهُ مَدِينَةٌ عَظِيمَةٌ
فِيهَا مِنْ كُلِّ شَيْءٍ مِنَ الشَّاءِ وَالنَّعَمِ وَالنَّخْلِ
والزرع وأنواع القَوَانِهِ فَوقَتَ دُونَهَا مُتَعَجَبًا مِمَّا
ظَهَرَ لَهُ إِذْ أَقْبَلَ رَجُلٌ مِنْ أَهْلِ تِلْكَ الْمَدِينَةِ الَّتِي
ظهرت
لَهُ فَسَلَّمَ وَرَحْبَ
وَرَحْبَ بِهِ ثُمَّ قَالَ لَهُ أَيُّهَا الْمَلِكَ
إنِّي أَرَاكَ مُتَجَبًا مِمَّا ظَهَرَ لَكَ فِي يَوْمِكَ هُذَا فَقَالَ
لَهُ أَلْهَدْهَادُ إِنِّي لَكَمَا قُلْتَ فَمَا هَذِهِ الْمَدِينَةُ وَمَنْ
سَاكِنُهَا فَقَالَ هُذِهِ مَدِينَةُ مَارِبَ وَسُكَّانُها حَيٌّ مِنَ
الجيّ وَأَنَا مَلِكُهُمْ وَصَاحِبُ أَمْرِهِمْ فَهُوَ مَعَهُ فِي هُذَا
الكَلَامِ إِنْ مَرَّتْ بِهِمَا امْرَأَةُ لَمْ يَرَ الرَّاؤُنَ أَحْسَنَ
W
ๆ
ARABIC PROSE EXTRACTS.
49*
?
E
W
مِنْهَا مَنْهَا وَلَا أَكْمَلَ مِنْهَا خَلْقًا وَلَا أَظْهَرَ مِنْهَا
صَبَاحَةً وَلَا أَطْيَبَ رَائِحَةً فَافْتَتَنَ بِهَا الْهَدْهَادُ وَعَلِمَ
مَلِكُ الْحِنِ أَنَّهُ قَدْ هَوِيهَا وَشَعَفَ بِهَا فَقَالَ إِنْ كُنْتَ
قَدْ هَوِيتَهَا فَهِيَ ابْنَتِي فَأَنَا أُزَوْجُكَهَا فَجَارَاهُ الْهَدْهَادُ
خَيْرًا فَقَالَ لَهُ الْجِنِّيُّ هَلْ عَرَفْتَهَا قَالَ الْهَدْهَادُ مَا
رَأَيْتُهَا قَبْلَ يَوْمِي هَذَا قَالَ الْحَنِي فِي الْغَزَالُ الَّتِي
حَلَّصْتَهَا مِنَ الذِدُّبِ وَلَا نُكَافِتُكَ عَلَى جَمِيلِ فِعْلِكَ
أبَدًا بِأَحْسَنَ مِنْ أَنْ تَحْبُوكَ بِهَا فَتَاهَبْ لِدُخُولِكَ
عَلَيْهَا فَإِنِّى قَدْ زَوْجُتَكَهَا بِشَهَادَةِ اللَّهِ تَعَالَى وَشَهَادَةِ
مَلائِكَتِهِ فَإِذَا أَرَدْتَ ذَلِكَ فَأَنْدِمْ إِلَيْنَا بِحَاصْةِ أَهْلِ
بَيْتِكَ وَمُلُوكِ قَوْمِكَ لِيَشْهَدُوا مِلَاكَهَا وَيَحْضُرُوا وَلِيَمَتَهَا
وَمِيعَادُكَ الشَّهْرُ الدَّاخِلُ فَانْصَرَفَ الْهَدْهَادُ عَلَى
الْمِيعَادِ وَغَابَتِ الْمَدِينَةُ عَنْهُ فَإِذَا أَصْحَابُهُ حَوْلَهُ
يلورُونَ لَهُ فَقَالُوا أَيْنَ كُنتَ فَنَحْنُ في طَلَبِكَ مُنْذُ
فارقتنَا وَلَمْ تَقُولُ شَيْا مِن هَذِهِ الْقَلَوَاتِ إِلَّا طَلَبْنَاكَ
ك
فِيهِ فَزَعَمُوا أَنَّ الْهَدْهَادَ خَرَجَ عَلَى الْمِيعَادِ إِلَى
أَمْهَارِهِ مِنَ الْجِنِ فِي خَاصَّةِ قَوْمِهِ وَخَدَمِهِ حَتَّى وَافَاهُمْ
D
Socin, Arabic Grammar.2
50*
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
فَوَجَدُوا قَصْرًا بَنَاهُ لَهُ الجِنَّ فِي صَلَاةٍ مِنَ الْأَرْضِ تَحْفُوفًا
بِالنَّحْلِ وَالْأَعْنَابِ وَأَلْوَانِ الورع وأنواع الفواكه تحترق
فِيهَا الْمِيَاهُ الْجَارِيَةُ فَتَعَجَّبَ الْقَوْمُ مِنْ ذلِكَ تَعْجَبًا
شَدِيدًا وَرَأَوْا مِنْكًا عَظِيمًا فَنَزَلُوا فِي الْقَصْرِ مَعَهُ عَلَى
فُرُشٍ لَمْ يَرَوْا مِثْلَهَا وَقُرَبَتْ لَهُمْ مَوَائِدُ عَلَيْهَا مِنْ
طَيِّبَاتِ الْمَأْكُولِ وَأَلْوَانِهَا الَّتِي لَمْ يَأكُلُوا قط أطيب
أَطْيَبَ
مِنْهَا طَعَامًا وَلَا أَزْكَى مِنْهَا زَائِحَةً وَشَرِبُوا مِنَ الشَّرَابِ
مَا لَمْ يَشْرَبُوا قَط أَلَكَ وَلَا أَخَفْ مِنْهُ فَمَكنُوا مَعَهُ
ثَلَاثَةَ أَيَّامٍ بِلَيَالِيهَا فِي ذلِكَ وَرُفَّتْ إِلَى الْهَدْهَادِ
امْرَأَتُهُ بِنْتُ مَلِكِ الْجِن وَأَذِنَ الْهَدْهَادُ لِبَنِي عَيدِ
وَخَاصَّتِهِ وَعَشِيرَتِهِ بِالإِدْصِرَافِ إِلَى مَوَاضِعِهِمْ وَصَارَ
ذلِكَ الْقَصْرُ دَارَ مَمْلَكَتِهِ فَزَعَمُوا أَنَّهُ مَكَثَ زَمَانًا مَعَ
امْرَأَتِهِ وَأَوْلَدَهَا بِلْقِيسَ *
W
,
أَجْمَعَتْ قُرَيْسٍ عَلَى قَتْلِ رَسُولِ اللَّهِ وَقَالُوا لَيْسَ
لَهُ الْيَوْمَ أَحَدٌ يَنْصُرُهُ وَقَدْ مَاتَ أبو طَالِبٍ فَأَجْمَعُوا
جَمِيعًا أَنْ يَأْتُوا مِنْ كُلِ قَبِيلَةٍ بِغُلَامٍ نَهْدِ فَيَجْتَمِعُوا
عَلَيْهِ فَيَضْرِبُوهُ بِأَسْيَائِهِمْ ضَرْبَةَ رَجُلٍ وَاحِدٍ فَلَا يَكُونَ
ARABIC PROSE EXTRACTS.
51*
لِبَنِي هَاشِمٍ قُوةٌ بِمُعَادَاةِ جَمِيعِ قُرَيْشٍ فَبَلَغَ رَسُولَ اللَّهِ
ذلِك وَلَمَّا اخْتَلَطَ الظَّلَامُ خَرَجَ وَمَعَهُ أَبُو بَكْرٍ وَخَلَّفَ
عَلِيًّا عَلَى فِرَاشِهِ لِرَةِ الْوَدَائِعِ الَّتِي كَانَتْ عِنْدَهُ وَصَارَ
ހހހކަ
إِلَى الغَارِ الَّذِي كَانَ يَتَكَنتُ فِيهِ قَبْلَ النُّبُوَّةِ فَكَمِنَ
فِيهِ وَأَنَتْ قُرَيْضٌ فِرَاشَهُ فَوَجَدُوا عَلِيًّا فَقَالُوا أَيْنَ ابْنُ
عَيْكَ قَالَ قُلْتُمْ لَهُ أَخْرُجْ عَنَّا فَخَرَجَ عَنْكُمْ فَطَلَبُوا
الأثر فَلَمْ يَقَعُوا عَلَيْهِ وَأَعْمَى اللَّهُ عَلَيْهِمُ الْمَوَاقِعَ
فَوقَفُوا عَلَى بَابِ الْغَارُ وَقَدْ عَشْشَتْ عَلَيْهِ حَمَامَةٌ
فَقَالُوا مَا فِي هُذَا الْعَارَ أَحَدٌ وَانْصَرَفُوا فَخَرَجَ رَسُولُ
اللَّهِ مُتَوَجِهَا إِلَى الْمَدِينَةِ فَعَلِمَتْ قُرَيْشٍ انهُ قَدْ مَضَى
إلَى يَتْرَبَ وَاتَّبَعَهُ سُرَاقَةُ فَلَمَّا لَحِقَهُ قَالَ رَسُولُ اللَّهِ
اللَّهُمَّ اكْفِنَا سُرَاقَةَ فَسَاحَتْ قَوَائِمُ فَرَسِهِ فَصَاحَ يَابْنَ
أبِي تُحَافَةَ قُلْ لِصَاحِبِكَ أَن يَدْعُو اللَّهَ بِإطلاي
اپی
فَرَسِى فَلَعَمْرِى لَئِنْ لَمْ يُصِبْهُ مِنِّي خَيْرٌ فَلَا يُصِبْهُ
مَكَّةَ
مِنِى شَرٌّ فَلَمَّا رَجَعَ إلى مكة حبرهم الخبر فَكَذَّبُوهُ **
الْخَبَرَ
حُكِى عَنِ الرّبيع حَاجِبِ الْخَلِيفَةِ الْمَنْصُورِ قَالَ
مَا رَأَيْتُ رَجُلًا أَرْبَا جَأْشَا وَأَثْبَتَ جَنَانًا مِنْ رَجُلٍ
مینی
D*
52*
EXERCISES AND TEXTS-
,
UEE
سُعِيَ بِهِ إِلَى الْمَنْصُورِ أَنَّ عِنْدَهُ وَدَائِعَ وَأَمْوَالًا لِبَنِي
أُمَيَّةَ فَأَمَرَنِي بِإِحْصَارِهِ فَأَحْضَرْتُهُ إِلَيْهِ فَقَالَ لَهُ الْمَنْصُورُ
قَدْ رُفِعَ إِلَيْنَا خَبَرُ الوَدَائِعِ وَالْأَمْوَالِ الَّتِي عِندَكَ لِبَنِي
أُمَيَّةَ فَأَخْرِجْهَا لَنَا وَلَا تَكْتُمْ مِنْهَا شَيْئًا فَقَالَ يَا أَمِيرَ
المُؤمِنِينَ ا انتَ وَارثَ لِبَنِي أَمِيةَ قَالَ لَا قَالَ فَوَصِى
لَهُمْ فِي أَمْوَالِهِمْ وَرَبَاعِهِمْ قَالَ لَا قَالَ فَمَا مَسْأَلَتُكَ
عَمَّا فِي يَدِى مِنْ ذَلِكَ قَالَ فَأَطْرَقَ الْمَنْصُورُ وَتَفَكَرَ
سَاعَةً ثُم رَفَعَ رَأْسَهُ وَقَالَ إِنَّ بَنِي آمَيةَ ظَلَمُوا الْمُسْلِمِينَ
فِيهَا وَأَنَا وَكِيلُ الْمُسْلِمِينَ فِي حُقوقِهِمْ وَأُريد أَن آخذ
مَا ظَلَمُوا الْمُسْلِمِينَ فِيهِ فَأَجْعَلَهُ فِي بَيْتِ أَمْوَالِهِمْ
فَقَالَ يَا أَمِيرَ الْمُؤْمِنِينَ فَتَحْتَاجُ إِلَى إِقَامَةِ بَيْنَةٍ عَادِلة
أَنَّ مَا فِي يَدِى لِبَنِي أُمَيَّةَ هُوَ الَّذِى عَصَبُوهُ مِنَ النَّاسِ
فَإِنْ بَنِي أُمَيَّةَ قَدْ كَانَتْ لَهُمْ أَمْوَالٌ غَيْرُ أَمْوَالِ
الْمُسْلِمِينَ قَالَ فَأَطْرَقَ الْمَنْصُورُ سَاعَةَ ثُمَّ رَفَعَ رَأْسَهُ
وَقَالَ يَا رَبِيعُ مَا أَرَى الشَّيْمَ إِلَّا قَدْ صَدَقَ وَمَا
يَجِبُ عَلَيْهِ شَيْ وَمَا يَسَعْنَا إِلَّا أَن نَعْفُو عَمَّا قِيلَ
عنه
#
قالَ هَلْ لَكَ مِنْ حَاجَة قَالَ نَعَمْ حَاجَتِي يَا
ARABIC PROSE EXTRACTS,
53*
أمِيرَ الْمُؤْمِنِينَ أَن تَجمَعَ بَيْنِي وَبَيْنَ مَنْ سَعَى فِي
إلَيْكَ فَوَاللَّهِ الَّذِي لَا إِلَهَ إِلَّا هُوَ مَا فِي يَدِي لِبَنِي
أُمَيَّةَ مَال وَلَا وَدِيعَة فَقَالَ الْخَلِيفَةُ يَا رَبِيعُ أَجْمَعِ
بينَهُ وَبَيْنَ مَنْ سَعَى بِهِ فَجَمَعْتُ بَيْنَهُمَا فَلَمَّا رَآهُ
قَالَ هُذَا غُلَامِي اخْتَلَسَ لِي ثَلَاثَةَ آلَافِ دِينَارٍ مِنْ
محمد
W
مَالِي وَأَبَقَ مِنِى وَخافَ مِنْ طَلَبِي لَهُ فَسَعَى
B
به
دي
عند
أمِيرِ الْمُؤْمِنِينَ قَالَ فَشَدَّدَ المَنْصُورُ عَلَى الْغُلَامِ وَخَوَّفَهُ
فَأَقَرَّ بِأَنَّهُ غُلَامُهُ وَأَنَّهُ أَخَذَ الْمَالَ الَّذِي ذَكَرَهُ وَسَعَى
كذِبًا عَلَيْهِ وَخَوْنَا مِنْ أَنْ يَقَعَ فِي يَدِهِ فَقَالَ لَهُ
الْمَنْصُورُ سَأَلْتُكَ أَيُّهَا الشَّيْحُ أَنْ تَعْفُو عَنْهُ فَقَالَ قَدْ
عَفَوْتُ عَنْهُ وَاعْتَقتُهُ وَوَهَبْتُهُ ثَلاثَةَ الْآلَافِ الَّتِي أَخَذَهَا
وثلاثة آلافٍ أُخْرَى أدْفَعُهَا إِلَيْهِ فَقَالَ لَهُ الْمَنْصُورُ
مَا عَلَى مَا فَعَلْتَ مِنْ مَزِيدٍ قَالَ بَلَى يَا أَمِيرَ الْمُؤْمِنِينَ
إِنَّ هَذَا كُلَّهُ لَقَلِيلٌ فِي مُقَابَلَةِ كَلَامِكَ لِي وَعَفْوِكَ
عنِى ثُمَّ انْصَرَفَ قَالَ الرَّبِيعُ فَكَانَ المَنْصُورُ يَتَعَجَّب
مِنْهُ وَكُلَّمَا ذَكَرَهُ يَقُولُ مَا رَأَيْتُ مِثْلَ هَذَا الشيخ
يَا رَبِيعُ
54*
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
E
رُوى أَن الإِسْكَندَرَ وَهُوَ الَّذِي يُقَالُ لَهُ ذُو
الْقَرْنَيْن مَلَكَ بَعْدَ أَبِيهِ وَكَانَ مُعَلَّمَهُ أَرَسْطَاطَالِيس
الْحَكِيمُ فَجَلَّ قَدْرُ الإِسْكَندَرٍ وَعَظْمَ مُلْكُهُ وَاسْتَدْ
سُلْطَانَهُ وَأَعَانَتْهُ الحِكْمَةُ وَالْعَقْلُ وَالْمَعْرِفَةُ وَكَانَ مَعَهُ
نَجْدَةٌ وَبَأْسُ وَهِمَّةٌ عَالِيَةٌ دَعَتْهُ إِلَى أَنْ كَتَبَ إِلَى
مُلُوكِ الْأَقَالِيمِ وَالْآفَاقِ يَدْعُوهُمْ إِلَى طَاعَتِهِ وَمَنْ
كَانَ قَبْلَهُ مِنْ مُلُوكِ الْيُونَانِتِينَ يُؤَدِّي إِلَى مُلُوكِ
أَرْضِ بَابِلَ مِنَ الْفُرْسِ خَرْجًا لِجَلَالَةِ تِلْكَ الْمَمْلَكَةِ
وَعِظَم قَدْرهَا وَصِغَر الْمَمَالِكِ فِي جَنْبِهَا فَلَمَّا كَتَبَ
إِلَى مَلِكِ فَارِسَ يَدْعُوهُ إِلَى طَاعَتِهِ عَظُمَ عَلَيْهِ فَسَارَ
الْإِسْكَنْدَرُ حَتَّى أَتَى أَرْضَ بَابِلَ وَمَلِكُ الْفُرْسِ يَوْمَئِذٍ
دَارًا فَحَارَبَهُ حَتَّى قَتَلَهُ وَحَوَى خَزَايْنَ مُلْكِهِ وَتَزَوْجَ
ابْنَتَهُ ثُمَّ صَارَ إِلَى أَرْضِ فَارِسَ وَقَتَلَ مَنْ بِهَا مِنَ
المَرَارَيَةِ وَالروساه وافتتح الْبِلَادَ ثُمَّ صَارَ إِلَى أَرْضِ
الْهِنْدِ فَرْحَفَ إِلَيْهِ مَلِكُ الْهِنْدِ فَحَارَبَهُ حَتَّى قَتَلَهُ
ثُمَّ صَيْرَ الْإِسْكَنْدَرُ عَلَى الْهِنْدِ مَلِكًا مِنْ قِبَلِهِ مِنْ
أهْلِ الْهِنْدِ ثُمَّ رَجَعَ إِلَى أَرْضِ بَابِلَ بَعْدَ أَنْ دَوْعَ
ARABIC PROSE EXTRACTS.
55*
الْأَرْضَ فَلَمَّا صَارَ فِي أَدَانِي الْعِرَاقِ مِمَّا يَلِي الْجَزِيرَةَ
أعْتَل فَاشْتَدَّتْ عِلَّتْهُ فَلَمَّا يَئِسَ مِنْ نَفْسِهِ وَعَلِمَ
أَنَّ الْمَوْتَ قَدْ نَزَلَ بِهِ كَتَبَ إِلَى أُمِّهِ كِتَابًا يُعَرِّيهَا
عَنْ نَفْسِهِ وَقَالَ لَهَا فِي آخِرِهِ أَصْنَعِى طَعَامًا وَأَجْمَعِي
مَنْ قَدَرْتِ عَلَيْهِ مِنْ نِسَاء الْمَمْلَكَةِ وَلَا يَأْكُلْ مِنْ
طَعَامِهِ مَنْ أَصِيبَ بِمُصِيبَةٍ قَطَّ فَعَمِلَتْ طَعَامًا
وجَمَعَتِ النَّاسَ ثُمَّ أَمرَتْهُمْ أَلا يَأْكُلَ مَنْ أُصِيبَ
بِمُصِيبَةٍ قَطُّ فَلَمْ يَأْكُلَّ أَحَدٌ فَعَلِمَتْ مَا أَرَادَ وَمَاتَ
الإِسْكَندَرُ فِي مَوْضِعِهِ الَّذِي كَاتَبَ مِنْهُ فَاجْتَمَعَ أَصْحَابُهُ
فَكَفَنُوهُ وَحَنَّطُوهُ وَصَيَّرُوهُ فِي تَابُوتٍ مِنْ ذَهَبِ ثُمَّ وَقَفَ
عَلَيْهِ عَظِيمٌ مِنَ الْفَلَاسِفَةِ فَقَالَ هَذَا يَوْمٌ عَظِيمٌ
أَقْبَلَ مِنْ شَرِّهِ مَا كَانَ مُدْبِرًا وَأَدْبَرَ مِنْ خَيْرِهِ مَا
كَانَ مُقْبِلًا ثُمَّ أَقْبَلَ عَلَى مَنْ حَضَرَهُ مِنَ الْفَلَاسِفَةِ
فَقَالَ يَا مَعْشَرَ الْحَكَمَاءِ لِيَقُلْ كُلَّ أَمْرِي مِنْكُمْ قَوْلًا
يَكُونُ لِلْخَاصَّةِ مُعَرِّيَا وَلِلْعَامَّةِ وَاعِضًا فَقَامَ كُلَّ وَاحِدٍ
مِنْ تَلَامِنَةِ أَرَسْطَاطَالِيسَ فَضَرَبَ بِيَدِهِ عَلَى النَّابُوتِ
ثُمَّ قَالَ أَيُّهَا الْمُنْطَبِقُ مَا أَخْرَسَكَ أَيُّهَا الْعَزِيزُ
W
تو و
وا بچے
56*
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
و و
مَا أَذَلَّكَ أَيُّهَا الْقَائِصُ أَنِّى وَقَعْتَ مَوْضِعَ الصَّيْدِ فِي شَرَكِ
الَّذِي يَقْنِصُكَ ثُمَّ قَامَ آخَرُ فَقَالَ هُذَا الْقَوِيُّ الَّذِي
أَصْبَحَ الْيَوْمَ ضَعِيفًا وَالْعَزِيزُ الَّذِي أَصْبَحَ الْيَوْمَ ذَلِيلًا
وَقَامَ آخَرُ فَقَالَ قَدْ كَانَتْ سُيُوفُكَ لَا تَحِفْ وَنَقِمَاتُكَ
لَا تُؤْمَنُ وَكَانَتْ مَدَائِنَكَ لَا تُرَامُ وَكَانَتْ عَطَايَاكَ لَا
تَبْرَحُ وَكَانَ ضِيَاؤُكَ لَا يُحْسَفُ فَأَصْبَحَ هَواكَ قَدْ
حمَدَ وَنَقِمَانَكَ لَا تُخْشَى وَأَصْبَحَتْ عَطَايَاكَ لَا تُرْجَى
وَأَصْبَحَتْ سُيُوفُكَ لَا تُنتَضَى وَأَصْبَحَتْ مَدَائِنُكَ لَا تُمْنَعُ
وقَامَ آخَرُ فَقَالَ قَدْ كَانَ صَوْتُكَ مَرْهُوبًا وَكَانَ مُلْكُكَ
غَالِبًا فَأَصْبَحَ الصَّوْتُ قَدِ انْقَطَعَ وَالْمُلْكُ قَدِ انْفَعَ
وقَامَ آخَرُ فَقَالَ حَرَّكَنَا الْإِسْكَنْدَرُ بِسُكُونِهِ وَأَنْطَقَنَا
بِصُمُوتِهِ وَتَكَلَّمُوا بِهَذَا الكَلَام ثُمَّ أُطْبَقَ النَّابُوتُ
وَحُمِلَ إِلَى الْإِسْكَنْدَرِيَّةِ **
III.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC.
NOTE. The order of the words in the following sentences
has been adapted, so far as possible, to that required by the
Arabic translation. In addition, however, the student must bear
especially in mind the difference of order (§§ 135, 139–142)
which marks the cardinal distinction between verbal and nominal
sentences (§ 139 note). The square brackets enclose words
which in translation should be omitted, while those in curved
brackets give the form of the sentence required by the Arabic
idiom. Past and perfect tenses are generally to be rendered
by the Arabic perfect, present and future tenses by the Arabic
imperf. The extensive use of the (generic) article in Arabic is
to be noted. All nouns not in the construct state should have
the (definite) article prefixed unless qualified in English by an
indefinite article. So far as lexical the footnotes to the exer-
cises are only supplementary to the Glossary. It is, for example,
only in special or exceptional cases that "oh" is to be rendered
by
cases.
instead of by , and the notes draw attention to such
The apology for violence done to the Queen's English,
in the interests of the learner, may be repeated from the first
edition, from which the following is in the main reprinted.
58*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, A,
A. Nominal Sentences. ¹
1. The glory of the man [is] his sons, and the
solicitude of the man [is] his dwelling and his neigh-
bour.-2. The elegance of the man [lies] in his tongue,
and the elegance of the woman in her understanding.-
3. The liberal [man is] related to God.-4. The worst
(of) repentance [is] at the day 2 of resurrection.-5. The
love of the world [is] the beginning of every sin.-6. The
promise of the king [is] a security.-7. The learned
[men are] the heirs of the prophets.-8. Wisdom [is]
for the character 3 like medicine for the body. 3-9. The
world [is] the prison of the believer and the paradise
of the unbeliever.-10. Contentment [is a part] of 4
the nature of the domestic animals.-11. The malady
of covetousness has no (not is 5 for it a) cure; and the
disease of ignorance has no (not is for it a) physician.-
12. The nutriment of the body 3 [is] (the) beverages
and (the) viands, and the nutriment of the under-
1 §§ 139 ff. 2 § 113 a.
3 plur.
4
مِنْ
5 § 50.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, B.
59*
standing [is] wisdom and learning.-13. Money has
(to money [is]) a difficult entrance and an easy exit.
14. Verily 1 God [is] forgiving and 2 compassionate.
15. Verily ye³ [are] in a manifest error.-16. The
nobles of Pharaoh's folk said 5, "Verily this [is] surely 6
a learned enchanter".-17. Verily in that 7 [lies] surely
an example for the unbelievers.-18. Flight in its
[proper] time [is] better than endurance in its wrong
time (in another than its [proper] time).-19. There
is no (nots [is there]) strength and no (not 8) power
except with 9 God, the High and 10 Mighty [One].—
20. The best of gifts [is] understanding, and the worst
of misfortunes [is] ignorance.-
B. The Strong Verb.
21. Jonah went out from the whale's belly.—
22. Zaid killed Muhammed.-23. They gave 15 (beat)
Omar a violent beating 11.-24. The direction of prayer
was shifted 12 from Jerusalem to Mecca.-25. God
knoweth (knowing) what 13 ye are doing.-26. Verily
God provides for every one his sufficiency.-27. Learning
and money [they] cover up 14 every fault, and poverty
3.
1 § 147 a.
4
2 § 149. 3 suffix.
6 § 147 b. 7 § 147 a.
8§ 111. 9
13
lo, § 56 note a.
5 perf. sing. § 136.
10 § 122. 11 § 109. 12 § 136 b.
14 dual. § 136 d.
15 § 137 b.
60**
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, B.
and ignorance [they] uncover every fault.-28. They
took him away and put him in the bottom of the
well.-29. The brothers of Joseph returned 2 to their
father.-30. Why hast thou 3 not4 washed thy shirt?
-31. The most 5 of mankind are not grateful2.-
32. They believe not 8 in the future life.-33. We
made heaven [to be] a well-preserved roof.-34. Do
not do good out of 10 hypocrisy, and do not leave off
[doing] it out of 10 modesty.-
1
35. Why do ye render waste the cultivated coun-
tries ?-36. Thereupon we sent Moses and his brother
Aaron with our signs to Pharaoh and his nobles; then
they declared the two of them 11 to be liars.-37. The
angels said 12, "O Mary! be obedient to thy Lord and
"prostrate thyself; verily 13 God giveth thee glad
"tidings of a word from 15 him; and he 14 [is one] of 15
"those 16 who are placed near [to God], and he shall
“talk to mankind in the cradle!"--38. It is not seemly
to hurry (not is good the hurrying), except in the
marrying of a 17 daughter, and the burying of a 17 dead
[man], and the entertaining of a 18 guest.-39. Glorify 19
God in the early morning 20 and [late] in the evening 20.
1 dual. § 136 d.
2 plur. 3 fem. 4
لم
、 (།
7
pronoun.
dual. 12 § 136 b.
8
part.
14
13 §
1
pronoun.
§ 101 c. 5 sing. § 127.
9 J. 10 § 113 d. 11 suffix in the
147 a.
16 part.
17 § 118 c. 19 § 118 c.
19 plur.
20 indeterm. accus. § 113 a.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, B.
61*
1
9
40. Verily the hypocrite has (to the hyp. [belong])
three characteristics; his tongue contradicts his heart,
and his speech his action, and his exterior his in-
terior.-41. The men of his people used to sit with
him on account of his learning.-42. Verily the
holy war [is] incumbent 2 on you.-43. The vehemence
of a (the) man3 [is what] causes him to perish.-
44. The head of al-Husain the son of Ali was brought
into the city of Damascus 6 and was placed before
Yazîd.-45. Verily we have become Muslims, 908
become Muslims ye? [also]!-46. Do not talk to one
another with disgraceful talk!-47. Every thing has
(to every thing [belongs]) an indication; and the in-
dication of understanding [is] reflection, and the in-
dication of reflection [is] being silent.-48. We started
off towards Bagdad to bring an action against one
another 10 before 11 its 12 governor.-49. The most ex-
cellent kind of praise [is], "[there is] no 13 god ex-
cept God!" and the most excellent of [good] works
[are] the five 14 prayers; and the most excellent (kind]
of character [is] (the) being humble.---50. They fought
with one another four days 15, then the Byzantines
sing., then subject, then the verb in the plur. cf. §§ 89 note c;
136 d. 2 part. 32. 4 nominal sent. § 139 № a. 5 § 107.
d
6 § 128.
7 § 96 d. 8.9 pronoun. 10 part. § 113 b. 11
13 § 111.
14 masc, determ. after the noun, § 92 a.
.12872 إلى
15 § 113 a.
62*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. B.
3
were routed 1.51. What is disliked in 2 the king [is]
the being devoted to (the) pleasures, and the hearing
of (the) songs and the spending of (the) time therewith
(with that).—52. They said, "O our father! verily we ³
"went away, running races, and left Joseph with 5
"our baggage; then the wolf ate him".-53. Observe
what [is] in the heart of thy brother by means of his
eye, for 6 the eye [is] the title-page of the heart!-
54. In the fourth year from the birth of Muhammed
the [two] angels cut opens his belly and extracted 9
his heart; then they cut it 9 [his heart] open and
extracted from it a black clot of blood; thereupon
they washed 9 his heart and his belly with snow.-
55. They conversed 10 about the case of the Apostle.—
7
56. Verily God hath (to God [are]) 11 servants
whom 12 he distinguishes (he distinguishes them)
with his favours.-57. Restrain thyself from meat 13
which 14 causes thee to acquire an indigestion, and [from]
an action which 14 occasions thee regret 15.--58. Thou
hast fallen in love 16 with a girl, a possessor of beauty 15
and elegance 15-59. Muhammed said, "Help thy brother,
"[whether he be] doing wrong 17 or wronged 17!" They
3
11 § 147 a.
¹ fem. sing. 2 J. ³§ 96 d. ¹imperf. merely, § 157 b. 5 is with gen.
6.7 dual. 8 sing. § 136 a. 9 dual § 136 d. 10 § 137 a.
12 without relative particle § 155. 13 indeterm. 14 without rela-
tive particle § 155. 15 indet.
16 § 98 e. 17 § 113 b.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, C.
63*
asked, "O Apostle of God! how shall we help him,
"[if he be] doing wrong 1?" He said, "By restraining
"him from doing wrong!"-60. Do not turn away 2 a
beggar!-61. A man (servant) does not believe, until
he love for his neighbour (brother) what 3 he loves for
himself.
C. The Weak Verb.
6
62. A poor [man] begged of me, so I gave him
[two] pieces of money 4.-63. Be mindful of death, for
he 5 takes hold of your forelocks; if ye fly from him,
he overtakes you, and if ye stay, he seizes you.-
64. Music [is] like the spirit and wine [is] like the
body; then through their coming together is born
joy.-65. The Apostle used to preach to his com-
panions and to exhort them and to teach them the
beauties of character 9.-66. Verily 10 our [true] friends
will 11 entrust to us their secrets.-67. The lust 12 of the
world entails care and sorrow, and abstinence with
regard to it restores the heart and the body.-68. Moses
said, "I have brought 13 you an evidence from your
"Lord; so let go 14 along with me the Sons of Israel!"
-69. Depend on the Living [one], who does not die!
1 § 113 b. 2 contracted § 36. 3 § 156 and note a. 4 dual.
5 pronoun with foll. part. 6 § 159. 7 dual-suffix. 8 see p. 61*
note 1. 9 pl. determ. 10 § 147 a. 11 § 99 a. 123. 13 § 98 e. 14 sing.
w
64*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. C.
-70. He pleases me, who makes poetry to 1 show his
education, not to make gain, and applies himself to
singing to ¹ enjoy himself, not to ¹ seek for himself [reward].
-71. Demand help of the good (people2 of the good),
and of those that act well (and of the acting well).-
72. Choose 3 whichever of the pages thou wilt!-
73. Supplicate much (make much the supplicating),
for thou dost not know when 5 answer 6 will be given
thee!-74. Restrain your tongues and lower your
glances and guard your continence!—
•
75. A (the) kingdom is made flourishing through
justice and is protected by courage and is ruled
through [good] government.-76. [Good] government
[is], that the gate of the chief be guarded 8 in the
[proper] time of being guarded 9, and opened in the
[proper] time of being open 9, and the gatekeeper
friendly.-77. Jalâl-al-dîn used not to go to sleep 10
except drunk 11, nor (and not) to arise in the morning
except seedy and tipsy 11.-78. It is not seemly for
the wise [man], that 12 he address the fool, like as
it is not seemly for the sober [man], that he address
the drunken [man].-79. People 13 of the world
[are] like folk in a ship, who 14 are carried onwards
8
1 inf. § 113 d. 2 § 133.
pass. impers. 7 § 148 b.
p. 61* note 1. 11 § 113 b.
5. © impf.
متي
3 fem. 4 § 96 d.
with part. § 110. 9 61 c.
.with كان
12 § 148 b.
10 see
13 § 133. 14 §§ 155, 156.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, C.
65*
whilst they are sleeping ¹.—80. The evil-doer [he]
does not consider 2 mankind except [as] evil, because
he 3 sees them with the eye of his nature.-81. God
elected Abraham [as] an [intimate] friend.7-82. Every
affair in the world [is] transitory.-83. Wickedness
[is] to be feared 5, and no one (not) fears it except
the intelligent [man]; and good [is] to be hoped for,
and every one 6 seeks it.-84. [To] a man (servant) shall
not be given [anything] more ample than endu-
rance. -85. I looked into Paradise, then I saw the
most of its inhabitants [to be] the poor; and I looked
into hell-fire, then I saw the most of its inhabitants
[to be] (the) women. -86.
86. He9 whose counsel is
asked [is] one 10 in whom one confides; and he 10 who
asks counsel [is] one 10 who is to be aided.—87.
not put off 11 the work of to-day till to-morrow 12.—
88. Thou dost not :3 find (see) in the creation of God any 14
imperfection.-89. Little which 10 continues [is] better
than much which 10 is interrupted.-90. Pharaoh said,
"We will 15 kill 16 their sons and spare their women."
91. A Bedouin looked at a gold-piece; then he said,
"How small 17 is thy size and how great 17 thy value!"-
4 J.
1 § 157 a.
2 § 139 d a.
8
§ 100 end.
13 to.
3 suff.
9 part.
14
خَلِيلًا :
ل لن
Do
5 § 60 c. 6 61.
.š c ܂ܝ احد
10 part.
.141 § as used من
11 § 101 b.
15, § 99 a.
12 indeterm.
16 § 19.
17 § 52.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.2
E
66*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, D.
92. The envious [man] is not well-pleased with thee ¹,
until thou diest!-93. Be [the] tail and be not [the]
head! for 2 the tail escapes whilst the head perishes.
D. Various subordinate Sentences.
94. Muhammed said, "Do not anticipate (begin) 4
Jews and Christians by the greeting, but when ye
meet one of them 5, (then) 6 force him towards the
narrowest place (his narrowest)".-95. When comes to
thy knowledge concerning thy brother what is evil,
then seek for him excuse; but if thou dost not find
[one], then say, "Perhaps he has an excuse."-96. If s
thou eat little, thou shalt live long.-97. If ye talk
in a good manner (make ye good the talk), ye shall
enter Paradise.-98. Alî said,-may9 God be well
pleased with him 10—“O ¹¹ mankind! do not hope except
for your Lord, and do not dread [anything] except your
transgressions; and be not he ashamed, who 12 doth not
know, to 13 learn, and be not he ashamed, who 12 knoweth,
to 13 teach!”99. The subsistence which thou seekest
is like the shadow (the likeness of the subsistence...
[is] the likeness of the shadow) which moves on along
أَحَدُ
sentence.
2
فَإِنَّ
3 § 157 nomin. sent.
5 with gen. § 133 end. 6 § 161 c. 7 §§ 159, 101 c.
1 verbal
4 plur. 5
8
§ 160 b. 9 § 98 d. 10 after the subject. 11
أَيُّهَا
§ 85.
من 12
13 with subj.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, D.
67*
7
with thee; thou dost not overtake it in pursuing 2 [it],
then when thou turnest 3 away from it, it follows
thee! 4-100. A man said to the Apostle of God:
“O Muhammed, give me thy cloak!"; then he threw
it down to 5 him; then he said: "I do not want it";
then he [Muh.] said, "May God combat thee! thou
didst wish to s declare me
me to be niggardly, but
(and) God has not made me [to be] niggardly!".
101. Whoso 10 longs for Paradise, he is unmindful of
lusts 11.-102. That a man 22 give in alms in his life-
time a drachma (the alms-giving 12 of a man-a
drachma) [is] better for him than that 13 he give in
alms a hundred drachmæ at his death.
it16
103. The Prophet-may God bless 14 him and save
him—said, “Whoso 10 drinketh wine in this world, [and]
thereupon do not 15 repent, he shall be forbidden it 16
in the future life."-104. If anyone light a lamp in a
mosque, then verily 17 the angels [they] will beg for-
giveness for him as long as 18 that lamp continues 19
kindled 20.—105. The reed-pen [is] a tree, whose 21
fruit [is] the ideas, and thought [is] a sea, whose 21
1
pronoun.
2 part. 113 b.
§ 158 a.
5
4 perf.
آلی
ماه
H
with imperf. 7 § 98 d.
10 § 159. 11 determ. 12 inf.
J
14
1 § 11 end. 15 §§ 160 c, 101 c.
19 § 110. 20 part. pass. § 110.
8
with
13
subj.
§ 148 b
9 § 101 c.
with subj.
16 § 108.
17 § 161 a.
18 § 158 b.
21 § 155.
22 2
225.
E*
68*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. D.
pearls [are] wisdom.-106. Verily the dead [man] and
he who has no religion (he who no 2 religion to
him) [are] equal 3; and there is no 2 trust in (to)
him who has no 2 piety.-107.
1
Every woman
5
that has no 5 modesty [is] like a dish that has no
salt.-108. If anyone's 6 [whoso, his] tattle is much,
his erring is much [also]-109. The anger of the
noble [man], although his fire flare up", [is] like
smoke of woods in which [there is] no 9 blackness.
-110. To the ignorant [man] are forgiven 10 seventy 11
transgressions, ere to the knowing [man] is forgiven one.
111. Be not 12 like the needle, which 13 clothes.
mankind whilst 14 it [is] naked, nor (and) like the wick,
which 14 gives light to mankind whilst it is consumed 15,
-112. The believer does not escape from the chas-
tisement of God, until he leave off four things, lying,
and pride, and niggardliness, and evil thinking (evil
of the thinking).-113. It is seemly for the younger
[ones] to 16 precede the elders in three places; when 17
they travel by night 18, or wade through a stream, or
encounter horsemen.-114. Do not drink (the) poison
out of reliance 19 on the antidote which thou hast
13. 2 § 111.
3 sing. 4 §§ 155, 156.
6 § 156. 7 § 159. 8 indeterm. § 155. 9 § 111.
12
لا
with energ. I. § 101 b. 13 § 155.
with imperf. 16 § 148. 17 § 158 a.
5 part.pass. § 110.
10 § 136 a. 11 § 92 b.
14 § 157 a.
15 § 157 a, pron.
18 § 113 a.
19 § 113 d.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, D.
69*
(that which [is] with 1 thee of 2 the
the antidote).-
115. Paradise is desirous 3 of four [kinds of] folk; the
first 4 of them 5 [are] those who have fed a hungry
[man], and the second [are] those who have clothed 7
a naked [man], and the third [are] those who fast 7
in 8 the month of Ramadân 9, and the fourth [are]
those who read 10 the Koran.-116. Socrates was asked,
"Why hast thou not 11 mentioned in thy law-code the
"punishment of him who kills 12 his brother?" He said,
"I know not that this [is] a thing which exists."
117. Every thing [it] begins small 13, thereupon it be-
comes great, except misfortune 14; for it begins great,
thereupon it becomes small; and every thing [it] becomes
cheap, when 15 it becomes abundant, excepting education;
for 16 when it becomes abundant, it rises in value.
118. After Moses had returned to the Sons of
Israel with the Thora (and along with him [was] the
Thora), they refused to 17 accept it and to do according
to what [was] in it.-119. God commanded Moses to 18
fast thirty 18 days and to purify himself and to purify
his garments, and to come to 19 the mountain, that he
might talk to him and give him the book.-120. After
عند
ميدن
7 imperf.
3 part. 4 masc. 5 suffix in fem. sing.
sing. 8 § 113 a. 9 § 128.
1
2
6 perf. sing.
10 imperf.
sing. 11 § 101
c.
12 § 159.
13 § 113 b.
14 accus. § 151.
15 § 158 a.
16 with suff. § 96 d.
17
ان
with subj.
18 § 113 a.
19
إلى
70*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. D.
S
15
Damascus was taken 1, much folk 2 of 3 its inhabitants
joined Heraclius, whilst 4 he was in 5 Antioch.-121. A.
certain one of the wise men said, Nothing (not) repels
the onslaught of the conquering enemy like being
submissive and giving way, like as green plants are
safe from the vehement wind through their pliancy, be-
cause they turn along with it, as (how) 9 it turns.-
122. They disagree 10 concerning Waraka; and of 11 them
[there are] those who assert 15 that 12 he died a Christian 13
and did not 14 reach the appearance of the Prophet;
and of 11 them [there are] those who are of opinion
that 12 he died a Muslim.-123. O [ye two] companions
of the prison! as to the one of you 16, he shall serve
to his lord wine 17, and as to the other, he shall be
crucified, then shall 18 the birds eat of 12 his head; the
affair is decreed 19 concerning which ye inquire!—
124. The Apostle wrote to chieftains 17 of 11 the tribes,
inviting 20 them to become Muslims 21.-125. A wise
[man] was asked, "What [is] the thing, which [it] is
not good that it be said, although it be 22 right?" He
said, "A man's eulogizing himself 23".-126. Woe to
مين
4
6
1 fem. § 136 b. 2 coll. 3. § 157 a. 5. Lis
subject, § 145 b. 78 147 a. 8 sing. suff.
L3, § 137 a.
16
11
1.12 § 147 a. 13 § 113 b.
w. dual suff. § 133. 17 indeterm.
ン
​as
9§ 159.10 § 986 with
14 § 101 c. 15 § 98 b.
18 fem. sing. § 136 c, 2.
19 § 98 b. 20 § 99 b. 21 infin. determ. 22 § 159. 23 § 131 w. Acc.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, E.
71*
[him] who converses with lying, that he may make the
people laugh by it!-127. This (the) world and the
future life [are] as the East and the West; when thou
approachest one of them 1, thou dost recede from the
other.-128. Fear ye God in secret 2 and do not enter
into what is not lawful for you!-129. The devotee without
learning [is] like the ass of the mill 3, who goes around
and does not 5 get through (cut) the distance.--130. The
eye of hate [it] draws forth every fault, and the eye
of love [it] does not find the faults.
4
E. Anecdotes.
7
131. An astrologer was being crucified; then he was
asked, "Hast thou seen this in thy star?" Then he
said, "I saw a raising up, however I did not 9 know
that it [was to be] upon a piece of wood."
132. A man knocked at the door of 10 'Amr the son
of Ubaid; so he said "Who [is] this?" He said, “I." He
['Amr] said, "I do not know (I am not I know 11) among
our friends (brothers) 12 [any] one 13, whose name [is] I."
133. (The) thieves came 14 in upon Abû Bekr al-
Rabbânî, seeking 15 something (a thing), and he saw
1 dual suffix. 2 determ. 3 § 123, note. 4 § 155 note. 5 § 157b
y w. impf. 6 137 a.
7 with interrog. part. J. 8 73 c end.
§ 50 and impf. 12 order § 131 b.
9 § 101 c.
احد 13
•
10
على
1 § 136 α.
11
ليس
15 § 157 b imperf. alone.
72*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
3
them going around in the house. Then he said, “O
young men! This which ye are seeking 2 in the night
we have already sought 2 in the day-time, but have
not 5 found it!" So they laughed and went out.
S
134. It is related, that a certain one of the
polite scholars eulogized a certain one of the princes;
so he commanded [that] to him an [ass's] saddle and
saddle-girth [should be given]. So he took them on 9
his shoulder and went out from his presence 10. Then
a certain one of his companions saw him, then said,
"What [is] this?" He said, "I eulogized the prince
with the most beautiful of my poems, then he invested
me with [something] of 11 the most glorious of his dresses".
135. Al-Mugîra, the son of Šuba said: No one
(not) 12 has deceived me except (another than) a youth
of 13 the sons of al-Hârit. For I mentioned a woman
of theirs (of 11 them), that 13 I should marry her; then
he said, "O 14 Prince! [There is] no good 15 for thee
in her." So I said, "And why [not]?". He said, "I
saw a man kissing 16 her." So I turned from her; then
the young man married her. So I reproached him
and said, "Didst thou not 17 inform me that thou18 hadst
5 to $150 a.
7 imperf. 2 with suffix. 3 § 118 a.
4 § 98e.
6 § 98 b.
7
أن
8 dual suffix. 9
J.
11
أَيُّهَا.
15 § 111.
12 101 C.
I
13
19 with suff.
من 11 مِنْ عِندِه 10
101 c.
S
ألم
على
16 imperf.
17
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
73*
seen a man kissing her?" He said, "Yes, I saw her
father kissing her."
136. Al-Daḥḥâk the son of Muzâḥim said to a
Christian, "[How would it be] if
thou wert to become.
not 2 ceased loving 3
a Muslim?" He said, "I have
Islâm, except that 5 my love for wine 6 prevents me from
it." So he said, "Become a Muslim and drink it!" So
after he had become a Muslim, he said to him, "Thou
hast become a Muslim, so if thou drink it, we shall
chastise thee; and if thou apostatize, we shall have thee
killed, so choose for thyself". Then he chose Islâm and
his Islâm was good. So he had taken 10 him by stratagem.
137. A Bedouin stole a purse in which (it) [were]
pieces of money 11, thereupon he entered the mosque
to pray 12; and his name was 13 Moses. Then the
leader of prayer recited, "And what is that 14 in 15 thy
right hand, Oh Moses 16?" So he said, "By God, verily
thou [art] an enchanter!" Thereupon he threw away
the purse and went out.
138. A man claimed the (a) gift of prophecy in
the days 17 of al-Rašid. So after he had appeared
لوا
§ 102.
2 Ló with perf. 3 § 110 with indeterm. part.
§ 132 end. 5 §§ 147 c, 148 dl V with foll. verbal sentence.
6 § 131. 7 § 98c with
6.
11 indeterm.
. s § 159.
13
12 § 99 b.
J. 11 fem.
9 § 17, note b.
10 perf.
كَانَ
15
ب
16 Surah 20, 18.
17 § 113 a.
74*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
1
before him [the Caliph], he asked him, "What [is
that] which is said of thee?" He said, "that I¹ am
a noble prophet." He asked, "But what 2 indicates
the truth of thy claim?" He said, "Demand what 3
thou wilt" 4. He said, "I wish that thou make these
beardless slaves, [who are] standing 7 [there] this
moments [to be furnished] with beards 9" Then he
looked down for a while 10, thereupon he raised his
head and said, "How is it lawful that I make these 11
beardless [ones to be furnished] with beards and
alter these beautiful 12 forms? but 13 I will make the
bearded ones (owners of beards) beardless in one
twinkling." So al-Rašid laughed at him and pardoned
him and commanded a present [to be given] to him.
139. A person pretended to prophecy 14; then they
besought of him in 15 the presence of al-Ma'mûn a
miracle. So he said, "I will cast for you a pebble into
the water, then it will dissolve". He [al-Ma'mum] said,
"We are 16 content." So he brought out a pebble
[which he had] along with him 17, then cast it into the
water; then it dissolved. So they said, "This 18 is a
1 § 96 d.
4
22. 3 § 5, note b. perf. § 159. 5
أَيُّ شَيْءٍ
E
31.
6 § 120 d; the dem. in sing., the adj. in broken pl. 7 determ.
§ 120 a.
8 § 118 a. 9 indeterm.
fem. sing.
18 § 143.
13
10 §
ب 15 22 8 14 وإنما.
§
113 a. 11 plur. 12 § 120
8 17 dés § 121 a.
16 § 98 c.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
75*
1
trick; however, we will give ¹ thee a pebble of our
own 2, and let 3 it dissolve!" Then he said, “Ye are
not 4 more illustrious 5 than Pharao and I am not (and
not I6) mightier in wisdom than Moses, and Pharao
did not say to Moses, I am not 9 content with what
thou doest 10 with thy staff, so that 11 I will give thee
a staff of my own 12, which 13 thou shalt make [into] a
serpent." So al-Ma'mun laughed and let him pass on.
140. It is said 14 that Abû Dulâma 15 the poet was
standing 16 before al-Saffah on 17 a certain day (a
certain one of the days). Then he said to him, "Ask
of me what thou dost want (thy want)!" So Abû
Dulâma said to him, "I want a hunting-dog". So he
said, “Give ye it 18 to him!" Then he said, "And I want
a horse, on 19 which I may go forth to hunt." He said,
"Give ye it to him!" He said, "And a page 20, who 21
will lead the dog and hunt with him." He said, “And
give ye him a page!" He said, "And a slave-girl 22,
who 23 will prepare the game and give us to eat of it.”
He said, "Give ye him a slave-girl!" He said, "These,
1 imperf. 253. 3 imper. of. 9 w. suff.; then impf.
§ 5 § 63 b. 6
.110 لَيْسَى
4
10 § 156.
14 § 98 C.
, which
اشا
ولا أنا
8 7 ولا
مِنْ عِنْدِى
12 .with subj حتى 11
لم
7 § 113c. 8 § 101 c. 9
13 §§ 155-56.
17
8.
18 with
15 147 a. 16 with part. § 110.
stands last, § 54 b.
20 accus. 21 § 155. 22 accus.
في
19 (after the verb) § 155.
23 § 155.
76*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
1
O Prince of the Believers! have need of ([there is]
no escape for them from) a dwelling, which 2 they
may inhabit." So he said, "Give ye him a dwelling,
which will contain them!" He said, "And if they have
not (and if not is 3 to them) an estate, then wherefrom
shall they live?" He said, "I grant 4 thee ten cultivated 5
estates and ten waste estates 5." He said, "And what
[are] the waste 5 [ones] O Prince of the Believers?"
He said, "In which 6 [there are] no plants 7." He
said, "I grant thee, O Prince of the Believers, a
hundreds waste estates of 9 the deserts of the Sons
of Asad." Then he laughed at him and said, "Make
them 10 all of them 10 cultivated! 10"
1
141. It is related 11, that Harûn al-Rašid had (that
to H. was 12) a black slave-girl, of ugly mien 13. Now
he scattered one day gold-pieces 14 among (between)
the slave-girls; so the slave-girls set about 15 gather-
ing 16 up the gold-pieces, whilst 17 that slave-girl stood
still, looking 18 at the face of al-Rašid. Some one
asked (it was asked), "Dost thou 19 not pick up the
1 § 111. 2 §§ 155-56.
3
لَمْ تَكُن.
4 § 98 c with 45.
6 Ló and prep, with pronoun at the end of the sentence.
مين
5 § 87 a.
7 § 111. 8 § 92 c. 9
10 fem. sing.
§ 147 c. 13 determ. § 134. 14 indeterm.
note b, 136 d (impf. pl. fem.)
impf. alone. 19 VI w. impf. fem.
11 § 98 c. 12
15 § 136 a.
17 § 157 a with part.
أَنَّهُ كَانَ لِ
16 §§ 152
18 § 157 b
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
77*
6
1
gold-pieces?" Then she said, "Verily what they
seek [is] the gold-pieces, but (and) what 1 I seek
[is] the owner of the gold-pieces." Then her speech
pleased him; so he placed her near [to him] and
brought good upon her. Then the report got to the
grandees, that 2 Harûn al-Rašid was enamoured 3 of
a black slave-girl. So after that had come to his
knowledge, he sent for the whole of the grandees,
until he had assembled them in his presence. Then
after he had commanded the bringing in of the
slave-girls, he gave every one of them a goblet of 7
chrysolite and commanded it to be thrown down".
But they declined [doing it] in a body (as a whole 9).
Then the turn came to (the affair got to) the ugly
slave-girl; but she threw down the goblet and broke
it. So they said, "Look 10 at this girl, her name [is]
ugly, and her manner [is] ugly, and her action [is]
ugly". Then said to her the Caliph, "Why then didst
thou break 11 it"? Then she said, "Thou didst 12 command
me to break it 13; so I was of opinion that 14 in 15 its
being broken [lay] a detriment 16 with regard to the
1 part. pass. with suffix.
عندهه
2
بات
13.]
1:5"
4
3 imperf. § 152, note c.
6 Ụ with infinitive § 131. 7 § 119 a.
8 من
11 2nd. pers. fem. perf. w. suff.
s determ.
9 § 113 b.
10 plur.
§ 53 a.
13
ب
with inf.
11
12 § 98 c.
I
15
أن.
في
16 § 147 a.
78*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
treasure of the Caliph, and in its not being broken
(in the lack of its being broken) a detriment i with re-
gard to his command; and the detriment with regard
to the first is fitter to keep intact 2. the inviolability
of the command of the Caliph. And I was of opinion
that in its being broken [lay] my being called (qualifi-
ed ³ as 4) the crazy [one], and in keeping it intact my
called being (qualified 3 as 4) the disobedient [one]; and
the first [is] more agreeable to me than the second."
Then the grandees found that 6 to be beautiful of her
and praised her for 8 it and excused the Caliph for 9
loving her. And God knows best ([is] most knowing 10).
1 § 147 a.
3 § 61 c.
9
.في
ں 4
2 § 113d, indeterm. inf. with following
10 elative.
5 § 136 a. 6 at the end. 7
مين
8
§ 131.
على
pl.
GLOSSARY A.
plural, see §§ 88-90. The numbers within parentheses after
the broken plurals refer to the forms as numbered in these sections.
هرون Aaron
إبراهيم Abraham
abstinence.
Abū Bekr al-Rabbani,
after prep. és.
خَلَّفَ.
agreeable to elat.
أَحَب
E
with Í!.
ls
aid (to) med. ,
with acc.
بكر الرباني
على ALE أبو دُلَامَةَ Abu Dulama
IV
abundant see much.
accept (to) Is impf. a.
acquire (to cause to)
IV with two accus.
act well (to)
G
حسن
IV.
action. See also bring.
III. خطب (address (to
all
with determ. noun
or suffix § 119 b.
alms (to give in) do
V with
Ų
of the gift.
along with prep..
already § 98e.
قد
غار
alter (to)
med.
ی
II.
SUE
affair ol.
امر.
.159 8 وَإِن although
after, after that conj.
L
among 3.
§ 98 f.
ample, elat. § 63 b.
80*
GLOSSARY A.
10
Amr, § 90n.
and
. (28) مَفَاعِلَةٌ . p مَلْالْ angel
غَضَبٌ anger
animal (domestic) rugs
pl. Íšléš (25).
90-
another than with fol-
lowing gen.
غير
answer (to give) to l
X med. with J.
,
arise (to, in the morning)
صبح
IV.
as see like.
با کتا
as too with nom. and
in the apodosis.
↓
اسد Asad.
I
W
ashamed (to be) X
حى
§ 49 c.
ask (to) Í
med.
with
-to ask something
.ل
I
دريا antidote
أنطاكية Antioch
مين
any (prep.), cf. § 141.
apostatize S, VIII.
apostle Jj.
appear (to) .
F
of Jlu impf. a, with two
acc. § 38 b.
ass "Lis.
حِمَارٌ.
assemble (to)
impf. a.
assert (to); impf. u.
منجم astrologer
at (one's house) prep. Áis.
بَعْدَاد Bagdad
ظهور appearance
apply oneself to (to) Le be, exist (to)
VI with acc.
baggage Elio.
med.
".
- not to be
§ 50.
Jeż
§ 71 b.
approach (to) impf. beardpl. (3); cf.
u, with o.
GLOSSARY A.
81*
09
beardless of pl. (1).
beat (to)
ضَرَبَ (beat
ضَرْبٌ
ams.
حسن beauty.
محاسن
impf. i, inf.
beauties
beseech of (to) db III
with acc. of person and
of thing.
best elat. of good.
better elat. of good.
C
G
beautiful fem. &;
حَسَن
elat. § 63 b.
to find
to be beautifuls X.
because § 147 a.
أَعْرَابِي Bedouin
E
before (of place)
be-
tween the two hands
of (dual stat. constr.).
·E
beg of (to) Jú impf. a,
with acc.
.
بين... between.
مَفَاعِلُ .pl مَشرَب beverage
(23).
10-
birds coll. b.
مَولِد birth
E
black fem. § 74b.
سَواد blackness
bless (to) Il with As.
body &us pl. Ĵši (17).
ह
G
Á (no. 67).
كِتَاب book سال beggar part. act. of
I
begin, begin with (to) a
impf. a, with acc.
ရှင်
born (to be) №, V.
beginning (lit. head).
break (to)
believe (to)
IV; —
bring (to)
believer id. part. act.
غَيَابَة bottom
.med جاء
ب
impf. i.
S.
بطن. belly
Socin, Arabic Grammar.2
to bring an action
against one another
F
82*
GLOSSARY A.
VI - to bring in حكم
حضر
IV. — to bring
.. دخل into
bring out
خر
to
IV. -
to bring upon l IV
على with
brother i § 90 a, c; pl.
ح
§ 88, 5; pl. when
"friends" § 88, 21.
bury (to) ¿éɔ impf. i, inf.
Go
دفن
cease (to) Íĺ, med., (for
Í,j § 42 d, § 44).
زَولَ
G
certain one (a) vies with
pl. of follow. noun.
أَنْعَال .pl خُلق character
عَلَامَةٌ characteristic
(17).
chastise (to) impf. u.
عَذَابٌ chastisement
cheap (to become) vas,
become),
impf. u.
.(20) فَعَلاء .pl رئيس chief
ی
med.
خار
choose (to),
VIII.
يَاقوت chrysolite
,pl
نصَارَى ; (29)
but.
by, by means of ; in
oaths
§ 95 i.
w. the gen.
coll. p.
فَعَالَى نَصْرَانِيُّ Christian الروم .Byzantines the co
claim (to) Les VIII § 25,
note.
claim
دَعْوَى
cloak 215,.
G
عَلَقَة clot of blood
خَلِيفَة Caliph.
هم care.
$ -
سَار (carry onwards (to
with
ری
med.
خبر case
cast (to) ¿‚b impf. a.
طرح
GLOSSARY A.
83*
clothe (to) Limpf. u.
G
()
.مدينة city
عليم ب cognizant of عَلِيمٌ
combat (to) äs III.
to command any
thing to be done, id.
with and infin.
ب
905
commandol.
E
come (to)
impf. i.
to come to one's know-
ledge (concerning)
impf. u, with acc. (and
عَنْ.
to come in
upons impf. u, with
عَلَى
pl صَاحِبٌ companion
F
I
(17). افعال
رحيم compassionate
في
concerning ¿.
أمن
confide in (to) VIII.
conquering part. act. of
to come out
impf. u, with
consider as (to) impf.
خرج
from
مين
u, with acc.
consumed (to be) >
come together
جمع
VIII.
VIII.
contain (to)
command (to) impf. u.
to command anyone
to do a thing, id. with
트
​acc. and with the
subj.
to command
anything to be given
to anyone, id. with
جمع
content (to be)
impf. a.
impf.
a. — to be content with,
id. with
G
قَنَاعَةٌ contentment
(pl.
pl of خروج
continence
S
of pers. and ↳ of thing.
فرج.
F*
84*
GLOSSARY A.
continue (to) 15 med.
§ 110.
contradict (to) ėls III.
converse (to)☺do V.
to converse about, id.
with
ب
counsel (to ask), med.
X.
الحالُ ad-Dahhak
دمشق Damascus
.8902 بنت daughter
50-
TA
day
pl. §§ 88, 17;
90 s.
يوم
يوما one day -
اليوم today
نهار day-time نهــ
country s pl. Îles (9). dead.
بلد
شَجَاعَة courage
G
cover up (to) impf. u.
covetousness
cradle.
ستر
crazy part pass. of
fem. x.
嗎
​13
جن
death
موت
deceive (to) ¿A▲ impf. a.
منع (decline (to
decree (to)
VIII.
impf. i.
•I
عن
خلق creation
crucify (to)
fem. &.
impf. i.
cultivated part. act. of
عمر
S/
cure sléŵ.
cut (to) ¿bs impf. a. ——
3
to cut open impf.u.
قطَعَ (cut
demand (to) a thing J
impf. a, with
us § 38b.
depend on (to) J5, V, with
عَلَى
desert lé pl. Js (26);
فيافي
desirous of (to be) ölü
med. VIII, with for
و
عَلَى
detriment.
GLOSSARY A.
85*
S
devoted to (to be) te dog; hunting-dog
VIII with 3.
كَلْبُ صَيْدٍ
devotee part. act. of domestic see animal.
V.
die (to) lo med.
S
عسير difficult
"
باب door
درهم drachma
برز
draw forth (to); IV.
disagree (to)ėls VIII.
disease 5.
S
dread (to) impf. a.
$70/
.(23) فَعَالِلُ .pl مَلْبَس dress
قبيح disgraceful
G
dish pleb.
dislike (to) 8,5 impf. a.
كَرِهَ (dislike
disobedient part. act. of
عصى.
dissolve (to) Úĺž med.
$
مسافة distance
drink (to) impf. a.
Simpf.
drunk, drunken.
G
dwelling,15 (fem.).
early see morning.
S
- مشرق
يسير easy
East
"
-I
E
eat (to)
خص
§ 38 b.
impf. u; imp.
to give to
طعم
IV with acc.
distinguish (to)
impf. u.
1
13
do (to) Íc impf. a; jeś
impf. a (no. 139). to
eat of
pers. and e.
من
education.— to show
عَمِلَ do according to
with
S.
one's education
900€
of V.
elder pl. clé (23).
86*
GLOSSARY A.
elect (to) VIII.
elegance J.
enamoured of (to be)
impf. a, with acc.
G
ساحر enchanter
encounter (to) III.
Go
. صبر endurance
عدو enemy
enjoy oneself (to) V.
طرب
entail (to), IV.
enter (to)
simpf. u.
see § 107 note.
Simpf.
entertain (to) impf. i.
inf. 215.
escape (to) impf. u.
S
653
estate pl. ls (9).
بل escape
فِعَال ضيعة
مَد
eulogize (to) impf.
a.; id. VIII (no. 134).
43
evening (late).
43
every 5 with. indeterm.
noun. § 119b.
G
evidence .
x.
evil (to be) u med. "'
to do evil id. 1V.—
evil-doer part act. of
id. IV.
evil 9.
ི༡༦.
G
. مَدْخَل entrance
عبرة example
entrust (to) anyone with
ودع
X with two accus.
envious part. act. of .
equal sł.
I
ere, conj. § 100.
err (to) bĺé inf. bĺé.
غَلَطَ
ضلال error
G
excellent
elat. § 63 b.
w
except (=
↓) § 151.
I
M
إلا انه except that
§ 147 c.
excepting Lo with acc.
Á
excuse (to)jás impf. i.
excuse
عُذر
GLOSSARY A.
87*
exhort (to) las, impf. i, five
§ 40 a.
.medكان (exist (to
↑
exit
مخرج
عَلَانِيَة exterior
خرج
extract (to)
eye fem. § 72.
10-
وجه face
fast (to) plo med.
father § 90 a.
fault
G
X.
"
Go
§§ 91, 92 a.
flare up (to)
"
Que pl. Ce (10).
S
يوب
عبد
.(3) فِعَل .pl نِعْمَة favour
fear (to) Śló med., impf.
a, § 42 d.
feed (to) peb IV.
fight (to) with one another
PI قتل
find (to) Á, impf. i, § 40 a.
S
fight.
K
¿i v.
flourishing (to make)
impf. u.
عمر
fly (to) from impf. i,
with .
www.
Go
folk pl. § 88, 17;
شر قوه.
coll. (no. 120).
follow (to) ¿ impf. a.
تَبِعَ (follow
fool part act of dep.
for prep. J § 95 h; conj.
gls § 96 d.
forbid (to) a thing to any-
one ~ impf. i, with
حرم
two accus.
force (to) VIII. § 25
note.
فَوَاعِل .pl نَاصِيَةُ forelock
fire 55.
first ji.
fit 1, elat. 1,1.
ولي
(24).
forgive (to) ¿é impf. i.
غَفُورٌ . forgiving.
88*
GLOSSARY A.
four
I §§ 91, 92 a.
X.
.(23) مَفَاعِلُ مَوهِب gift غفر (forgiveness to beg
pl. Ísléó
جَارِيَةٌ girl
(4) فَعَل .pl صُورَةٌ form
UE
اربع
see also prophecy.
fourth
رابع
give (to)
e IV with two
friend
(see p.85*).
of God
Abraham
خليل
صديق
intimate pl.
خُضُوع.
(17) أَفْعَالُ . بَصَر.
بصر glance
سبح
pt.
glorify (to)
Aw II.
glorious
acc. to give way inf.
glad see tidings.
.(18) أَفْعِلاء
.لطيف friendly
from prep..
fruit 843.
ة
future life see life.
gain (to make) —ums V.
S
شرف glory
elat. § 63 v.
go round (to) 15 med.
"
دَارَ (round
ذَهَبَ to go away
impf. a. to go on
impf. i. - to go
impf. u.
مشی
خر
out
رسل
to let go Ju, IV.
goblet
قَدَحٌ
.صيد game
.(9) فعال pl تَوب garment
G
بَاب gate
بواب gate-keeper
god لقط (gather up (to
by God الله God : إله VIII.
والله
get to (to)
إلى
قطَعَ
VIII with
to get through
impf. a.
gold-piece Lio pl. § 90 k.
Su
خير .good noun and adj
GLOSSARY A.
89*
S
بغض. to be good
hate
elat. id.
Fun impf. u.
to
make good med.
IV.
have (to), is expressed by
the subject in the dative
(with ) followed by the
ی
رئاسة government
رياسة
or
object in the nom. (as
JJ he has money);
G
governor
S
grandee x pl. § 88, 10.
grant (to) ¿hë IV with
two accus.
قطع
grateful (to be)impf.u.
great us. to be, be-
come great
impf. u.
green (fresh).
سَلَام greeting
occasionally a form of
نَ
to be stands before
the subject (as
S
J he had money).
Jú
not to have either as in
the last example, but
with (§50) instead
S
(لَيْسَ لَهُ مَالٌ كَانَ رَه
or with following ob-
ject (§ 111) and dative
guard (to)
inf.
صون
90-
ضيف guest
hand a § 90 r.
med.,;
لَا مَالَ لَهُ) of subject
he
§ 12a.
he who
الْحَارِثُ al-Harit
هارون Harin ar-Rashid
الرَّشِيدُ
o § 14b.
head.
hear (to) impf. a, inf.
سمع
سَمَاءُ
heart is pl. J, (10).
90*
GLOSSARY A.
سَمَاءُ
ات
o
§ 76 b.
heaven zł pl. ůl hunt (to) ōlo med.
ی
to go forth to hunt id. V.
heir part. act. of pl.
ورث
hunt, chase
.
.(6) وَرَثة
hell-fire.
help (to) impf. u. —
نَصَرَ
hurry (to) as II.
الحُسَيْنُ. al-Husain
hypocrisy (religious) Ɩ5.
to demand help of hypocrite part. act. of
med. X with
,
عان
III نفق
هرقل Heraclius
عَلي.. high.
holy see war.
hope for (to) impf. u,
with acc.
دابة horse.
horsemen coll. Jis.
بيت house.
E
I 31.
. هل ignorance
ignorant part. act. of e>.
idea pl. clé (23).
if
§ 159; in hypothe-
tical clauses I with the
perf.
من if anyone
§ 159.
G
كيف how
however, with follg.
verb.
humble (to be), VI.
hungry part. act. of
med.
"
GE
Ele
hundred & §§ 91, 92 c.
illustrious elat.
§ 63 b.
imperfection inf. of ☺li
med. VI.
,
in prep. ¿.
incumbent on (to be),
impf. i, with l § 40 a.
GLOSSARY A.
91*
indicate (to) Jó impf. u,
with As..
Islam .
JIS.
إِسْرَائِيلُ Israel
جَلالُ الدِّين Jalal ad-din
0 900
القدسُ Jerusalem
. دَلِيلٌ indication
بشم indigestion
inform (to)
IV.
Jews (the) coll. NI.
inhabit (to)
impf. u.
50E
اهل inhabitants
join (to)
As
impf. a, with
inquire concerning (to)
. في X with فتى
يُونُسُ Jonah
intelligent part. act. of Josephs.
G
. عقل.
سريرة interior
interrupted (to be) ¿bö
سرور joy
قطع
justice ji.
keep from (to) ¿ix impf.
منع
VII:
intimate see friend.
into prep. ¿.
invest (to) anyone with
Is impf. a, with a
of pers. and acc. of thing.
G
inviolability &.
invite to (to) Les impf.
u, with !!.
a, with acc. and .
من
keep intact (to) ëș IV.
kill (to) Ííš impf. u.
kindle (to) Á, impf. i.
king ..
G
وَقَدَ
مملكة kingdom
kiss (to) s II.
knock (to) at the door of
92*
GLOSSARY A.
على
jó impf. u, with Á≤ leave, leave off (to) s
of pers, and acc. of door.
know (to)
impf. a;
c imp. i (no. 132),
s³ impf. i (no. 73).
knowing part. act. of;
elat. § 63 b.
970900
القرآن Koran.
عَدَم
lack pc.
S
lamp.
impf. u.
تَركَ
let (to) ¿, impf. a § 40 a.
liar (to declare anyone to
be a) is II.
liberal.
lie, tell a lie (to) váš
impf. i; inf. &ås.
كَذَب
life (the future,next world)
laugh (to) Á
impf.a.
to laugh at id. with
to make laugh id.
IV with
of means.
شريعة law-code شَرِيعَةٌ
lawful (to be) ≤ impf. i.
lead (to) 5s med.
leader see prayer.
learn (to) s V.
"
تعلاء علم
learned pl.
الْآخِرَةُ
حياة life-time
سرج
light (to)
IV.
to
give light to lo med.
,
IV, with J.
like (like as) prep. Í; conj.
E
L´S (with vb.sent.), is
(nom. sent.).
G
مثل likeness
little jus.
live (to) med. §.
úlé
1993
(20).
S
learning.
حي living
↑
long dyb.
GLOSSARY A.
93*
long for (to) ÿl med.
VIII, with c.
(look
"
look at (to)jks impf. u,
II.—
with to look down
IV. — to look into
jjb Ív.
طرق
№ VIII, with 3 § 25,
طلع
note.
$
lord.
رب
love, fall in love with (to)
حب
IV, with acc.
loves.
حب
loving inf.
W.
.
lower (to) užċ impf. u.
lust 5. — lusts ☺
antith. to woman (nos.
2, 43, 102), § 90 e.
manifest part, act.
med. IV.
ی
mankind coll..
manner
30/
وضع.
marry (to);
مریم Mary
meat.
Mecca Co.
673
medicine.
meet (to)
med.
و
V.
impf. a.

mention (to)
impf. u.
mieni.
Jes
غبة
-
شَهَوَاتْ.
make, make to be (to)
impf.a, (with two accus.).
— to make (poetry) J
med.
".
و
ام malady
المامون al-Mamun
طَاحُونَةٌ mill
G
mighty elat. § 63 b.
mindful of (to be) s
impf. u, with acc.
miracle.
S
Swa's
misfortune as pl.
man
رجُلٌ
pl. Šlaj (9); z
.(25). فَعَائِلُ
94*
GLOSSARY A.
modesty gł.
الساعة (moment (this
S
69
مُزاحِمٌ Muzahim
B
naked fem. x.
ا
piece of
name!.
narrow
(ضَيِيقُ =) ضَيقُ
اضيق elat
طبع
مال money
pl.
فَعَالِلُ . درهم money
(23).
شهر month
morning (early) 85
G
morrow, to-morrow di.
موسی Moses
مسجد mosque
most elat. of much.
mountains.
much elat. § 63b.
کثیر
to be much, abundant
As impf. u. — to make
much IV.
كثير
كثر
الْمُغِيرَةُ al-Mugira
G
محمد Muhammed
سَمَاع.
107
ह
nature pl. § 88, 9.
near (to place) →
needle !!.
إبرة
neighbour.
قرب
II.
niggardly to de-
بخيل
clare anyone to be n.
II بخل
بخل niggardliness
$
night.
noble
- كريم
ملا
not see § 150.
now conj. ś.
S
nobles coll.
music law.
Muslim (to become a)
plu
IV. - Muslim id, part.
act.
قوت nutriment
يا
01 § 85; also Le
obedient to (to be) S
impf. u, with S.
GLOSSARY A.
95*
observe (to)
عبر
VIII.
occasion (as a conse-
pardon (to) les impf. u,
with Ac.
quence) (to) ës IV, part
with two accus.
Omar.
on acount of prep. J.
one as pronoun or adj.
fem. —; with
-; with
&
ة وَاحِد
C E
pron. suffix sl.
(= some)
(§ 133).
60-
بعض
se
pass on (to let); ↳ med.
و
IV.:
pearls coll.
8,82
pebble las.
people
G
S
of.
M
جاز
إِنَّمَا only
.a 147 § لعل perhaps
ទ
باس onslaught
open (to) ~ impf. a;
inf.
G
.فتح.
opinion (to be of) slj
impf. a, § 49 b.
or ..
ا و.
other.
overtake (to), IV.
S
perish (to) Áo impf. i;
to cause to p. id. IV.
person (man)!.
فرعون Pharaoh
طبيب. physician
pick up (to) Lé impf. u.
piece, see § 73 c.
S
دِيَانَة piety
place (occasion)
درك
pl صَاحِب owner افْعَالُ . صَاحِبٌ
(17).
page boy .
.(23) مَفَاعِلُ
10
pl.
الْجَنَّةُ Paradise
place (to), impf. a.
§ 40 a.
96*
GLOSSARY A.
•
.(.masc نبات plants coll
please (to)
ıs IV.
to be well pleased with
Gimpf. a. with.
رَضِيَ
.76 § .pl لذة pleasure
(§ 83). direction of
prayer
leader of
prayer Lol.
preach to (to) impf.
¿Lś
u, with acc.
↑
لين pliancy
أفعال شعر
poem, poetry
(17).
↑
poet el.
poison
493
سم
G
pl. prepare (to) IV.
ظَرِيفٌ
polite scholar
(20) فَعَلاء
. قدم (precede (to
صلح
حضرة presence
F
G
present (gift) lo (inf. of
. وصل
preserve (to) his impf. a.
pl.
pride
كبر
possessor,, fem. prison
G
H
.(20) فَعَلَاء . امیر (prince (20) فعلا فقير poor
سجن ذات
وعد
نبوة (prophecy (gift of
§ 907.
60
.فقر poverty
قوة power
praise (to) ás impf. a.
ذكر (praise (God
GU
promise c,.
to pretend to prophecy
نبأ
P.
ខ
أنْعِلاء .pl نَبِي prophet
pray (to) No II.
سجد (prostrate oneself (to صَلوةٌ (ج) صَلَاةٌ prayer
(18).
impf. u.
صَلَوات notep 43
GLOSSARY A.
97*
!
protect (to)
حرس (protect
impf. u,i.
impf.u,i.
reflection inf. of „X V.
트
​provide for (to)
impf.
impf.
refuse (to)
u, with two accus.
S
impf. a. —
to r. to do, id. with
عقوبة punishment
and subj.
purify (to)
e
II. — to
regard, with r. to 3.
في
oneself id V.
regret pás.
purse 8.
relate (to)
pursue (to)
تبع
VIII
جنگ
حكي (relate
قرب
impf. i.
with.
put (to) des impf. a.
—
related to →ys with
reliance inf. VIII, see rely.
G
دین religion
آخر to put off till II آخر
with J.
qualify (to) inf. és.
raise, raise up (to)
رفع
rely on (to) №S, VIII, with
Áé § 40 d.
repel (to) 5, impf. u.
ره
107
impf. a; inf. ¿
رفع
رَمَضَان Ramadan
الرَّشِيدُ ar-Rashid
درك
reach (to), IV.
read (to) 15 impf. a.
recede from (to) Á impf.
, with .
트
​recite (to) 13 impf. a.
reed-pen
Socin, Arabic Grammar.2
repent (to) ↳ med.
نَدَامَة repentance
ހ ގެ
report.
"
"
IV.
reproach (to) ¿ý med.
restore (to), med.,
restrain from (to)impf.
u, with acc. and.
to r. one's self from id.
with
.عن
s.
G
98*
GLOSSARY A.
resurrection äólás.
return to (to) impl. i,
with I!.
42
right (due) →.
right, right hand.
rise in value(to) Úc impf.u.
Áé
roof
routed (to be) I'll.
rule (to)
عزم
med.
"'
run races (to) SẠN VIII.
سبق
saddle (of an ass) äco.
sea
بحر
second
uls.
secret
. (17) افعال .pl
you
security.
see (to) ¿lj impf. a, § 49 b.
seedy part. pass. of .
yes.
seek (to) „ÁL impſ. u.
to seek for one's self,id. I.
seemly (to be) VII.
بغی
seize (to) ¿s impf. u.
selfs § 12e.
حرام saddle-girth
send (to) Aw, I'; for
éls; with
impf. a.
safe (to bo)
MEM
تعْبَانَ serpont
السفاح as-Sallal
salt Alo.
save (to) w II.
say (to) Íls med.
to
say of anyone, id. with
عن
to s. to anyone,
id. with J.
scatter (to) impf. u, i.
servant (i. e. of God) As
pl. Îles (9).
فعال
serve wine to (to) gün
impf. i, with two acc.
set about (to) ↳ med.
jló
ی
with impf. § 99 note a.
سبعون seventy
ظل shadow
GLOSSARY A.
99*
shift (to) impf. i.
sober part. act. of so.
سفينة ship
S
قميص shirt
كتف shoulder
سقراط Socrates
solicitude
son
0.
§ 90
(pluralis
sign & pl. § 76.
C
silent (to be) inf. Co.
&
خَطِيئة sin
singing (art of) slic.
sit with (to) und III,
with acc.
901
قامة size
مَفَاعِيل معلول slave
sanus with names of
tribes).
(أَفَاعِلُ) أَغَان . « أُغْنِيَةً song
حزن.
sorrow
spare (to), § 49 c.
قول speech
spend (to) (of time) inf.
(27). — slave-girl,↳
pl. űló (24).
spirit
قطع.
روح
staff La.
sleep, go to sleep (to)
¿№3
stand (to)
med.,, impf.a; part. act.
pl. § 88, 9.
small
S.
صَغِير
to become
impf. a.
صغير
دخان smoke
་པ
snow
so conj. .
med.,; part.
act. pl. § 88, 9. to
stand still impf. i.
So
نجم star
وقف
start off (to) aṣ, F. w. !!.
stay (to) med. II'.
,
y impf. i.
سرق
steal (to)
stratagem als.
G*
100*
GLOSSARY A.
سيل stream
حول strength
Suba
.
ten §§ 91, 92 a.
tens
than § 63 b.
من
ذلك .pron . 13. § ذلك
that pron.
c.
submissive (to be) Ï V. that (in order that) ↓ with
subsistence
كِفَايَةٌ sufficiency
subj. § 100.
U E
that conj. f (before a
~ E
supplications.
surely Í (after !).
tail $55.
take (to) impf. u. —
فت
أَخَذَ
مح
ذَهَبَ
(of a city) ¿ïs impf. a.
to t. away impf.a.
with
E
. — to t. hold of
impf. u, with
talk to (to)
verb) § 148b;
a noun) § 147 a.
that which Ló.
then.
thereupon
$3
(before
thief jo pl. J. (10).
GE
thing 3 pl. (17)
g
افعال شی
but without the nuna-
03
أشياء tion
❤.
II, with
think (to)
impf. u, with
49
two accus.; inf. b.
ub.
acc. to t. to one an-
other, id. V.
talk $15.
tattle.
teach (to) II, with two
علم
ثَالِثُ
third J § 93 a.
thirty§§ 91, 926.
this le § 13b.
accus.
التوراة (Thora (the
GLOSSARY A.
101*
those who§ 14b.
انت thou
H
transitory part. act.of.
travel (to), med.
سار
ی
فكر thought
treasure
خَرِينَةٌ
three§§ 91, 92 a.
through (by means of)
prep..
شَجَرَة tree
tribe pl. (25).
trick.
트
​أَمَانَةٌ impr.
trust ی (throw away (to رمی
i. — to throw down get
IV.
tidings, to give glad tid-
ings to anyone of a
بشر
thing II, with acc.
of pers. and
?
time.—(proper) time
25.
نَشوان tipsy
عنوان title-page
to (direction) prep. Í;
(sign of the dative) J.
0E
truth.
turn (to) Í med.
to turn from
S.
عرض
11,
with. to t. away
(act.) 5, impf. u. — to
t. away from (neut.) ↓
II, with
twinkling
3019
Ubaid us.
S
.
.
&.
ugly as fem. —.
كفر unbeliever part. act. of (16) أَفْعِلَة لِسَان tongue
pl. § 76.
uncover (to) impf. i.
S
understanding
is.
إلى .towards prep
pl ذنب transgression
S
(10) فعول
102*
GLOSSARY A.
unmindful of (to be) w.
waste sole fem.
غَامِرٌ
V, with .
render waste
until conj.
حتى
generally
حَةٌ
خرب
- to
II.
with subj. (cf. § 152 c).
upon prep..
used to med. with
و
follg. impf. § 99 c; subj.
gen. betw.and impf.
S
قيمة value
vehemence
. عَاصِف vehement
water glo § 90g.
well.
well-pleased see please.
West yes.
S
حوت whale
what rel. interr. Lo.
when rel. interr. ; conj.
.158 8 إذا
اين ?where.
K
from
where, whenceal.
K
verily§§ 147, 96 d.
.(28) مَفَاعِلَةٌ .pl مَطْعَمْ viand
شَدِيدٌ violent
wade through (to) vóló
med.
with acc.
want (to) ol, med.
S
حَاجَةٌ want
which relat. J.
whichever
§ 14 c.
while (a).
IV.
whilst cf. § 157.
,
who rel. ; interr. o.
من
war (holy) inf. Îles of whoever, whoso§§14ʊ,
des III.
ورقة Waraka
159.
جميع whole.
جَمِيعَ.
wash (to) simpf. i.
why?; why then? fó.
GLOSSARY A.
103*
i
E
S
كَلمَة word
.(17) افعال .pl عَمَل work
world (the, this)
aí.
worst § 63 note.
write to (to)impf. u,
إلى with
ذُبَالة wick
شر wickedness
.med شاء (will (to ی
fem. § 72.
S
ريح
Go
wind
خمر wine
حكمة wisdom
.(20) فَعَلاء .pl حَكِيمٌ wise ظَلَمَ (wrong (to, to do
و
راد
مع
wish (to) ol, med. IV.
impf. i; inf. $.
with
(in company w.);
Yazid Ásjá.
(in union w., by
yes.
means of).
without
(with gen.).
يَزِيدُ
.pl. 90m سَنَةٌ
نَعَمْ yes
year xi pl. § 90 m.
F
young elat. § 63 b.
E
صَغِير
.(23) أَفَاعِلُ .pl
فِعْلَان .pl فَتَّى
ويل ل woe tol
. ذئب wolf
مراة امراة
woman
.90 8 نساء .plur
young man
(21).
piece of youth .
M.
907
زيل Zaid
wood 3,2.
خَشَبَةٌ wood
104*
GLOSSARY B.
GLOSSARY B.
part. interr. often before
the first half of an
alternative question.
I st. c. 53l (§ 90 «) father.
Ximpf.
impf. i to stay, remain.
İş adv. always, for
ever; with neg. never.
impf. i to run away.
1.
بنى .. ابن
اتی
60
E
one, some إِحْدَى .fem أحد
SE
one.
$20
I (§ 90c) pl., brother,
neighbour.
B
Ási
impf. u to take, to
sieze, catch hold of.
I'III to make; w. 2 Acc.
to adopt, regard (as).
B
IIto put off, postpone.
impf. i; c. acc. come,
come to. c.acc. p. et
end.
r. to bring, to give
somethg. to some one.
impf. u to make an im-
pression.
6-6
اثرا
mark.
pl. trace, sign,
آثار
wages, hire, reward.
آخَرُ
B
the last, second.
the next world.
fem. other.
اخرى
or to conduct one's
self with propriety.
,good breeding أدب
politeness, education,
polite reproof.
GLOSSARY B.
105*
*
lo! vessel for holding (the Arabs have
water, made of skins.
so II to pay (tribute).
S lo! see! when lo!
15 conj. when, if; adv.
lo! see!
I
impf. a; c. I pers. et
rei to allow, permit.
I to ask permission.
آذان .pl اذن
ear.
inf. I permission.
GIF to injure, molest.
أذِيَ
ردو
الإسكندر
treated the first two
letters of the name as
the article) Alexander.
.Alexandria الْإِسْكَنْدَرِيَّةُ
سما . اسم
☺
E
Ao the root, the chief
G
thing.
-region, di افاق افق
strict.
E
Suls! pl. fuLET (xhipa)
region, country.
,T to gather strength أكل
Y Jordan, the Jor-
dan district.
.Aristotle أَرَسْطَاطَالِيس
E
fem.earth, land, coun-
try, ground.
La foundation.
Б
l impf, i to tie, bind,
take captive.
S
6
اسیر
a captive.
become confirmed.
6
impf. u to eat; to get
to eat.
III to eat with some
one.
jši inf. I eating.
Ištē various kinds
of food.
part. composed of
and .
ان
106*
GLOSSARY B.
(=
except ( إن لا ) إِلَّا
(§ 151).
¿ÏÍ fem. ÏÍ (§ 14a) he
that; whoso, who, which.
I
ell impf. a to become
familiar with ...
VIII to be on intimate
terms, familiarly ac-
quainted (with).
505
↓
or آلاف .pl ألف الوف or
thousand.
Ji
intimate, familiar.
impf. a to feel, suffer
pain.
I part. interr. or.
E
امتر
I
impf. u, to direct one's
course by something.
.mother أُمَّهَاتٌ . .
of the people of a
(particular)
nation, people.
religion,
impf. u, c. acc. p. et ↳
ب
r. to order, command.
301
of
command, power;
affair, matter.lo
~DID
.commander الامر
,commander أمير
I
.painful أليم
SI
.a god آلِهَةِ . إله
شو
XXI ex Ji et xJI (the
true) God, Allah, s
.name of a man الله
اللّهُم
gií O God!
↓↓ prep. (§ 966) towards,
in the direction of, to,
till, as far as.
prince.
890009 H
the prince أمير الْمُؤْمِنِينَ
of the (true) believers,
commander of the faith-
ful the Caliph.
트
​امين
impf. a, c. acc. to be
safe from...
IV to believe.
pl. gol female slave.
.pl ا
Umayya(man's name).
GLOSSARY B.
107*
ว
C
13
id
E
‚ (§ 100, 148b) that.
J (§§ 147, 148 a) that.
-I
(§§ 159, 160) if.
!(§147) lo! truly, verily
(often untranslatable).
9༡
pron. (§ 12) I.
☺s pron.; fem. ☺l, thou.
impf. a to have fami-
liar intercourse with.
نَاسٌ .coll إِنسَانُ
.nose انف
F
305
man.
part. (composed of
and Lo) only (refers
in this sense usually to
last word of sentence),
but.
part. whence? how?
V c. rei to equip
one's self, to be prepar-
ed (for any thing). .
हु
A coll. one's kinsfolk,
family, people (cf. §133),
inhabitants.
90€
초
​I, fem. I, first (determ.
also beginning.)
Jigen. and acc.
→
ذوه أولي
¿
part. where? whither?
من ? whither إِلَى أَيْنَ
(from) این
(from) whence?
where?
sign, revelation.
(§ 85) particle of ex-
clamation.
präp. in, on, at; with, by
means of; for (of price),
by (in oaths). → → 15!
lo! there was
___
•
Babylon, Babylonia.
we impf. u to be brave,
courageous.
power.
courage,strength,
sea, great river.
las impf. a to begin.
108*
GLOSSARY B.
Jas IIc acc. to exchange,
alter, change.
X c. acc. et to take
something in exchange
for (something else).
impf. a to go away,
Timpf.
بَشَرَ
cease.
II. c acc. pers. et
1. to tell some one
something as a piece of
good news.
بَصْرَ
or
the بَوَاطِنُ بَاطِن
lowest part; the heart
or secret thoughts of
a person.
Es imp/. a to arouse,
awaken; to send.
Ás impl. u or as impf.
Jas
a to be distant, far off.
VI to be far distant
from each other.
As prep. after, after
the departure, death
after مِن بَعْدِ ... of
,to glance بصر
بَصِرَ
perceive; to understand
something thoroughly.
بصر
pl. a glance,
intelligence.
sk to come too late.
IV to delay.
X to find that sthg.
comes too late.
بَطْن
belly; bottom (of a
valley).
970
.repletion بطنة
the death of.
vas one (§ 133), part,
portion; some (of).
vé impf. a to hate.
$
.hatred بغض
id, state of بغضة
.hatred بَعْضاء
being hated.
impf. i to seek, strive.
Šimpf.
GLOSSARY B.
109*
VII to be necessary,
meet, behoove.
Hippocrates.
impf. i to build.
zlás inf.
I (§ 906, § 67.2;
impf. a to remain, re-
126) pl.
son.
(§ 90) daughter,
main over, continue in
life.
glas inf.
E
أبو
بَكْرٍ
Abu Bekr, name
of the first Caliph.
بگی
imp/. i to weep.
ទ
¼ pl. π country, vil-
lage(plur.coll.country).
¿Ãó̟ impf. u, c. acc. to reach,
attain to; to come to
one's ears.
Sheba.
Bilkis, queen of
Á impf. u to try, afflict.
بم
.part. certainly; nay,
on the contrary.
(ex) wherewith? by
what means?
animal, a بَهَائِمُ . بَهِيمَةٌ
brute beast.
I
pl. gate, door.
أبواب باب
,house بُيُوتُ أَبْيَاتٌ .pl بَيت
بَيْتُ الْمَالِ
family.
treasury.
impf. i to sell, buy.
¿impf.
107
As inf. I selling, sale.
ú↳ med.
dent.
بَيْنَ
ی
between.
IV to be evi-
(§ 114) prep.
بَيْنَ يَدَى
prop. bet. the hands of
before, in presence of.
La conj. with a nom.
sentence: while, whilst.
S
A evidence, proof.
110*
GLOSSARY B.
८)
تَابُوتٌ
masc. coffin.
Xto be well arranged,
be in good order.
simpf. a, c. acc. to follow.
IV c. 2 acc. to make
sthg. follow, to attach
sthg. to, some one.
VIII to follow, en-
deavour to aquire.
prep. under.
under.
تحن
id تَحتِ
تُرَاب
earth, morsel of
تمرة
, 1
تار
impf. i to be finished.
las perfect.
డ
nom. unit. a date.
(§ 2 d note.) the
Torah (five books of
Moses).
X to ask help in se-
curing (blood) revenge.
SA impf. u to be or stand
firm, to be fixed.
IV to fix, establish.
-con أُتْبَتُ .Elat تَابِتْ
earth.
stant, fixed, firm.
It's impf. u to aban-impf. a, to lose a child
don, leave, give up,
omit.
sä (cf. 59) fem. (or.
تقوی
101
(acc.) by death (said of
a mother).
fem. three.
ثَلَاثُ
ثَلَاثَةٌ
.thirteen ثَلَاثَ عَشرة
Së msc.) piety.
Áls fem. (§ 13 c) that
(woman).
Åå pl. §Á³ pupil,
disciple.
adv. thereupon, then.
A impf. i to bend.
X to make an ex-
ception of.
GLOSSARY B.
111*
(
.garment ثوب
strength of character.
dd new.
Gas kid.
Sá VIII to draw to
oneself.
impf. u to drag, pull.
impf. i to run, flow.
pl.
(889) جَوَارٍ م جَارِيَةٌ
جرى
-Meso الجزيرة ; island جَزِيرَة
female slave, young girl.
potamia.
simpf. i to reward,
requite.
A
III to pray God to re-
quite some one for sthg.
A the body.
Ja to place; make, pre-
pare; c. 2 acc. to make
to be sthg.; to begin
(§ 99 note a).
impf. i to become dry.
Lés impf. u to be rude.
Les inf. tyranny.
I impf. i to be great,
powerful, exalted.
jus great, illustrious,
sound (in judgment).
might, majesty.
impf. i to sit down;
c. J to give an audience.
III c. acc. to sit down
by some one, sit with.
$
linf. sitting.
unts pl. studs
جُلَسَاءُ
companion one sits
with.
جمرة
a live coal.
بير
impf. a to bring to-
gether, gather, collect.
with 2 to bring
about a meeting of two
parties, to have them
both come into one's
presence.
112*
GLOSSARY B.
3
693
جنى
IV أَجْمَعَ رَأْيَهُ عَلَى IT
ہے۔
and رايه also without)
E
with) to decide upon,
resolve to do sthg.
VIII to come together,
to assemble.
G
جَمِيعٌ
the whole, all
belonging to the
demons, a demon.
VIII to avoid.
.side جنب في جنب side.
in comparison with.
,corpse جَنَائِرُ .pl جِنَازَةٌ
جَمِيعًا)
as acc. of con-
dition: all together).
a جَمَاعَةٌ
number,
party (of people).
↓
to be beautiful.
beautiful,hand-
some, elegant, kind.
funeral bier.
impf.a to take trouble
about sthg., exert one's
self.
III to fight, do battle,
esp. w. unbelievers i. e.
non-Moslems.
es impf. a to be igno-
S
.inf جَهَالَة .rant
-igno جُهَلْ .pl جَاهِل
rant.
3
جن
impf. u to cover over,
conceal.
garden جِنَان .pl جَنَّة the state of جَاهِليَّة
of trees, Paradise.
ignorance, i. e. (pre-
soul, character.
,interior, heart جَنان
جَهَنَّمُ
islamic) heathenism.
→ hell.
ម
coll. demons,Jinn. ❤ med.
IV C
acc.
,
GLOSSARY B.
113*
pers. et Ér. to give or
grant an answer, an
audience to some one,
listen to, promise, con-
cede sthg.to one, comply
with his request.
Xto hear, in the sense
of answer (a petition).
جَادَ
193
35
I
Gus (elat. Usic.
I pro dativ. pers.) pl.
트
​dear to أحبّاء
to some
one, beloved, friend.
love, friendship.
Abyssinian.
med., to be generous.impf. u c. acc. pers. et
3
j↳ med.
by.
و
c. acc. to pass
111 c. acc. to pass
to pass
beyond, exceed, trans-
gress.
El med., to be hungry.
.nom جوعة
جَاعَ
6
(nom. unit. §
73 c) hunger.
.med جَاءَ
30
C.
S,c acc. to come.
to bring.
$5 inf.
94
ب
rei to present some
one with sthg.
until; so that; for
the purpose of; (some-
times
finally).
impf. u to make the
pilgrimage to Mecca.
the
حكة
ass pl. asia
pilgrimage to M.
G
good حجج .pl حجة
.army جيش
SIV to love.
love.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.2
reason or excuse.
simpf, a to prevent,
exclude.
curtain, veil.
H
114*
GLOSSARY B.
-impr.ito strive eager حَرَدَ -porter,gate حَاجِب
keeper, chamberlain.
حَدَثَ
Sús impf. u to be new.
II c. acc. pers. to in-
form, relate.
X to newly adopt, get
sthg. new.
G
-a story, nar حَدِيث
rative (applied esp. to
the traditions respect-
ing Muhammed).
jasimpf. a, c. acc. vel
ly after.
S
Seagerness, zeal,
anger.
حرض
II
c. de r. to
incite (to), stir up (to).
IV to burn, singe.
II to move, to stir
حرق
حَرَكَ
ـرم
من
to be on one's guard
against...
jás inf.
حَذَرٍ
up, agitate.
على
impf. u, c. s to be
forbidden to one, to be
legally prohibited one.
II to pronounce un-
lawful, declare to be for-
bidden, to prohibit.
Gás impf.a to be clever, to be troubled, sad.
Gasimpf.a
skilled.
~(~~)~) impf. a to be free.
IV to trouble, make
sad.
.impr. u to reckon حسب .free,noble أحرار الحر
.reckoning حِساب
حرب
III to make war
upon, fight with some
one.
VI to carry on war
with each other.
As impf. u to envy.
impf. u to be beauti-
ful, good.
IV to do good.
GLOSSARY B.
115*
X to find to be good.
VIII c.
r. to take
حسن
ness.
beauty, good-
أَحْسَنُ .elat حَسَن
beautiful, good.
coll. suite, servants,
escort.
jós impf.
حَضَر
impf. u, c. acc. pers.
vel as to be present
with or at.
IV to bring forward,
esp. to bring before a
sovereign or ruler.
VIII c. acc. to come
upon one (said of death).
Pass. to be near to
death.
impf. u to surround.
jés impf. i to dig.
حَفَرَ
VIII to dig for one's
self.
Les impf. a to take care
of, to guard, to be atten-
tive.
13
care, give heed.
impf. i to be right.
truth, certainty;
right, claim.
ទ
impf. u to be despised.
X to despise.
.despised حقير
impf. u to decide, give
judgement.
970
+
.wisdom <ܥܝ&
حُكَمَاء
tpl.
pl. A wise,
learned.
$$s pl. he go-
vernor, ruler, judge.
حَكَى
impf. i to relate.
Is impf. u to loosen,
untie; impf. i to be al-
lowed.
IV or X to pronounce
sthg. allowed, declare
lawful, to allow.
V to adorn one's self.
H*
116*
GLOSSARY B.
(1. pers.) impf. a.
to be hot.
وت
.fem. fever حمى
.pigeon حَمَامَةٌ
Simpf. i to praise.
33-9 Muhammed (the
praised one).
impf. u to be foolish.
石
​foolish, stupid.
impf.i to load, carry;
bring; transport. c. As
to attack; c. acc. pers.
et er. to make s. o.
sit upon sthg.; to in-
cite to some action.
.to commit sin حَيْتَ
V to purify one's self
from sin.
LII to embalm.
EU. al-Ahnaf, (a man's
name).
\ med., IV S³ (§ 44
حاج
احرج
note b) c. to compel.
VIII c. Í to require,
be in need of.
c. need, want;
c. request.
Jprep. round, round
about.
Jl state, condition,
situation.
s impf. i, to gather
together, take posses-
sion (of everything).
13
حي
impf. § 49 c. to live.
ខ .
43
دى
tribe, clan.
.life حَيوة
Es impf. u to be bad,
خَبَرَ
wicked.
,bad خَبيث
خَبِينٌ
vicious, profligate.
vile,
II c. 2 acc. to relate,
tell some one sthg.
VIII to test,
prove.
to test, try,
GLOSSARY B.
117*
G
forward, to produce, to
expel.
-infor اخبار ple خبر
mation, news, affair.
,well informed خَبِيرٌ
wise.
X bring out, draw out.
G
خرج
tribute.
impf. i to make bread, impf. a to be dumb.
to bake.
,a cake of bread خبز
bread.
impf. i to seal up, put
one's seal to.
خَدِيجَةُ
Hadiga (Muham-
med's first wife).
pás impf. u to serve.
S
¿óůD inf.
خَدَم
> impf. i to make a
hole in, to pierce.
VII to have a hole put
through, be pierced.
VIII to break through,
flow through.
impf. u to store up.
pl.
treas خَرَائِنُ الخِزَانَة
ure, treasure-house.
Sú coll. (the staff impf. a, c. acc. r.
of) servants.
S
olá a servant.
impf. i to prostrate
one's self, to fall down.
خَرَجَ
impf. u to go out,
come out, go out from,
depart from.
IV to bring forth or
to fear sthg.
ves impf. u to be some
one's special property.
$ w
خاصة
vols, coll. xols an
intimate friend; persons
of distinction.
uss impf, i to dye (esp.
the hair).
118*
GLOSSARY B.
خَضِر
I
S
as dyed.
IX to be or become
green.
chś impl. a to sin.
M
al-Haṭṭab (a man's
name).
is impf. i to be light
(opp. of heavy).
és el. É light.
ús impf. u to be ever-
lasting, to remain.
VIII to appropriate خَلَسَ
els impf. u to be behind,
to succeed.
II to leave behind.
G
xerts pl. stél's Ca-
liph.
timp. u to create,
form.
1) one's out-
ward form; 2) coll.
people.
one's أَخْلَاق .pl خُلْق
(natural) disposition,
character, mental and
moral traits.
to oneself secretly.
vals II c. acc. pers. et
من
to rescue, to free.
vel escape, way of
escape.
Lis VIII prop. to become
commingled; to come
on (said of the darkness
ás impf. u to go out (of
خَمِرٌ
fire and light).
to ferment.
137
fem. fermented خمر
drink, wine.
.med خاف
,
(§ 42 d; 44)
impf. a to fear.
in which objects can
II to put in fear.
no longer be disting-
uished).
jl
خَوْفٌ
خار
fear.
med.
ی
to be good.
GLOSSARY B.
119*
453
VIII to choose, select coll., nom. unit. 8,9,
for one's self.
در
pearl.
درة
(also as elat.) good, IV to attain, reach,
(adj. and noun), pro-
comprehend.
sperity.
دَرَاهِمْ . . درهم
a dirhem,
ی
.med خَالَ
something.
.Darius دارا
II to imagine
a silver coin.
دَبَرَ
Simpf. i to walk slowly.
3
beast of دَوابٌ .pl دابة
burden and for riding.
IV to turn one's back,
go away.
Ís
c. acc. to enter, to
come; c. Á to come to
عَلَى
see one, to consummate
marriage with (coire);
c. to interfere.
IV to bring into, in-
troduce.
Î,53 inf. 1.
entering, future,
Sjó impf. i to know.
IV caus.
Les impf. u to call, to call
upon, invoke, c. to
pray to God for some-
thing, to call to one's
aid, to name; c. acc. et
to induce s. o. to do
sthg., invite, summon.
VI to call to one an-
other, c. to bring a
ب
complaint against .
$700
.prayer دعوة
Simpf. a to push; hand
over, deliver up.
55 impf.u, c.
من
to come
next.
near.
120*
GLOSSARY B.
63
,low ادنی elat دنی
humble, trivial, near;
pl. glof the nearest
أدَانٍ
parts.
'
3 fem. world.
15 med.
داخ
,
II to subdue.
15 med., c. to surround.
دور
90
.dobt دین
أَدْيَانُ دِين
ligion.
re-
La
denar, a gold coin.
Is pron. (§ 13 a) this.
fóló (§ 15) what (then)?
ذنب
wolf.
impf. a, c. acc.
frighton.
to pl. dwelling-es
place, house, abode,
court.
lo med., to remain, con-
tinuo, be durable.
prep. on this side of,
to
S's impf. u, c. acc. to think
ذل ,prep دُونَ
below, beneath; other
than, exclusively of, bo-
sides, before.id.
¿5 impf, a to be indis-
posed.
of, mention, name,
༠༦
speak of. Inf. 3.
5 impf. i to be insignifi-
cant, feeble.
Jó miserable,
feeble.
ذلك
Ás fem. ÁÏs pron. (§ 13 c)
that.
IV to treat medically.impf.a to go,go away.
2,5 medicine.
IV to cause to disap-
ی
.med دان
to be in sub-
pear.
jection.
.gold ذَهَبْ
GLOSSARY B.
1214
,
107
the (man) of, possessor
of cf. §§ 907, 133.
Els med.
ی
to become
known, spread abroad.
IV to make public,
publish.
Lily ?l. (wgg)
head, the
chief thing.
E,
www, pl. s leader,
general..
15 impl. 57. (§ 49b)
) يَرَى
to see, be of opinion,
think, believe, consider
advisable, c. 2 acc. to
regard or esteem a per-
son or thing as, hold
to be.
IV c. 2 acc.to show.
advice.
insight, counsel,
3-
lord, God.
Limpf. u to tie, fasten.
S
أرْبَطُ elat رَبيط
SC-
curely fastened, firm.
ريع
pl.
رباغ
estate.
"
house, pl. real
ar-Rabi', (il
man's name).
الرَّبِيع
أربعة أربع.
§ [em. & four.
impf. i to turn back,
return.
& inf.
I, fem. pl. 2, foot,
leg.
جُلٌ
Aj pl. Jis,
S
رِجَالٌ
a man.
impf. u to stone.
stoned, accursed.
impf. u, c. acc. to hope
for sthg.
to be wide, broad.
II c. to bid anyone
(مَرْحَبًا) welcome
impf. a, c. acc. pers.
to have pity on, com-
passion for, some one.
122*
GLOSSARY B.
VI to take compassion
on each other.
S
رحمة
loving kindness
(esp. of God), deed of
kindness.
ردی
fem. mill.
vel to be flaccid,
jj vel
soft.
رَضِيَ
3, impf. u to bring back,
give back.
VIII to turn back.
3, inf. I giving back.
رد
Fj, impf.
impf. u, c. 2 acc. to
present, grant, furnish,
bless with, give food.
60
رزق
food (esp. as given
by Allah), sustenence.
رضع
II to set (of jewels),
inlay.
impf. a to suck (at
the breast).
رَضِيَ
IV to give suck.
impf. a, c. acc. to be
content with, acquiesce
in, take pleasure in.
God be رَضِيَ اللَّهُ عَنْهُ
gracious unto him!
IV to satisfy, render
content.
inf. I pleasure,
delight (in sthg.).
رعى
VIII to shake, tremble.
impf. a to watch, tend.
رعاة رَاعٍ
رعاة
ε pl. šle, herdsman,
Marzul, man's مرزوق
name).
.IP to send رسل
pl.
سُل . رسول
mes-
senger, apostle (esp. of
God).
shepherd.
رعية
is, pl. ble, subjects
(also sing. coll.).
Leo pl. pasture-
ground.
.
GLOSSARY B.
123*
Je, impf. a to have a
strong craving for; c.
3,5,
inf. stepping
into, aboard (a ship).
رَمَضَان to give up the عن
رمی
craving for sthg., to
name of a month.
impf. i, c. J
r. to
shun, relinquish.
رَغِيفٌ
throw, pelt with.
pl. kéè̟ (flat) cake.impf. a, c. acc. rei
impf. a to raise, lift
to be afraid of sthg.
up (the voice); c. I to
monk راهِبٌ.
bring sthg. before the
judge.
A high, noble.
رَفَقَ
55, IV c.
ب
G
to be kind,
gentle with . . .
pl.
ريح
رِيَا
راح
من
S IV med.
9,
c. acc. et
to rid . . . of.
(for) fem.,
, wind.
elbow مرافق المرفق .smell, scent رائِحَةُ
رق
impf.i to be or become
thin, abject, mean.
رَادَ
med., IV c. acc. to will,
wish, intend, endeavour
:::
bondage, slavery.
impf. a to mend, patch.
.patch رقعة
to.
med., to seek, desire,
attack.
رام
روى
impf. i to relate.
5, impf. a, c. acc. to
mount on horse-, camel-
back &c., to ride.
impf. a to advance
slowly.
ε impf. a to sow.
زرع
124*
GLOSSARY B.
S
زرع
coll. seed, green; med.
زاج
corn, green crop, differ-
ent sorts of grain.
زعزع
E to shake violently.
II (reflexive).
زعم
; impf. u to assert, re-
late.
Simpf. u to conduct a
bride to her husband's
house.
Új ult.
"
to increase, to
زلزل
be good, pure.
493
,
11 c. 2 acc.
من
vel ↓
vel c. acc. et
to marry some one to,
join in wedlock; c. acc.
to take in marriage.
V c. acc. reflex.
5 med.
impf. u to visit.
زَارَ
ölsz inf.
Íĺ, med., impf. a to cease.
J; inf. cessation. Noon
or afternoon.
jelat. Šipure, simpf. i to remove, clear
delicate, dainty.
JJ to shake (trans.). II
to shake (int.), tremble.
M
impf.u to fasten securely.
Loj bridle (nose-rein).
زمام
Gloj
time, space of time.
Lo impf. u to shoot up, to
flourish, prosper.
So
زهو
; inf.
away.
زَوَايَا .pl زاوية
corner.
med. simpf.i, c. 2 acc.
to give more, to add to.
& inf.; increase,
زيد
addition.
✩ part. § 95 d; 99 a.
سدر
impf. a to be or remain
over.
GLOSSARY B.
125*
remaining, the سایر
rest, all.
Ku
I impf. a, c. 2 acc. to
ask one for sthg. c. acc.
pers, et to enquire
for, ask respecting.
ទ
you pl.
سرج
سرع
سروج
saddle.
IV to be in haste, c.
ġ to make haste with...
E
سريع
>
elat.
اسرع
quick, swift, speedy.
Surāka, (a man's
name).
سرا
افَةَ
.beggar سَائل
the asking, a مسالة
impf.a to spread out.
question.
the flat roof of
سطح
eastern houses.
ju masc. or fem. way,
43
right way, road.
35
سبيل
.six سنة .fem ست
jiu impf. u or i to hide,
shield (e. g. from the
gossip of the people).
Ja impf. u, c. J, to
prostrate one's self
προσκυνεῖν.
S
-the fore سَوَاعِدُ pl سَاعِدٌ
في
arm.
²w impf. i, c. J vel
pers. to lodge informa-
tion against, denounce.
.journey اسفار .pl سفر
S
Xė ship.
inf سجود
مَسْجِد
iso mosque.
you IV c. I pers. to tell
إلَى
a
impf. u to become
or be silent.
s. o. sthg. as a secret.impf. a to he or be-
493
S 02
.secret اسرار .pl سیر
come drunk.
126*
GLOSSARY B.
سَكَارَى .pl سكران .ladder سلم
drunk.
impf. u to dwell, in-
habit,rest, be quiescent.
S
.rest, quiescence سيكون
سكان .pl سَاكِن
habitant.
in-
immunity from سلام
ills, prosperity, wel-
fare.
عَلَيْهِ السَّلَامُ
peace be with him!
(parenthetically placed
after the names of high
religious personalities).
6
A to put in chains.
سَلْطَ
Lú impf. u to be or be-
come powerful.
II to make, install as
ruler.
autho عَلَى سُلْطَان
1
-peace and pro سلامة
sperity.
G
Auf (inf. IV) Islām.
impf. u to put poison
c.
rity over, rule; ruler,
sultan.
impf. a to be whole,
intact.
II to bestow health
and prosperity; c. c
to greet, salute.
↓
IV c. xÏ to declare
one's self resigned to
to God; to become a
Moslem.
into anything, to poison.
poison.
سم
Eu impf. a to hear.
سمع
pl. XX fish.
Law II c. 2 acc. vel c. acc.
et to call by name,
J
to give a name to.
(§ 56 a) name.
856 اسم
.heaven سَمَاء
GLOSSARY B.
127*
سن
impf. u 1) to sharpen,
2) ordain, institute.
43
A tooth, age.
C
سن
سَنَن سنة
pl. regula-
tion, institution, tradi-
tion (of the Moslems).
Á IV to support.
;b 876) سِنُونَ .pl.nom سَنَةً
90 m) year.
(§
e impf. a to keep awake.
few inf.
سهر
med., to be bad, wicked.
IV to spoil, corrupt,
to do ill.
¿Lw med.
to sink into
,
the ground.
.med سان
و
c. acc. to be-
come lord, ruler, over...
S
سار
hour, short space
of time, moment.
G
part. § 95 d; 99 a.
med., to drive.
0 I
لاسواق pl. سوق
ket, bazaar, lane.
mar-
VIII to be equal, alike,
simultaneous with.
64 c.
سوا
(quite)
the same, indifferent to.
med. impf. i to jour-
ی
در
ney, go along, go. §
to follow one's track.
S.
-distance travel مسيرة
أَسْيَافُ سُيُوفٌ . سَيف
led.
pl.
sword, sabre.
VI to find a bad omen.
I
pl سَوْدَآ .fem أَسْوَدُ .a bad omen شوم
شَبِعَ
impf. a to be satiated.
IV to satiate, satisfy.
x✰ II to compare.
.black سُو سُودان
W
,lord سادَةٌ .pl سَیّد
•
ruler, chief.
128*
GLOSSARY B.
impf. u to be intri-
,noble أشراف الشريف
M
cate, intertwined.
S
شَجَرٌ شَجَرَةٌ .nom. unit
tree, shrub.
Xá impf. u to bind, tie.
شَرٌ
II c. Á to press hard
عَلَى
on one.
VIII to become strong,
powerful, heavy.
ور لا
strongاشد.elat شَدِيدٌ
powerful; vehement.
و
(1. pers.) impf.
a to become bad.
43
aristocratic, respected.
impf. u to rise (of
the sun).
G
place of the مشرق
sun's rising the East.
I impf. a c. acc. to be
شرك
one's companion.
Lú net.
S
شَرَكْ
.companion,ally شريك
Simpf. i to buy, sell.
VIII to buy, negotiate.
☺
Jŵ (elat. id.) pl. a éè̟ú impf. a, c. ↳ pers.
اشرار
bad, wicked. Mischief,
woe, war.
Simpf, a to drink.
wine, strong شراب
شَرَابٌ
drink.
Simpf. u to be high.
IV to be high, lofty.
height, fame,
nobility.
3
be deeply struck with.
↑
xéû pl. slåŵ lip.
IV c. Áto be ten-
derly solicitous for...
impf. u to thank, be
thankful.
impf. u, to complain.
VIII to complain.
✰ II c. acc. to say "God
1
GLOSSARY B.
129*
bless you" to a person
(e. g. sneezing).
.fem. sun شمس
Sü
impf. i to roast.
Lú med.
ی
impf. a to will,
wish.
Jl left (hand or side).
Ágú impf. a c. acc. to be
3 Gui a matter, thing,
something.
present at sthg., to wit-med. to become
ness, to give evidence.
III c. acc. to see, be
an eye-witness.
G
wit شُهُود pl. شَاهد
ness.
$
,testimony شَهَادَةٌ
ی
gray-haired.
Go
.gray hairs شيب
ی
شَاءَ
Li med. to become
an old man.
old man.
guarantee, security, a
bearing testimony.
.month أشهر . شهر.
pl.
شیخ
,devil شَيَاطِينُ . شَيْطَانٌ
Satan.
ناع
ی
Le VIII to desire, wish.
,sensual desire شهوة
شاة .coll. nom. unit شاء
appetite.
small cattle, sheep and
goats; nom. unit. a single
head of these.
já med.
point to.
Socin, Arabic Grammar 2
شار
IV c.
,
to إِلَى
¿lŵ med. to spread a-
broad, become public.
II to accompany, to
follow.
impf. u to pour, pour
out.
impf. u to be attrac-
tive, good-looking.
IV to enter the time of
I
130*
صبر
GLOSSARY B.
early morning.c.acc.be-
come sthg. early, soon.
G
-beauty, love صَبَاحَة
liness.
impf. i, c. Á to have
patience with, to put
up with, endure.
صبغ
¡
أَصْحَابُ .pl صَاحِبٌ
associate; friend, com-
panion; owner, inhabi-
tant of (cf. § 133).
pl. leaf.
is
ف محيفة
As impf. u to turn away
from, alienate.
¿o impf. u or a to dye.impf. u to speak
W
ح
impf. u to be foolish;
youthful.
63
pl. Slus little
صُبْيَان صَبِي
boy.
impf. i to be in good
health, sound.
$
متاع ..
Euro pl.
جید
Alright, correct.
elat.
the truth, be truthful,
sincere.
II to consider sthg. to
be true, right, to believe
one.
V c. A pers. et – rei
to give one sthg. as
alms.
أَصْدِقَا م صَدِيقٌ
pl.
friend.
impf. a, c.
c. acc. to
So
قحب
keep company with, impf. i to turn from.
have to do with.
III to take for com-
panion.
VII to turn, go, away,
return (home).
.thunderbolt صاعقة
X to take with one
as an associate.
صَغَرَ
impf. u, to be small,
little.
صغر
inf. littleness.
GLOSSARY B.
simpf. u to place in a
row, draw up.
VIII to arrange (them-
selves), to stand in a row.
o IX to be yellow.
G
131*
silence.
impf. a
to make,
صمود
prepare, to do.
pl.
I
relation ر . مهر
أهَا
(by marriage).
úló med. IV to befall,
و
fall to one's share.
S
.misfortune مُصِيبَة
figure, shape,
voice.
G
ว
صوت
صُوَر ام صُورَة
form.
.cell صَوْمَعَة
. yellow صفر 7 اصفر
.man's name مُصْطَفَى
VIII to choose.
Alo impf. a to be good,
be in order.
IV to put in order,
set right.
بلغ
to cry out.
ی
Lo med.
صَاحَ
,a pious action صَالِحَة
good deed.
A II to pray, perform
divine service, to wor-
VI to shout at each
other.
3 med: to hunt.
مار
صَلَّى اللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ .ship
contracted وَسَلَّم
to
11 8 صَلْعَم
divine صَلوةٌ صَلَاة
•
service,worship,prayer.
impf. u to be quiet.
101
ی
inf. hunting, what
is caught, game.
med., c. acc. to be-
come or be sthg.; to
repair to.
Il to cause to become;
to appoint, to place.
I*
132*
GLOSSARY B.
Als
ضَجَعَ
VIII to lie on one's med.
side.
ی
IV to press
hard, hem in.
.forenoon ضُحى
S
ضِيق
straits, distress.
Simpf. i to strike, beat.
Lt
to sink (trans.).
VIII refl. to beat
against each other.
beating.
3-0
inf. I striking,
a single blow,
,a ضربة
a beating.
és impf. u to be weak.
.weak ضَعيف
is impf. i to err.
.erring, error ضَلَالَة
impf. u to put close
to, press against, to
gather.
łó med.
;
to be clear,
bright, shining.
light, brightness.
.brightness ضياء
G pl. lol guest.
$
طب
impf. u or i to treat
medically.
physician, doc-
S
tor.
IV to cover with a
lid.
طبق
VII to be covered up.
úb impf. a to grind.
jab flour.
Simpf. u to chase away,
drive away, pursue.
طَرَقَ
IV to cast down one's
Ito
eyes.
eb impf. a to eat.
peb
IV to feed (trans.).
S
Léb inf. I eating,
taste, a meal, food, a
(particular) dish.
GLOSSARY B.
133*
impf.u to seek, search ¿l med.
after; wish for.
SIL inf. I seeking,
a search.
Abū
compliant.
IV id.
$
to obey, be
el inf., obedience.
subjection.
طَافَ
Abu Talib أَبُو طَالِبٍ
(Muhammed's uncle).
¿ÁL impf. u to stand up,
get up, rise (of the sun).
VIII c. Á to look
at, see.
LII c. acc. to set free,
. طَلَقَ
give divorce to.
IV to set free.
Ĺ med., to go round.
S
js
flood.
med., IV to lengthen,
protract; to be long
over sthg.
طَوِيلٌ
long.
long, lasting
Simpf. i to fold, fold
up or together.
,med to be good طَابَ.
VII to
go away,
depart.
impf. a to strive to
obtain, to covet, sthg.
binf. covetousness,
greed.
pleasant, excellent.
W
Elat. ablgood,
excellent, nice to the
taste, sweet (scent).
G
eb impf. u to be clean,
,something good طيبة
a dainty.
pure.
II to cleanse, purify. ¿o med.
ی
to fly.
134*
GLOSSARY B.
G
ی
.med طان
II to plaster
↑
with clay or mud (b).
لَلَمَ
impf. i to treat unfair-
ly, injure, do wrong to.
عبر
-adoration, wor عِبَادَة
ship.
impf. u to cross, to
IV to grow dark.
G
3709
darkness.
A darkness, dusk.
ظَلَّامٍ
one that acts in-
juriously, oppressor.
impf. a to appear, to
come in sight.
IV to bring to sight.
107
the back, upper
part, surface.
-pro أَظْهَرُ elat ظَاهِر
pass along (a certain
road).
$-0
عبرة
an example (from
which to take warning).
U impf. i to look stern,
black-browed.}]
S
الْعَبَّاسُ
al-'Abbās,
¦
(man's name).
mantle, cloak.
impf. i to be or be-
come free.
IV to free, liberate.
minent, striking.
A impf. u to worship.
101
ås coll. Å
nobility, high
rank.
S
slave,
free, noble, old.
Utman, man's عُثْمَانُ
name).
Vc. to wonder
c.
at sthg.
servant; pl. le man
(as the servant of God).
Abdallah (a عبد الله
man's name).
GLOSSARY B.
135*
G
.coll the Arabs عرب عَجَائِبُ .pl عَجِيبَةٌ
43
اعرابی
a wonder, miracle.
Ja II to expedite.
c impf. u, c. 2 acc. to
count, reckon as
.lentils عدس
Jáź impf. i to be just.
G
jolé just, impartial.
impf. a, c. acc. to be
without sthg.
lúc V c.acc. to cross over,
go beyond.
III c. acc. to treat
as an enemy, attack.
E
, pl. gf enemy.
G
.enmity عَدَاوَةٌ
Ito torture, punish.
-torture,punish عَذَابٌ
ment.
já VIII to excuse one's
عَذَرَ
self.
عُدْرٌ
excuse (in the
sense of a refusal).
E
a Bedouin.
impf. i to interfere
with, thwart, offer.
V to come in one's way.
Simpf. i to perceive,
know, recognize.
G
.knowledge معرفة
90
a favour, kind
معروف
deed.
العراق
name of the count-
ry known to the an-
cients as Babylonia.
impf. i to be strong,
powerful (often paren-
الله thetically after
he is powerful).
jjé elat. je strong,
عزيز
powerful.
اعز
Í impf. i to depose.
VIII to take one's
leave, be deposed.
i
136*
عَزَى
G
GLOSSARY B.
c. acc. et rei II
من
to console, comfort.
,gift عَطَايَا .pl عَطِيَّةٌ
present.
-impr. u to be or be عظم a body عَساكر .pl عَسكر
عَلَى .come great, large; c
عِظَمٌ
of troops, army.
II to build a nest عش
III to associate with.
.ten عَشَرَةٌ rem عَشر
عشائر .pl عَشِيرَةٌ
عشَرَ
whole; those present.
a impf. i, c. acc. to
resist, not obey some
one.
to appear to be great,
insolent.
he inf. greatness.
abs elat. bel great,
of great account,august.
a
wicked, clever demon.
Lés impf. u, c.
to عَنْ
pardon (a person), be
gracious to.
$707
عفاريت . عِفْريت
tribe, tribesmen.
assembly, the معشر
عَقَارِبُ .pl عَقْرَب
-re معَاصٍ .pl مَعْصِيَةٌ
sistance, revolt, sin.
G
giác member.
umbs impf. i or
u to
sneeze.
scor-
pion, a bitter enemy.
Jéc impf. i. or Jë impf. a
to be intelligent.
101
-intellectual abi عقل
Ubs IV c. acc. pers. et rei
to give sthg. to
one.
some
lity, intelligence; pru-
dence.
.VIII to fall ill على
GLOSSARY B.
137*
عَلَج
al illness, sickness.
III to treat.
impf. a perceive,
know, learn (that). c.
to know something.
IV c.2 acc. to acquaint,
inform one of sthg.
G
pls pl. pads know-
ledge, science.
عَالِمٌ
mark, sign.
0 I
اعلم
elat. pl pl.
elle possessing know-
ledge, a learned man,
savant.
G
'G
every knowing.
.teacher معلم
impf. u to be high.
VI to be highly exal-
ted, esp. parenthetically
after Allah: He is exalted
(§ 23).
A prep. (§ 96b) over,
on the ground of, on,
upon, at; with verbs of
entering: chez; against,
in the direction of, to-
to be هُوَ عَلَى شَيْ .wards
in a state of, to be ac-
customed to sthg.
E
dé elat. A high;
also man's name 'Ali.
elat. A high,
prominent, excellent.
impf. u to be or become
common; to increase.
63
uncle(on the father's
side); cousin.
عامة
the common
people (plebs), large
crowd.
II to furnish, provide.
handsomely.
So,
عمر
life; in the oath
Sy
by my life.
(man's
Omar عُمر
name).
138*
GLOSSARY B.
,vine أَعْنابُ .pl عِنَب pronounce 90 ) عمرو
(§ 90n
'Amrun) Amr (a man's
name).
Jé impf. a to do, make,
عَمِلَ
construct.
I to employ one for
for some purpose, to
apoint governor.
S
$ -05
grape.
Jis prep. by the side of,
near, with, by (one).
,
Le med., IX to be bent,
crooked.
ـاج
.med عاد
to return, c.
acc. to visit.
.med عَاذَ ,work اعمال pl. عمل
act, deeds of piety,
province.
9 c. to take
refuge in ...
X to ask for protec-
E
-a func عُمَّال .pl عَامِلٌ أعُوذُ بِاللهِ : tion to say
tionary, vicegerent,
prefect.
Se impf. a to be or be-
come blind.
IV to disfigure, make
unrecognisable.
101
.pl. اعمى
509
blind.
عمى
prep. away from, from
(hinderance); about,
concerning; according
to, on the authority of.
(Surah 114) "I take
refuge in God", c. o
من
from.
úls med.
IV c. acc.
,
نَ
to help, support.
X to help one's self, .
to help on, succour.
Mu'awiya, the first
Omayyad Caliph (661
-679).
Jesus.
GLOSSARY B.
139*
ی
.med عاش
to live.
Jéé
impf. i c. I pers. to
life, way of liv-
ing, (§ 64 c).
lás ult. to come early.
,
V to breakfast, to
refresh oneself early.
غَرَبَ
impf. u to set (of
the sun).
place where the
pardon, forgive.
ness.
pardon, forgive-
je impf. u to neglect.
9/01
äli inattention, neg-
ligence.
Clé
lé impf. i to be all-
powerful, victorious.
ls
Šyš
é
shut.
sun sets, the West.
IV to make to sink, II et IV to bolt, bar,
drown.
.gazelle غزال
Jé impf. i to wash.
impf. a to cover.
$
غِلْمَانٌ . م. غُلَام
a young
عن
man, lad, slave.
Gié impf. a, c. to be
43
03
Gié pl. uel rich.
غَنِيَ
-saddle غَوَاشِ. p غَاشِيَةٌ
cover, horse-cloth.
rich.
.impf. غَصَبَ
مين
simpf. i c. acc. rei et
p. to take sthg.
غنی
غار
II to sing.
med. ,
to penetrate
from one unlawfully.
Jas impf. a to get angry,
be angry with.
far into, go down.
غَارٌ
a cave.
to dive.
,
vélé med.
140*
GLOSSARY B.
Glé med.
ی
to be absent,
c. to disappear.
عن
a غُيُوبٌ .pl غَيْب
secret.
Xabsence, stay
among strangers.
F
inf. sunset.*
ی
.med غار
II to alter,
S
مَفَا
Elio pl. Zaslão key.
て
​AS VIII c.
C.
ب
to be
فَنَّ
struck with emotion,
bewitched, by.
$
a young man.
,a young woman فتاة
girl.
change.
(§ 133 with gen.)
another,somethg.differ-
ent from, no (with neg.),
except; before substs.,
adjs. and parts. it ren-
ders the converse, like
من ;-our prefix un - or in
غَيْرِ
without.
conj. (§§ 95 e; 152;161)
and so, then, and.
¿ïś impf. a
فَتَحَ
to open.
VII to open (intr.).
VIII to conquer, ac-
quire for one's self.
فتح
¿s inf. I.
impf. u to transgress,
act viciously.
jalé pl. l? evil-
doer.
impf. a to boast of,
glory in.
III to give oneself
airs towards some one.
S
inf. 1.
impf. i to flee.
2020.
.the Persians الفرس
ارس
فرس
Persia.
a horse, esp. of a
good breed.
simpf. u to spread out.
GLOSSARY B.
141*
()
399
,carpet فرش .pl فراش
cushion, bed.
óé impf. i, c. ¿s pers.
فَرَضَ
على
to impose sthg. on one
as a duty.
És imp. u, c. to be
empty,
من
disengaged,
finished with sthg.
impf. u, to separate,
part.
III to leave.
VIII to become sepa-
rated, to disperse.
Esimpf. a to get a fright,
فَزِعَ
be afraid.
Jé impf. u to become
bad, wicked.
F
Slus inf. the doing
of mischief, evil, wrong.
Las IV to divulge, publish,
betray.
Íás impf. u to be or
remain over, to be ex-
cellent.
A bounty, kind-
فضل
ness, favour.
6
impf. a to be clever.
.intelligence فطنة
Íés impf. a to do.
$ -05
,deed افعال pl. فعل
act, mode of action.
As to miss, enquire
for, some one.
فَقِير
فقراء
S
près pl.
pl. zīës poor.
As
VII to free oneself,
to become disattached.
to reflect.
&s pl. &1,5 fruit.
Ads IV to become happy,
successful, to prosper.
G
Al, ili a (large) ship.
¿Ã so and so,
so and so, Mr. Such-
F
and- Such.
.desert فَلَوَاتُ pl فَلَا
mouth (§ 90 o).
.med فان
c. acc. to pass
,
142*
GLOSSARY B.
by, to expire (of the
time for some one to
do sthg.).
X to be opposite.
ه و
As adv. vel As
before.
.med فاق
to excel, be
"
Jis prep. before.
excellent.
فَوْقَ
55 prep.
prep in قبل
above,
higher than.
G-05
the
فو
(§ 900 pl. 8ll) mouth.
¿ prep. in, into, at, on,
among, accompanied
by, by; with (before a
quality), in relation to,
presence of, in the
sphere of . . . xláš
من
on his side, of his party.
Jinf. I acceptance.
G
tribe, family in قَبِيلَة
with regard to.
phi فَلَاسِفَةٌ .pl فَيْلَسُوفٌ -comparison, re مُقَابَلَةٌ
wide sense).
lation.
As
losopher.
قَبُحَ
قبر
X to find detestable. impf. u to kill, make
S
pl. grave.
vé impf. i to take hold
of, take into one's hand.
Ás impf. a to accept.
IV to approach, come
nearer; be susceptible
to.
V to receive.
away with.
III c. acc., to fight
with, fight.
Go
As inf. I killing, exe-
cution.
S
As pl. As killed.
,Abu Kuhafa أبو حافة
قُحَافَةَ
the father of Abu Bekr.
GLOSSARY B.
143*
iš (§ 98 e, 99 d) particle.
impf. i to be able to,
can, could (also with
folg. impf.). c. de to
have power over.
X to stand fast, hold.
good.
قرار
را
continuance, rest.
impf. a to read.
S
IV c. to make one
more powerful than...
worth, value, due,
power. in rela-
قَدْر
tion to, in proportion
to .
impf. a, to advance,
approach.
II to place before,
set sthg. before s. o.
IV to approach.
V to go before, pre-
cede.
-an قُدَمَاء .pl قَدِيم
Kur'an or قرآن
a
passage therefrom.
impf. u to be near at
Simpf.
hand.
II to place near, to
take as intimate friend,
to offer, set before one.
VIto be close together.
pl.
G
pl.
أقرباء .. قريب
-I
elat.
(subst.). c.
near, close(to); related.
90-9
the tribe of the قریش
Kuraish, the Kurai-
shites.
43
قُرَشِى
nom. rel.a Ku-
cient, old, of a past time.
impf.ito stay, persevere.
IV to render stable, c.
➡rei to confess to sthg.
raishite.
horn; the
ذُو الْقَرْنَيْنِ قرن
two horned (Alexander
bicornis).
144*
GLOSSARY B.
5101
قرية.
pl.place, village.impf. a to cut off.
Lult., to be hard.
.IV to swear قسم
Asë impf. i, to make for,
repair to, some one.
the end of a مقصد
journey.
to be short.
to قَصر
3
VI to shorten one's
self, to shrink.
,castle قصور pl. قصر
fortress.
as VII to let one's self
VII c.
to become
parted from; to cease.
des impf. u to seat one's
self, sit down.
509
$ -0E
Aės pl. flest lock, pad-
. lock.
simpf. i to be small, few.
IV to make small, take
little of.
Xto deem small, think
little of, despise.
G
small, few, scant.
down, dart down (of aimpf. i to turn round,
bird).
impf.i to decide judi-
cially; to accomplish,
finish; to discharge a
claim.
VII to be finished,
brought to an end.
glas inf. I payment.
Ls adv. ever, with negat.
never.
to change.
VII to alter (intr.), to
change one's mind.
.heart قُلُوب .pl قَلب
VIII to tear away,
take away.
simpf. i to hunt, catch.
VIII to procure, pur-
chase.
GLOSSARY B.
145*
óɩ med., to lead, guide.
VII to let one's self
C.
Ų
the means to do
sthg.
be guided.
63
.med قال
9
to say, tell;
often
name.
307
S³ (c. ¿é) strong,
powerful.
ask. c. J to (§§95ƒ; 145 b prop. subj.)
utterance, apothegm.
,speech اقوال .pl قول
.speech مقال
.med قام
,
to stand up,
proceed (to).
IV to fix, setup, estab-
lish; halt, stop, stay.
I to be upright, faith-
ful.
107
قوم
as, like as.
(it is) as if ...
Simpf.u to be great, large.
V to vaunt oneself,
be proud.
S
كبر
inf. I to be advanc-
ed in years.
9/05
, great أكبر elat. كبير.
كَبِيرٌ
old.
coll. people, one's impf. u to write.
dependants,
subjects.
nation,
.resurrection قِيَامَةٌ
.foot قَوَائِمُ .pl قَائِمَةٌ
lé place, occasion.
Simpf. a to be strong.
III c. acc. to corre-
spond with.
Slis pl.
كِتَابٌ
is a writ-
كتب
ing, scripture (= writ-
ten revelation), letter,
book,
strength, force; impf. u to conceal.
So in, Arabic Grammar.2
K
146*
GLOSSARY B.
كَثر
بَ
,inf. concealing كتمان
keeping close.
to be much
much or many.
IV to make many,
take much of.
X to consider much
or many.
G
كَثِيرٌ
,much اكثر elat كثير.
many (often rather as
a subst. in apposition).
impf. i to lie, tell lies
Áimpf.
Il c. acc. pers. vel
rei to charge one with
falsehood, discredit.
G
•
impf. u to be noble,
generous.
G
pl. so noble,
high-souled,
highly
كُرَمَاءِ كَرِيمٌ
a noble مكارم . p مكرمة
esteemed.
31901
quality, generous ac-
tion.
impf. a to dislike.
VIII to acquire, to
attain to sthg.
impf. i to eclipse.
és impf. i, c.
uncover.
to عَنْ
VII to be uncovered,
inf. I, lying, a
lie, falsehood.
be carried off.
impf. u, to cause one
کعب
ankle-bone, a die
(pl. dice).
I
trouble, pain.
6/09
grief, distress, és III c. acc. pers, et ¿
anxiety..
كربة
-divi گرادیس .pl کردوس
على
rei to requite, recom-
pense one for sthg.
sion (of cavalry), squad-impf. u to be unthank-
ful, to deny.
ron.
49
193
كَافِر
ing.
GLOSSARY B.
147*
pl. unbeliev-impf. a to hide one's
impf. u to wrap in a
shroud.
impf. i, c. acc. pers. et
r. to do sthg. in some
one's place; to protect
s. o. from sthg.
№5 (§ 119 b) totality; be-
fore determ, subst., all;
before indeterm., every.
as often as كُلّما
كلم
II c. acc. pers. to
speak with, address one.
Go
self.
.treasure کنوز .pl کنز
Wimpf. u to give one a
surname contg. I.
.med كَانَ
9
to be, exist.
(Sometimes the perf. of
this verb is to be trans-
lated by our present).
c. acc. (§§ 110, 149) to
be something. c. Jto
be translated by "to
have"
G
S 03
.place أمكنة .pl مَكَان
V to speak, talk, make
speeches. c.
كَيْفَ
how?
ب
to pro-
nounce, utter.
(§§ 95g; 147 b) a corrobo-
rative particle.
.word كَلِمَةً
J
prep. (§§ 95 h; 117;
speech, talk, con-
versation.
(§ 15) how much?
لَكَ كَمَا
(J + Lo) as.
.perfect كميل
130; 131; 132) for; is
sign of the dative; on
account of, for ... sake
(giving purpose, mo-
tive); at (the time of).
I conj. c. subj. (§ 100)
K*
148*
GLOSSARY B.
in order that; c. mod.
ad
apoc. § 101 a.(§ 147)
because.
(§§ 101b; 111; 150 c)
not, no. πprep.c.gen.
without. By means of
Í a preceding negation
لَزِمَ
,tasty أَلَذُّ elat لَذِيذ
delicious, sweet.
¿ impf. a, c. acc. to
remain in . .
S "
Lu pl. f tongue.
VIII to cling to.
is very frequently re-impf. u to be fine,
sumed.
slender, kind.
509
Lėbat c. — kindness,
لطف
(وَلكِنْ often) لكِنْ لَاكِن
مَلَائِكَة ام (مَلَك also) ملاك .kind لطيف
nevertheless, but.
graciousness,towards...
G
لَذَّ
angel.
impf.a to play, sport.
impf. a to tarry,
(§147) may be, perhaps.
impf. a to curse.
delay.
impf. a to put on.
IV c. 2 acc. to clothe.
G
lop
xial a curse.
cloth-II c. acc. pers. et
lopl.cloth-
ing, dress.
Limpf.ac. or c.acc. to
overtake.
Ú, 1. pers. ¿¿¿Í, impf. a
وَلَذِنْتُ
to be tasty, sweet.
to surname, give a nick-
name to.
impf. a to swallow,
gulp down.
ää a morsel.
1
GLOSSARY B.
149*
impf. a to meet, meet
with.
IV c. acc. to throw.
I to throw one's self,
to lie.
~J (§ 101 c) not.
conj. after, when.
part. if, introduces a
condition, which is not
likely to be fulfilled.
¿Í med. to blame.
S
و
30
&
not (cf. § 150).
Ma'rib, a town in
South Arabia.
مثل
·
resemblance, like-
ness; the like, same; one
(pers. or thing) like, cf.
§ 145 b.
-resemblance, na مثل
ture, quality (of a thing).
impf. a to put to the
test.
Lis inf.
مَدَائِنُ مُدُنٌ .pl مَدِينَةٌ
مَدِينَةُ - اَلْمَدِينَةُ .town
,colour, sort ألوان . لَون
kind.
(§§ 50; 110; 144) not
to be, to be non-exis-
tent.
W
Medina.
impf. u c.
MJ, XJ pl. JÚ (§ 90p) impf.uc.
لَيالٍ ليلة ليل
night.
Lo, 13 Lo pron. (§ 15) what?
(§ 14) that which, what,
somethg. that.
Lo conj. (§ 158 b) so
long as.
ི
13-
to pass by.
"time". 5% once.
مرة مرة
.often مرارا pl.
.bitterness مرارة
، ܕܼܿ
امرو
(§ 90 e) man.
GE-0
.woman, wife امراة
150*
GLOSSARY B.
(§ 71 e) inf I.
1993
rain, shower امطار .pl مطر
,,
-manliness, vir مروءة
tus, manly virtue.
مَرَازِبَةٌ .pl مَرْزُبان
mar-
grave, prefect.
vé impf. a to be or be-
come sick.
G
مرغ
مريم
.sick مريض
V to roll (in the dust).
Miriam, Mary.
J
1
Awo impf. a c. to wipe,
wipe off, away.
of rain.
مَطَلَ
impf. u to defer (a
payment).
j's inf.
prep. with; besides;
alongside of.
.stomach مَعِدَةٌ
مَقَتَ
Cão impf. u to hate.
hatred.
.Mecca مكة Christ, the الْمَسِيحُ
Messiah.
é
E
Yo
impf. u to tarry, stay.
Ámo I to take hold of, impf. a, c. acc. et
sieze.
V to hold on by sthg.
Lú IV to enter on the
eventide; to do some-
thing late.
impf. i to go, walk;
Güo inf.
Gás impf. i to go, betake
one's self to.
ـن
to fill sthg. with . . .
VIII to become filled.
impf. i, c. acc. to
rule, govern, possess.
II to appoint as king.
509
dominion, sover-
eignty, reign, riches.
il possessions,
riches.
GLOSSARY B.
151*
مَلِكْ
مِلَاك
Åló pl. Îl king.
ceremony of
of
منع
marriage.
-king مَمَالِك .pl مَمْلَكَةٌ
dom, sovereignty.
Nov.
under .. مَلاَكَ for مَلَكْ
(85) من
+
من
لأك
13
C
ممن
)
.since مِن ذُو from مُنذُ
is impf. a, c. 2 acc. to
debar one from sthg., re-
fuse, prevent one doing
sthg.; c. acc. et to
مين
defend one from or
against sthg.
VIII to protect one's
self.
من
note b).
who? (§ 15); he who,
they that; one that,
whoso, whoever (§§ 14,
154, 159).
prep. of (= some of,
in partitive sense § 114),
belonging to; with the
negation it has a streng-
thening effect, § 141;
consisting of; away
es impf. a, c.
impf. a, c. to be
skilled, clever, expert,
wellversed.
wedding-present,
price of the bride (paid
to her father).
.med مات
to die.
"
II to put to death.
901
wo inf. death.
موت
ميت
dead.
from, from (separation, Moses.
G
مُوسَى
goods and أَمْوَال pl مَا ;(point of departure
hence in comparison -
than; through (passage).
chattels, property,
flocks.
152*
GLOSSARY B.
gło (§ 90 g) pl. šlío
water.
§ástó
IV causative.
pron. we.
.pron نحن
table, to turn aside, to draw مَوَائِدُ pl مَائِدَة
$707
back, retire.
palm.
نخلة .coll., nom. unit نخل to
بين
II c.
tray.
ی
.med ماز
distinguish.
Las II c. acc. pers. et
rei to give one informa-
tion regarding.
V
عَلَى
Ps impf. a, c. As to re-
pent of sthg., feel sorry.
ندم
to give one's self out as III to be one's boổn
for a prophet.
XVIII to awake up.
ទ
نَبِيُّونَ vel أَنْبِيَاء .pl نَبِيٌّ
companion.
S
boon نُدَمَاء .pl نديم
companion, mess-mate.
III call out, c. acc.
to call to some one.
prophet.
Sw
the office, rank,
of prophet.
IP نَذَرَ
IV to warn.
εjś impf. i to remove.
نَزِع
Ásimpf. u to be brave, Ɛ)
90-
courageous.
1701
A courage, magna-
nimity.
pl.
S
.constellation نجوم نجم
impf. u to become free,
to save one's self.
VIII to strip off, dis-
place.
Is impf. i to descend,
alight, stop, lodge,
encamp. c. to alight
at, lodge, stay with...
IV to send down (in
GLOSSARY B.
153*
particular, a revela-
tion).
a Christian, to live as
a Christian.
-dwell مَنَازِلُ .pl مَنْزِلْ
ing-place, abode, halt-
ing-place.
نَسَحَ
As impf. a to copy.
8.༥:07.
pl. m³
a copy.
impf. a to forget.
a Christian.
نَصَارَى .pl نَصْرَانِيُّ
Q
މ މ
,al-Mansur المنصور
the second Abbaside
Caliph 754-775,
Lá VIII to draw (the
sword).
نطح
.inf. forgetting نِسْيان
Lú (§ 90/) women.
Aüs III c. 2 acc. to ad-
jure by God.
simpf. a to be lively,
in good spirits.
S
inf نشاط
as impf. u to set up.
share, portion.
és impf. a to be a true
نَصَحَ
friend.
as impf. u, c. acc. to
نَصَرَ
help, succour.
V (denom.) to become
¿h³ impf, a to butt with
the horns.
ábí impf. i to talk.
نَظَرَ
IV to make, compel
to talk.
simpf. u to see, look
at, examine, reflect.
simpf. a to be soft, well
off, affluent.
نعم
camels.
$-0
coll. a herd of
& affluence, welfare.
part. yes, yes in-
deed.
154*
GLOSSARY B.
Xan act of revenge.
impf. u to afflict,
hurt, injure.
Jés impf. u vel i c. o to
flee from, avoid.
مين
Umi II to cheer, relieve.
نَكَبَ
ا نفس .fem. pl نفس
نفوس
107
3905
w soul (anima ap-
petens), self (§ 12e);
170-
affliction,trouble.
¿ impf. i to marry.
III id.
نَكَحَ
بِغَيْر life قَتْلُ نَفْسٍ بِغَيْرِ
the taking of a نفس marriage نِكَاحَ الْمَقتِ
Xid., to wish to marry.
9200
life not for a life, i. e.
without a murder hav-
ing been committed.
¿és impf. a to be of use.
VIII c. make use
J
of, profit by
kééïò pl. ¿¿líó use,
مَنَافِعُ مَنْفَعَةٌ
useful qualities, benefit.
III to play the hypo-
crite.
páš impf. i, c.
نَكَرَ
with one's stepmother.
V to be hard, strait,
troublesome.
IV to deny. c. acc. r.
ets to find strange,
to take offence at sthg.
impf.u to be fat, large.
A large, aspiring,
generous.
أَنْهَارُ نَهْر
S
pers.
to reproach one with
sthg.
VIII to avenge one's
self.
pl.
stream.
Es impf. a to forbid.
VIII to arrive at, come
to an end.
نُوح
Noah.
GLOSSARY B.
155*
نيران نَار
fem. pl. fire, hell- tās, fem. x¿ø (§ 13 b),
fire.
G
light.
H
pl. kind, species,
انواع نوع
different (sort of).
هر
this, here.
impf. u to flee.
impf. i to put to flight.
VII to turn and flee.
نَوْفَلْ
نَاقَةُ
نام
Ja man's name.
pl.
female camel.
pls med.
impf. a to lie
""
down, sleep.
impf. u to part from
some one.
Go
80, 8, the re-
Rii
كرة هجرة
moval of Muhammed
from Mecca to Medina.
Hāšim, man's name;
Muhammed's بَنُو هَاشِمٍ
clan.
Lo part. interrog.
pron. 3. pers. plur.
msc. they (§ 12 a).
impf. u to intend to do
sthg.
I w
energy.
India, the Hindus.
3
of a king.
sú impf. i to lead by
the right way, to guide
Hadhad, name الْهَدْهَا
.med هار
هان
pron. he.
,
VII to collapse.
med.
و
to be easy.
aright.
اَلْمَهْدِيُّ
al-Mahdi,
name of the third Abba
side Caliph, 775-785.
Xc. to despise.
G
ب
.insignificance هَوَان
تقوی
impf. a, c. acc. to
fall in love with.
156*
GLOSSARY B.
إِلَى
IV c. I pers. to
reveal to one, inspire.
وحى
.air, sky هوا
.pron. III fem. she هي
,
G
conj. and, also, even.
Asseverative particle
w. the genit.: x, by
God (be it sworn). c.
acc. with (§ 112).
G
101
.an idol أوثان .pl وثن
وجـ
impf. i to be neces-
sary; to be legally in-
cumbent on one.
IV to necessitate.
Simpf. a to love.
VI to love mutually.
love, inclination.
¿,impf.
leave, let.
to set, place,
II to deposit.
rei et Í↓
IV c. acc. rei et
pers. to intrust sthg.
to some one.
مُوجِبَةٌ vel مُوجِب
(part. act. IV) pl.
that مواد
جِبُ
which
brings about sthg.,occa-
sion, cause.
I, impf. i to find.
ـد
وجه
V to take the direc-
tion of .. set out.
وه
x, pl. 8 face,
countenance.
وجوه
وجه
.one, single وَاحِدٌ
-pro وَدَائِعُ .pl وَدِيعَةٌ
perty given in trust, a
deposit (of money or
its equivalent).
impf. to inherit.
يَرِثُ وَرَثَ.
VI to receive as one's
portion.
heir.
وَارِثْ
,impr. ورد
impf. i to go down,
arrive.
5, Waraka, man's name.
GLOSSARY B.
157*
وزیر
pl. vizier, mi-
nister.
Aw, impf. a to be dirty.
وسخ
وسخ
to appear humbly be-
fore...
VIII to be humbled,
powerless.
وَضِيع
inf.
وسع
Ew, impf.
يسع
to be pos-
mean.
low, ignoble,
sible, be open (to one).
IV to bring one into
a comfortable position;
to get riches for s. o.
Simpf. a to be sleepy.
impf. i to describe.
مل
description.
, impf. i to connect,
arrive at.
VI to be mutually
,place مَوَاضِيعُ .pl مَوضِع
position, dwelling-
place.
, impf. i to make an
agreement, promise.
VIII to accept a pro-
mise, to promise one
another.
میعاد
rendezvous,
appointed time.
attached to each other., impf. i to warn, ex-
will.
49
IV to bequeath by
وصی
executor (of a
will).
¿ò,impf. ¿
to lay.
يَضَعُ
hort.
VIII to suffer oneself
to be corrected.
S
*, pl. xi, vessel,recep-
tacle.
VI c. J to be humble, 5, impf. i to go forth
158*
GLOSSARY B.
to a prince. c. ds to
come to.
وَفَقَ
VIII to be afraid.
وَكَلَ
II to appoint as over-
III c. acc. to agree
with, correspond to.
¿, impf. i to be complete.
III c. acc. to come to,
arrive at.
111
God توفاه الله توفى
has taken him (the Mos-
lem) to himself, has
brought him to a bless-
ed end. Pass. to die a
blessed death.
seer.
V to trust (in).
A representative,
vice-gerent, agent.
, impf. i to bring forth.
IV c. acc. to beget.
X c. acc. to beget (a
son) by a woman.
370€
,child أولاد pl.
وَلَدْ
son, lad. (In the sing.
also collect.).
šli, dying; a blessed feast, marriage feast.
end.
عَلَى
.time وقت
وَقَعَ ,impr 2 وقع.
impf. to fall, fall
upon, light upon; c. Áć
to find some one.
C.
IV to excite.
, impf. i to stop, stand;
Ás to go up to one.
této
V c. acc. to beware,
be afraid, of sthg.
وَلِيَ
impf. i, c. acc. to be
near.
II to turn one's back,
to turn round; c. s
to turn away from.
عَنْ
near أَوْلِيَاء .pl وَلِى
43
sdg
esp. 'near to God'
saint, helper.
مَوْفَّى ,client موال .pl مولى مَوَالٍ
slave.
GLOSSARY B.
159*
és c. 2 acc. bis impf. a to be awake.
.acc 2 ... يَهَبُ. impf وَهَبَ.
to present some one
with sthg.).
part. of exclam. (§ 85)
0!
was impf. a, c. to
despair of ..
$
IV to wake.
I to have one's self
waked, to awake.
on the right, the
right side, right hand.
S
.orphan أَيْتَام .pl يَتِيم
يَقْرِبُ
Yatrib, name of Me-
dina before Islam.
05
İş fem., pl. №i (§ 90 »)
يسر
hand,power,possession.
impf. i to play (either
with arrows, by wh. lots
were cast, or with dice).
S
play, game, game
of chance.
Lew Joseph.
.coll the Jews الْيَهُودُ
,890s) day) ايام 17 يوم
يوم
30-
I WI
pl. length of reign.
on the day that...(§129).
Log one day; with suff.
90
e. g. thy day
يومك
(a 118) اليوم (125).
يوْمَ - يَوْمَيل to-day. =)
1101
f) in that day, then.
.a Greek يُونَانِي
CORRIGENDA.
pp. 56, 57 for hoadings as printed read: § 65 Nomina Relativa;
§ 66 Nomina Deminutiva.
p. 68 hoading read: § 78 Nom. Diptota.
p. 93 1. 4, for 'you' read 'them'.
p. 40* 4, rond,.
p. 42*, 7 read ¿.
p. 42*, 15 road o.
5 54*,
أرسطاطالیس p. 4, 2 read
414775
p. 55*, 7 read el.
امرتهم.
PRINTED BY W. DRUGULIN, LEIPZIG.
REUTHER & REICHARD, PUBLISHERS, BERLIN.
PORTA LINGUARUM ORIENTALIUM
sive
ELEMENTA LINGUARUM
Hebraicae, Phoeniciae, Biblico-Aramaicae,
Samaritanae, Targumicae, Syriacae, Arabicae, Aethiopi-
cac, Assyriacae, Aegyptiacac, Copticae, Armeniacae,
Persicae, Turcicae, aliarum
studiis academicis accommodata ediderunt
J. H. Petermann, H. L. Strack, E. Nestle, A. Socin, F. Prätorius,
Ad. Merx, Aug. Müller, Frdr. Delitzsch, C. Salemann, V. Shukovski,
Th. Nöldeke, Ad. Erman, G. Steindorff, R. Brünnow, Dav. Heinr.
Müller, K. Marti, H. Zimmern, G. Jacob, alii.
"Porta Linguarum Orientalium" is a Library of Oriental Grammars
edited by the most eminent German Scholars, adapted for self-study
and text-books in Colleges.
Their most commendable characteristic is that they offer to the
beginner in one book:
1. A concise but complete Giammar, as far as possible modelled
on the same plan for all Languages. For the Semitic languages
differences and conformities are specially pointed out. All volumes
published since 1885 contain a chapter on Syntax also.
2. A Chrestomathy. For the purposes of comparative philo-
logy and to avoid an otherwise necessary interlinear version in seven
grammars the first four chapters of Genesis according to the old
translations form the initial chapter. In some volumes icading exer-
cises precede the Chrestomathy propei.
3. A Dictionary, explanatory of the words found in the Grammar
and Chrestomathy.
4. A Bibliography, carefully selected, suggestive of advanced
work.
Where necessary special and separately published Chresto-
mathies are included in the plan of the "Porta."
The following volumes are now ready in English, French, German
or Latin Editions:
LONDON: WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14, Henrietta Street.
NEW YORK: B. WESTERMANN & Co., S12, Broadway.
REUTHER & REICHARD, PUBLISHERS, BERLIN.
Arabic: Arabic Grammar, Paradigms, Literature, Chrestomathy and Glossary
by A. Socin. 2nd edition. 1895. Cloth. 8/6.
Arabische Grammatik, mit Paradigmen, Litteratur, Chrestomathie und Glossar
von A. Socin. (Vol. IVa). Dritte Auflage. 1894. Paper. 6/— net.
Arabic (Prose) Chrestomathy, with Glossary by R. Brünnow. 1894. Cloth. 8/6.
Delectus veterum carminum arabicorum, carmina selegit et edidit Th. Noeldeke,
Glossarium confecit A. Mueller. 1890. Cloth. 7,6.
Arabic Bible-Chrestomathy, with a Glossary, edited by George Facob. 1888.
Cloth. 2/6.
Ethiopic: Aethiopische Grammatik, mit Paradigmen, Litteratur, Chrestomathie
und Glossar von Franz Prätorius. 1886. Paper. 6- net.
Grammatica aethiopica cum Paradigm., Litteratura, Chrestomathia et Glossario
scripsit Franz Prätorius. 1886. Paper. 6/- net.
Hebrew: Hebräische Grammatik, mit Übungsbuch von H. L. Strack. Fünfte,
durchges. Auflage. 1893. Cloth. 4/- net.
Hebrew Grammar with Reading book, Exercises, Literat. and Vocabulary by
H. L. Strack, second enl. ed. 1889. Cloth. 4/6.
Grammaire hébraïque avec Paradigmes, Exercices de lecture, Chrestomathie et
Bibliogr. par H. L. Strack. 1886. Paper. 3/6 net.
Samaritan: Grammatica samaritana, Litteratura, Chrestomathia cum Glossario
edidit 7. H. Petermann. Editio secunda emendata. Paper. 4/ net.
Aramaic (Chaldee): Grammatica chaldaica, Litteratura, Chrestomathia cum
Glossario edidit . H. Petermann. Editio secunda emendata. Paper. 4/- net.
Grammatik des Biblisch - Aramäischen mit Chrestomathie von Karl Marti.
(In preparation).
Targumic: Chrestomathia targumica edidit adnotat. critica et glossario instruxit
Ad. Merx. 1888. Paper. 7/6 net.
Syriac: Syriac Grammar with Bibliography, Chrestomathy and Glossary by

Eb. Nestle. 1889. Cloth. 9/-.
1
Syrische Grammatik mit Litteratur, Chrestomathie und Glossar von Eb. Nestle.
Zweite verm. und verbess. Auflage. 1888. Paper. 7/— net.
Assyrian Assyrian Grammar with Paradigms, Chrestomathy, Glossary and
Literature by Friedr. Delitzsch. 1889. Cloth. 15/-.
Assyrische Grammatik mit Paradigmen, Übungsstücken. Glossar und Litteratur
von Friedr. Delitzsch. 188ç. Paper. 12/- net.
Egyptian: Egyptian Grammar with Paradigms, Chrestomathy, Glossary and
Literature. 1894. Cloth. 18/-.
Altaegyptische Grammatik mit Litteratur, Chrestomathie und Glossar von
Ed. Erman. 1894. Paper. 16/- net.
Coptic: Koptische Grammatik mit Litteratur, Chrestomathie und Glossar von
G. Steindorff. 1894. Cloth. 14/- net.
Armenian: Grammatica armeniaca, Litteratura, Chrestomathia cum Glossario
edidit. 7. H. Petermann. Paper. 4/- net.
Persian: Persische Grammatik mit Paradigmen, Litteratur, Chrestomathie und
Glossar von C. Salemann und V. Shukovski. 1889. Paper. 7/ net.
4
Turkish: Türkische Grammatik mit Paradigmen, Litteratur, Chrestomathie und
Glossar von August Müller. 1889. Paper. 8/- net.
Supplement: Lehrbuch der Neuhebräischen Sprache und Litteratur von H. L. Strack
und C. Siegfried. Paper. 3/— net.
LONDON: WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14, Henrietta Street.
NEW YORK: B. WESTERMANN & Co., 812, Broadway.
REUTHER & REICHARD, PUBLISHERS, BERLIN.
SIBAWAIHI'S
BUCH ÜBER DIE GRAMMATIK
nach der Ausgabe von H. Dérenbourg
und dem Commentar des Sîrâfî
übersetzt und erklärt
und
mit Auszügen aus Sîrâfî und anderen Commentaren versehen
von
Dr. G. Jahn,
Professor in Königsberg.
Mit Unterstützung der Königl. Preuss. Akademie der Wissenschaften
und der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft.
In zwei Bänden.
Lex.-80.
Bis jetzt erschienen: I. Band 1. u. 2. Hälfte, Uebersetzung § 1-145
Erklärungen § 1-145.
Subscriptions-Preis: Mark 32.-
ORIENTALISCHE BIBLIOGRAPHIE
begründet von August Müller.
Unter Mitwirkung von
Th. Gleiniger-Berlin, G. Grotenfelt-Helsingsfors, G. Kalemkiar-Wien,
J. V. Prášek-Kolín, C. Salemann - Petersburg, H. L. Strack - Berlin,
K. V. Zetterstéen-Upsala
bearbeitet
von
Dr. Lucian Scherman,
Privatdoc. an der Universität in München,
herausgegeben
von
Dr. Ernst Kuhn,
Professor in München.
Mit Unterstützung der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft.
Preis pro Jahrgang (Band) M. 10.—.
Erschienen sind bis jetzt Band I-VIII. (1887—1894).
„Man kann fest behaupten, dass etwas Ähnliches an um-
fassender und erschöpfender Sorgfalt auf dem Gebiete der
oriental. Literatur noch niemals geboten worden ist."
Prof. C. SIEGFRIED (Jena) im Theol. Jahresbericht VIIL
LONDON: WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14, Henrietta Street.
NEW YORK: B. WESTERMANN & Co., 812, Broadway.
REUTHER & REICHARD, PUBLISHERS, BERLIN.
BIBLIOTHECA GEOGRAPHICA PALAESTINAE.
Chronologisches Verzeichniss
der
auf die Geographie des heiligen Landes bezüglich. Litteratur
von 333 bis 1878
und
Versuch einer Cartographie.
Herausgegeben von
Reinhold Röhricht.
Mit Unterstützung der Gesellschaft für Erdkunde zu Berlin.
gr. 8. XX. 744 S. M. 24.-.
Studien aus
Ein Werk von geradezu einzigartiger Bedeutung. Die gesammte
wissenschaftliche Kritik (Berliner Zeitschr. für Erdkunde
d. Benedictiner - Orden Theol. Lit. Blatt Theol. Lit. Zeit.
Fahresbericht Theol. prakt. Quart. Schrift Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Pal.
Ver. Schweizer Blätter j. Wissenschaft u. Kunst Lit. Rundschau f. d.
—
Lit. Centralbl. Oest. Lit. Centralbl.
Soc. Revue Bénédictine Archives Israélites
—
-
Theol.
Görres Hist.
Lit.
Kath. Deutschl.
Fahrb. Centralbl. f. Bibliothekwesen Götting. Gel.- Anzeigen
Handweiser Wiener Zeitschr. f. Kunde d. Morgenl. Sunday School
Times Palestine Explor. Fund — Jewish Review Athenaeum Church
Quart-Review Scottish Geogr. Magazine Proceedings of the Royal Geogr.
Revue d. quest. histor.
Revue histor. Revue critique Biblioth. de l'école de chartes Université
cathol. Archivio storico italiano Journ. d. Russ. Minist. für Volksauf-
klärung Hist. Quart.) ist darin übereinstimmend, dass die Voll-
ständigkeit sowie die Treue und Gewissenhaftigkeit der
ganzen Arbeit eine durchgängig vollendete ist und dass ein
ähnliches Werk von gleich hervorragendem wissenschaft-
lichen Werth nicht existirt. Es dürfte für alle, welche sich mit
der Erforschung Palästina's beschäftigen, in welcher Richtung es auch
sein möge, ein geradezu unentbehrliches Nachschlagebuch bilden, jede
grössere Bibliothek müsste dasselbe besitzen.
LONDON: WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14, Henrietta Street.
NEW YORK: B. WESTERMANN & Co., 812, Broadway.
XX
XX

UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
3 9015 00528 7407
{
1

**